IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | Hi! I'm David Rivers and welcome
to Keynote '08 Essential Training.
| | 00:04 | In this series of training videos,
we are going to get you up to speed and
| | 00:07 | working quickly with this latest
version of Apple's presentation program
| | 00:11 | that by the way contains many new features.
Keynote '08 along with Pages, Apple's
| | 00:16 | word processing program, and Numbers,
a spreadsheet application, makes up
| | 00:21 | the iWork '08 software suite.
| | 00:23 | Now if you are just starting out with
Keynote and presentation software in general
| | 00:27 | or even if you're a long-time
Microsoft PowerPoint user,
| | 00:30 | you're probably going to find that Keynote
has some very powerful features to offer
| | 00:34 | and that it's definitely a
viable alternative to using PowerPoint.
| | 00:39 | In the following movies we are
going to cover topics like working with
| | 00:42 | Keynote's themes including some new
ones in '08 here. Adding text and images
| | 00:47 | while exploring some new effects,
adding shapes, using tables and charts.
| | 00:52 | How about inserting multimedia and how to
create cool transitions and other object builds?
| | 00:57 | There is a new feature that
allows us to do voice-over recordings.
| | 01:02 | We are going to cover the many ways of
presenting and sharing your presentation
| | 01:05 | with others.
| | 01:06 | So let's jump right in and get started
checking out Keynotes themes and the interface.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Getting Started with KeynoteThemes| 00:00 | All right, it's time to explore themes
now in Keynote '08 and before we can do that,
| | 00:06 | obviously we need to launch the
application. Now if Keynote '08 is going
| | 00:10 | to be one of those applications you
use on a regular basis over-and-over.
| | 00:14 | You may want to create a shortcut to it
on your dock. That's what I want to do
| | 00:17 | because the other way to launch
Keynote means double-clicking all the way
| | 00:21 | through your Applications folder down
to the iWork '08 folder, there it is.
| | 00:28 | And in that folder you see the three
applications that make up the iWork '08 suite:
| | 00:32 | Pages, Numbers and Keynote.
| | 00:35 | And of course double-clicking Keynote
here will launch the application.
| | 00:39 | But I don't want to go through all of
that each time I need to use Keynote.
| | 00:41 | So I'm going to click-and-drag the icon all
the way down to my dock. When I find the location
| | 00:47 | I'm going to release my mouse
button to create that shortcut. So
| | 00:51 | that means I don't need this window anymore,
we'll close that up, and now to launch
| | 00:56 | Keynote, all I need to do is click
once on the icon down below in my dock.
| | 01:00 | Now the very first time that you launch
Keynote, this is what you are going to see.
| | 01:06 | In the background is a blank
presentation. We've got one blank slide
| | 01:10 | sitting there waiting to be worked on.
We've also got in front of this what
| | 01:15 | we call our Theme Chooser window, and
here is where we are going to create
| | 01:18 | a new presentation using one of the themes
that we have to select from in this screen.
| | 01:23 | There are 36 professionally
designed templates to choose from here,
| | 01:28 | 9 more than we had in the previous
version of Keynote. And you can see each one
| | 01:31 | of these has its own name and then
there is a little thumbnail giving us an
| | 01:35 | idea what that theme is going to look
like, in other words as we create our slides
| | 01:39 | in our presentation using this
theme we get a feel for the style of that
| | 01:44 | slide presentation, even before we create it.
| | 01:47 | Now we do have some other options down
below. For example, if you don't like
| | 01:52 | the Theme Chooser showing up, click
this little checkbox here that says
| | 01:55 | Don't show this dialog again. So every
time you launch Keynote or create a new
| | 01:59 | presentation you won't have to see the
Theme Chooser if you don't want to.
| | 02:05 | I like having it there because I have
also got this option down below which is to
| | 02:09 | open an existing file. If I don't
want to create a new presentation,
| | 02:12 | that's okay. I can open one that I have
already started by clicking this button down
| | 02:16 | at the bottom. Now once I have selected
a theme by clicking on it, I also have
| | 02:21 | the ability to choose the
slide size or the resolution.
| | 02:25 | So let's say I'm going to be presenting
in a boardroom using a projector. Well,
| | 02:29 | by clicking this little dropdown,
I have got choices for the various
| | 02:32 | resolutions. You can see 800x600 is
selected for me by default; you may have
| | 02:38 | 1024x768 selected. And then we've got
some other wide screen options available
| | 02:43 | as well. So if you happened to be
presenting using a very large monitor or
| | 02:48 | a high-end projector you may
want to change the slide size.
| | 02:51 | Now not all of the themes have all
those selections. For example, if I scroll
| | 02:56 | further down to this one here called
Imagine, and I go to my Picker,
| | 03:01 | you'll notice I've only got 800x600 and
1024x768. Now I can always create a new
| | 03:08 | presentation using this theme, using
this slide size, and then go in later and
| | 03:13 | change the resolution. But it's a
little bit dangerous. I could end up with
| | 03:17 | a lot of empty space in my slides.
| | 03:19 | So I'm going to scroll back up to the
top and choose an appropriate theme.
| | 03:23 | Depending on your presentation,
you've got a number of themes and
| | 03:26 | they're named accordingly. For example, if
I was going to be presenting on a downsizing
| | 03:30 | strategy for the organization I
probably wouldn't select Fun Theme down here.
| | 03:35 | I'd probably go all the way up to
the top here and select something like
| | 03:40 | Gradient or even Black. So making that
selection and then coming down to the
| | 03:45 | Choose button will choose that theme
for me and start my brand new presentation.
| | 03:51 | So here you can see I have got one
blank slide sitting in front of me in
| | 03:55 | this brand new presentation. I see a
thumbnail representation of that slide over
| | 03:59 | here in the left-hand column and it
looks there is nothing on this slide, but
| | 04:03 | when I look at it here there appears
to be two placeholders: one for a title
| | 04:09 | and one for a subtitle. So Keynote is
assuming here that my very first slide in
| | 04:14 | my presentation will
have a title and a subtitle.
| | 04:17 | Well, let's see what happens. Where it says
Double-click to edit, I'm going to double-click.
| | 04:21 | My flashing cursor appears,
that text disappears and I can
| | 04:25 | type in my own. Same thing for the
subtitle, I'm going to double-click and
| | 04:36 | enter my text. And now I'm going to
click outside that selection to deselect the box
| | 04:41 | and there is my very
first slide in my presentation.
| | 04:43 | Now what happens when you have made
your theme selection from the Theme Chooser,
| | 04:48 | you started creating your slides,
and you realize maybe this is not
| | 04:51 | the best theme? Well, you can
always change themes later on.
| | 04:54 | Notice that I have got a Themes button up here
and we'll be exploring the UI in greater detail
| | 04:59 | in the next movie, but right now
I want to show you that I can change
| | 05:02 | themes right here. If I would rather
choose something like this one here,
| | 05:06 | I'm going to see that change
instantaneously. Now, you have to be careful
| | 05:10 | because you can change themes for
individual slides or for your whole
| | 05:14 | presentation. The way I just did it,
I changed it for one single slide and
| | 05:19 | in reality I could have a different theme
for every slide in my presentation, but
| | 05:25 | that really doesn't make sense
because then it starts to be distracting and
| | 05:28 | even unprofessional in looks.
| | 05:30 | So what I'm going to do is go back
up to my Themes dropdown and show you
| | 05:35 | the Theme Chooser is available right at the
very top. So I can go back to the Theme Chooser,
| | 05:39 | select a theme, I'm going to
choose this one here. Choose my Size,
| | 05:45 | I'm going to leave it at 800x600. And
notice that I have also got the ability to
| | 05:51 | apply this theme to all of the slides
in my presentation, regardless of their layout,
| | 05:56 | or to individual or selected slides.
And I'm going to leave it at All Slides.
| | 06:02 | When I click Choose, I'm going to see
that change right in front of my eyes.
| | 06:07 | I've still got the title and subtitle
showing up in this first slide of my presentation
| | 06:12 | but the look is much different.
So let's talk about this particular slide.
| | 06:17 | This is what we call our
title with subtitle slide, but
| | 06:20 | what if I don't like that layout? Well,
there are a number of masters to choose from
| | 06:25 | and they show up here.
| | 06:26 | If I click the Masters dropdown for
example, notice that title and subtitle is
| | 06:31 | selected. Of course, Keynote assumes
that we're going to create this type of slide
| | 06:35 | at the beginning of a presentation.
| | 06:37 | Well, let's click out here and see
what happens when we add a new slide.
| | 06:40 | I'm going to click the New button right up
here, the Plus sign. Notice that the new slide
| | 06:45 | is actually a different layout.
If I go up to my Masters dropdown now,
| | 06:50 | the one that's checked off is called
Title & Bullets. But if I wanted something
| | 06:54 | different like maybe just bullets or
title & bullets in two columns, well,
| | 07:01 | I can change that just by clicking it
and when you make a change like that,
| | 07:05 | every time you add a new slide from
that point forward that's the layout
| | 07:08 | you're going to get. There is my
next new slide and my next one.
| | 07:13 | So of course, depending on what
you select from the Masters dropdown
| | 07:17 | you're really choosing what your new slides
are going to look like but you can always
| | 07:21 | go back and change them up.
| | 07:22 | All right, one other thing that I
want to tell you about involves themes
| | 07:27 | again and one of the things that we
saw is that by default when we launch
| | 07:31 | Keynote, the Theme Chooser does show up.
But there are preferences to say don't show that
| | 07:36 | but give me a default theme.
Let's say you do a regular presentation,
| | 07:41 | let's say it's a weekly meeting that
you present in and you want to have a
| | 07:44 | consistent look and feel for every one
of those presentations. So there is a theme,
| | 07:48 | a particular theme that you use
over and over and over and you want that
| | 07:52 | to be the default theme and you
will change it when you need to create
| | 07:55 | something different.
| | 07:56 | Well, you can do that by going up to
the Preferences. So I'm going to click on
| | 08:00 | Keynote here and then Preferences.
Notice that General is selected up here at
| | 08:05 | the top and by default I have got Show
Theme Chooser. That's for new documents.
| | 08:10 | Well, I could also choose to use a
theme by clicking Use theme and currently
| | 08:15 | White shows up as the default. Every
time I create a brand new presentation now
| | 08:20 | I won't see the Theme Chooser, I'll be
using that White theme. But I can choose
| | 08:25 | a different theme by clicking the
Choose button and if this is the one I use on
| | 08:28 | a regular basis, I would select it.
| | 08:31 | Choose the Size and notice that
it shows up now as the new theme.
| | 08:35 | So when I close this, every time I go to create
a brand new presentation, I go up to File
| | 08:41 | and New, or Command+N, notice that I
get that new presentation created using
| | 08:48 | my default theme. I'm going to close that
up. I don't really need it and I'm going
| | 08:53 | to go back to my Keynote Preferences
and change it back to Show Theme Chooser.
| | 08:59 | I'll close up my Preferences and
save. So now every time I go to
| | 09:04 | create a new presentation I'll see the
Theme Chooser and it will allow me to
| | 09:08 | choose my themes and my slide sizes and
in any occasion where you use the same
| | 09:14 | theme over and over, you may
want to change that preference.
| | 09:17 | All right, I'm going to close this
presentation as well. I don't need it.
| | 09:20 | I'm not going to save my changes.
That covers working with themes.
| | 09:25 | Next, we're going to take a look at the
Keynote interface and take a brief tour.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| A tour of the interface| 00:02 | In this movie, we are going to get a
quick overview of the Keynote interface,
| | 00:05 | just to get you familiar with the
important buttons and the various palettes
| | 00:09 | that you are going to be
needing to build your presentations.
| | 00:12 | So we are going to start by creating a
new presentation, so we can see all of
| | 00:16 | the buttons that are available to us.
That means going up to the File menu.
| | 00:20 | We opened up Keynote in the previous lesson
so it's still open here and you can
| | 00:24 | go ahead and open up Keynote if you
haven't already. And then from the File menu
| | 00:28 | we are going to choose New.
| | 00:29 | Notice that there is a keyboard
shortcut. Command+N as in New will create a
| | 00:33 | brand new presentation for us.
All right. So because this is a brand new
| | 00:37 | presentation, I have got my Theme
Chooser. I have got that option selected,
| | 00:41 | that it shows up each time. I'm just
going to choose a simple theme here.
| | 00:45 | Let's just scroll down a little bit and
go to Leather Book and click the Choose button
| | 00:52 | to start our presentation.
| | 00:53 | So here we are with our first slide,
in our presentation, and by creating a
| | 00:57 | brand new presentation, we get all of
these buttons showing up on the toolbar
| | 01:00 | across the top.
| | 01:02 | So really it doesn't matter what
theme you have chosen here, we are not
| | 01:04 | actually going to create a
presentation, but we do need to start one to see
| | 01:08 | these buttons.
| | 01:09 | Now, across the very top of your screen
where it says Keynote, this is our menu
| | 01:13 | Bar, and of course clicking File will
give us File options. So the commands you
| | 01:18 | see here, like New, Open, Close, Save,
all related to working with file as a whole.
| | 01:25 | If I go up to the Edit menu, you can
see a number of these commands are not
| | 01:28 | available, like Undo and Redo. I
haven't done anything yet, so there is nothing
| | 01:31 | to undo. There is nothing to Cut, Copy,
or Paste, but all of these have to do
| | 01:36 | with editing.
| | 01:37 | Under the Insert menu, if I wanted to
I could come here to insert things like
| | 01:42 | Text Boxes, Shapes, Tables, Functions,
Charts, and so on. But there are other
| | 01:47 | ways to do this that we
are going to explore as well.
| | 01:50 | Then we have got the Slide dropdown.
Here is where we can go if we want to
| | 01:54 | create a brand new slide. So as we add
slides to our presentation and build it
| | 01:59 | up, this is where we can go, or we can
use the keyboard, Shift+Command+N, to
| | 02:03 | create new slides.
| | 02:04 | We can also navigate through our
slides here. Skipping slides and using Go To
| | 02:08 | to go to specific slides if we wanted to,
or move through the slides, going to
| | 02:13 | the next or the previous slide.
| | 02:15 | From the Format menu, a lot of
formatting commands. Formatting fonts and text
| | 02:20 | if we are working with text in a slide.
Tables, Charts, and Shapes are kind of
| | 02:24 | grouped together. We are going to be
doing a lot of this stuff as we move
| | 02:27 | through this title. Then we have got
copy and pasting styles, masking, all
| | 02:32 | kinds of formatting
options under the Format menu.
| | 02:35 | Under Arrange, if we are working with
objects on our slides, so shapes and
| | 02:40 | graphic images, for example, we can
arrange them from the Arrange menu,
| | 02:44 | bringing them forward or backward, so
we are overlapping them in the right
| | 02:48 | order. Aligning and distributing
objects, flipping them, all kinds of cool
| | 02:53 | options here under the Arrange menu.
When we start to work with graphics and
| | 02:57 | multimedia later on, this will come in handy.
| | 02:59 | Under the View menu, notice that here
we can play our slideshow, and there is a
| | 03:03 | keyboard shortcut for that as well.
We can Rehearse Slideshows. We have got
| | 03:08 | different views grouped together here,
there are four of them: Navigator,
| | 03:11 | Outline, Slide Only, and Light Table.
Remember those because there is another
| | 03:16 | way to change our views as well.
| | 03:18 | Currently selected by the checkmark
here is our Navigator view, and that's what
| | 03:22 | we see in the background here, a slide
with a thumbnail down the left-hand side
| | 03:26 | in the Navigator Pane, and that
helps us move between our slides and edit
| | 03:31 | slides at the same time. But there is
some other views. Depending on the type
| | 03:34 | of slide presentation you are
working on, you may want to change views.
| | 03:37 | Here is where we can go to show things
like Rulers and Guides. Hide Guides if
| | 03:43 | they are on. Show Presenter Notes.
Master Slides, and so on. All of this stuff
| | 03:48 | we can do from the View menu.
| | 03:51 | Under the Window menu is where we would
go to do things like minimize and zoom
| | 03:55 | in a window. If we have got multiple
presentations up, we can bring something
| | 04:00 | to the front, or they will all be
listed down here at the bottom of this menu,
| | 04:04 | so we can switch between the various
slide presentations by clicking it on this menu.
| | 04:09 | Of course, at the very end is our
Help menu where we can get Keynote Help.
| | 04:14 | There is a Welcome to Keynotes
document, there is Video Tutorials and iWork
| | 04:20 | Tour, and all kinds of helpful
documents and shortcuts and so on to help you
| | 04:25 | use this application. Of course, you
are going to learn everything you need in
| | 04:29 | this title.
| | 04:32 | So let's go to the toolbar now and from
the toolbar, notice that we have a New
| | 04:36 | button. Well, actually all of these
commands that you see on the toolbar are
| | 04:40 | shortcuts for things we have
already seen in some of these menus.
| | 04:44 | So for example, to create a new slide
we could click the New button, that will
| | 04:49 | add a new slide to our presentation,
but we know we can also go to the Slide
| | 04:53 | menu and choose New Slide from there.
So it's a shortcut. In other words, these
| | 04:57 | commands are some of the more commonly
used commands, and they will be at your
| | 05:01 | fingertips here on the toolbar. The
toolbar by the way is totally customizable.
| | 05:06 | We'll be looking at that later on in
this title. But for now we'll just use the default.
| | 05:10 | If we want to play our slide
presentation, we can do it right from here.
| | 05:15 | Then we have got View. Themes. You can
see we have got Masters here. Each one
| | 05:19 | of these has a little black triangle
indicating that there are some commands or
| | 05:24 | options that appear on a dropdown under
these buttons. So Text Box for example
| | 05:29 | does not, but Shapes does. Table does
not, Charts does. We have got some other
| | 05:35 | options here as well.
| | 05:36 | So let's go to our View button here and
when we click it, because it does have
| | 05:40 | one of those little triangles, we
have a number of options. There is those
| | 05:44 | views again: Navigator, currently
selected, Outline, Slide Only, and Light
| | 05:50 | Table. Let's take a quick
look at some of these views.
| | 05:53 | So we are currently in the Navigator
view, which gives us this navigation pane
| | 05:56 | on the left-hand side and then our
slide on the right where we can work on it.
| | 06:00 | If we switch to Outline, look what
happens, this pane over here switches to
| | 06:05 | Outline mode.
| | 06:06 | Now, for those of you who are familiar
with Microsoft PowerPoint, there is an
| | 06:11 | Outline view in that application as
well, and it's an ideal view for working
| | 06:16 | with slides that contain a lot of text.
| | 06:18 | So for example, if I come into my slide
here and double-click to edit the title
| | 06:24 | and then double-click to add a subtitle,
you will notice that, that text shows
| | 06:32 | up over here in Outline view. Now,
what's kind of neat is I can come in here to
| | 06:36 | make those changes. I don't
have to work on the slide itself.
| | 06:41 | Another view, if we go back to our
View dropdown is Slide Only. So Slide Only
| | 06:45 | allows us to work on the slides, play
our presentations, but we don't have any
| | 06:49 | navigation pane. So to move from slide-
to-slide we can use the keyboard, or of
| | 06:54 | course we know that we can go to the
Slide dropdown and use the Go To option to
| | 06:58 | move through the various
slides in our presentation.
| | 07:02 | If we go back to the View dropdown,
one last one to talk about is called the
| | 07:05 | Light Table in Keynote. This will show
a thumbnail of each of the slides in our
| | 07:10 | presentation.
| | 07:12 | So I'm going to come up here to create
a new slide. Notice that the new slide
| | 07:15 | appears here in a thumbnail preview.
If I switch views back to my Navigator,
| | 07:21 | I can now work on my new slide. I'm going
to type in a title, and down below
| | 07:28 | I'm going to add just a few items here,
like Ice Breaker, Keynote, Break, there we go.
| | 07:40 | So let's switch back to that Light
Table view. In the old days when we worked
| | 07:44 | with acetate slides and so on, we would
put these on the light table to see the
| | 07:47 | contents of the slide and then we
could rearrange the slide presentation by
| | 07:52 | just moving or dragging around our
slides. Well, same thing here in this view,
| | 07:56 | and if you use PowerPoint, it's called
Slide Sorter view in that application.
| | 08:00 | We just click and drag to move our
slides around and reorder them. So this is
| | 08:05 | the ideal view for reordering our slides.
| | 08:08 | I am going to switch back to the
Navigator now. This is the most popular view
| | 08:13 | for working on slides and then having
easy access to navigation between the
| | 08:17 | various slides in your presentation.
| | 08:19 | Now, at the bottom half of the View
dropdown you will notice separated by a
| | 08:23 | line here, contains items that can
be shown or hidden if they are shown.
| | 08:28 | For example, rulers, the Format Bar,
presenter notes, and master slides can all
| | 08:34 | be shown while you work on your
presentation and then if they are shown, here
| | 08:38 | is where you go to hide them.
| | 08:39 | So if I click on Show Rulers for
example, you will notice a ruler showing up
| | 08:43 | across the top of my screen, and down
the left-hand side. This is great if I'm
| | 08:47 | working with objects on my presentation,
I want to line them up and get exact
| | 08:52 | measurements.
| | 08:53 | So if I go back to View, you will
notice now that it says Hide Rulers, and this
| | 08:57 | is where I go to hide those rulers. But
before I do that, there are some other
| | 09:01 | things you can do with rulers.
| | 09:02 | Right now you can see 0 is at the
center, horizontally, as well as the center
| | 09:07 | vertically. Now, if you don't like
that, if you would rather have 0 at the
| | 09:10 | top-left corner, you can do that,
and change the units. Right now we are
| | 09:14 | working in a percentage, so a
percentage of our slide, but we can change those
| | 09:19 | units by going up to the Keynote
Preferences, and from here clicking on Rulers.
| | 09:24 | You will notice that I'm using
Centimeters. You may be using something
| | 09:28 | different. But it really doesn't matter
if we display the Ruler Units as a percentage.
| | 09:33 | Notice now over here that I have got 0
still in the center, but I have got 10,
| | 09:37 | 20, 30, 40, and 50, so this is a
percentage. Well, I was working in
| | 09:42 | Centimeters. I can change that to Inches.
Nothing happens over here on my ruler
| | 09:47 | unless I deselect Display Ruler Units
as a percentage. So now I'm working in Inches.
| | 09:54 | Now, we can also use Guides. So I'm
just going to close this up and show you
| | 09:58 | that like any graphics application we
can drag guides off of the ruler. So if I
| | 10:03 | click and drag, you can see that yellow
guide shows up. If I want to move it to
| | 10:06 | the 3 inch mark, for example there, as
well as the 3 inch mark down here, so I
| | 10:12 | can line things up in the top-left
corner and size them appropriately. Guides
| | 10:16 | can be very useful. Then we can also
make it so that objects snap to those
| | 10:21 | guides and so on.
| | 10:22 | Well, if I go up to my View dropdown
now, you will notice that if I hide the
| | 10:27 | ruler, the ruler is gone,
but the guides are still there.
| | 10:31 | So I'm going to go back to View, turn
back on my ruler by clicking Show Rulers,
| | 10:37 | and look at some other options now on
the View menu, such as the Format Bar.
| | 10:42 | Clicking Show Format Bar brings that
open. Now, you can see there is nothing
| | 10:46 | highlighted here, everything is pretty
much dimmed out, but it all has to deal
| | 10:50 | with working with text. So if I click
on my title, for example, you can see the
| | 10:54 | font that's being used. Over here the
typeface, set to Regular. The Size. So
| | 11:01 | the font size is set to 60. There is
the Color. There are enhancements we can
| | 11:06 | make, like Bolding, Italics, and
Underlining. Some Alignment buttons.
| | 11:10 | Look over here. We have also got the
ability to set the Line Spacing, set to
| | 11:14 | Single right now or one. We have got a
button next to that that will help us if
| | 11:19 | we wanted to choose a number of columns,
if we are working in columns. Right
| | 11:22 | now we are working in one single column.
Then we have got Stroke options here
| | 11:27 | for line styles.
| | 11:29 | Notice that we have got some options
for line color as well as fill. So we can
| | 11:33 | get really fancy with text using the
Format Bar. When we are not using it,
| | 11:38 | we can go back to the View dropdown
and choose to hide the Format Bar.
| | 11:42 | All right. If we are done with these
guides, we can click on them, and just
| | 11:46 | drag them back onto the ruler, and
that will remove them from our slide. But
| | 11:51 | we'll keep the ruler on, that can come
in very handy when you are working with
| | 11:55 | slide presentations.
| | 11:57 | Notice down below here we have also got
on the View menu, Show Presenter Notes
| | 12:02 | and Master Slides.
| | 12:03 | Now, as a presenter, if you are going
to make notes-- For example, here on the
| | 12:07 | Welcome slide, there are certain things
I want to do like Introduce our keynote
| | 12:14 | speaker. This would be a reminder to me
as the presenter. Now, these are notes
| | 12:18 | I can print out if I want to have them
with me, or I can choose to show these
| | 12:22 | on my screen button, not on the
projector as I'm presenting, which is a great
| | 12:26 | way to keep me on track. So we'll talk
more about notes a little bit later on,
| | 12:30 | but here is where we go to show those notes.
| | 12:33 | Of course, we have also got something
called master slides. We looked at master
| | 12:38 | slides in the previous lesson, when we
went up to Masters to choose a layout
| | 12:42 | for our slides.
| | 12:43 | Well, by showing master slides we
actually see the various masters in our
| | 12:48 | presentation. So we can select them
from here. Just a nice little shortcut.
| | 12:54 | Currently, you can see what is selected.
Up here I have got Title & Subtitle.
| | 12:58 | If I go to the second slide in my
presentation, you can see the checkmark shows
| | 13:02 | up here next to Title & Bullets.
| | 13:05 | Now, if I rather have Title & Bullets -
2 Columns, I can go over here, click on
| | 13:09 | that. It actually changes it for me.
I'm going to go back up to Title & Bullets.
| | 13:15 | Now I'm viewing the master over here,
so I can work with the master itself.
| | 13:21 | To go back to the slide, I click on the
slide to view its contents. So later on
| | 13:27 | when we are working with masters,
we'll probably want to show master slides.
| | 13:31 | Right now we are going to go to the
View dropdown and Hide Master Slides, and
| | 13:36 | we'll go back up here and hide our
Presenter Notes. I'm going to come up top
| | 13:42 | and hide my Rulers.
| | 13:44 | Now, another option when you are
collaborating on a presentation is to use
| | 13:49 | Comments. Notice it looks like a
little sticky notepad. Well, right now
| | 13:53 | Comments are being shown by default.
So if I'm collaborating with someone and
| | 13:58 | someone has some input into my
presentation, they can use these little comments
| | 14:02 | that appear on the toolbar here. This
will allow me to insert a comment as I
| | 14:06 | pass it on to the next person.
| | 14:08 | Well, you can see that comment shows up
here. I can close a comment from here,
| | 14:16 | but I can also from the View dropdown
hide all the comments in a presentation.
| | 14:21 | They are still there, they are just
hidden, and I can't actually add any
| | 14:24 | comments at this point.
| | 14:25 | So the default is to Show Comments,
show some here on the screen. We can move
| | 14:31 | them around, and of course,
we can close them as well.
| | 14:34 | All right, next on the toolbar we have
got Themes. We talked about Themes in
| | 14:38 | the previous lesson. We can choose
Themes for a current slide, and of course we
| | 14:43 | can use the Theme Chooser from this
dropdown to select themes for an entire
| | 14:48 | presentation if we wanted to.
| | 14:51 | We also talked about masters in the
previous lesson, from the Masters dropdown,
| | 14:55 | you can see the current master
that's being used or the layout for this
| | 14:58 | particular slide, and we can change
them up just by clicking on our selection.
| | 15:05 | Text Box, I accidentally hit that one a
moment ago, and added text, so anytime
| | 15:10 | we want to add text to a slide, this is
how we do it. Hitting the Delete Key on
| | 15:14 | the keyboard removes that, if we don't want it.
| | 15:16 | Here is where we are going to be going
later on to add shapes. Look at all the
| | 15:19 | different shapes we have. Lines,
arrows, we have got squares, rectangles,
| | 15:24 | circles, all kinds of different shapes,
and down at the bottom you can see we
| | 15:28 | have got a real interesting one here,
which is a path, and we'll be talking
| | 15:31 | about moving objects along a
path later on in this title.
| | 15:35 | Here is where we go to add a table, and
we'll be dedicating an entire lesson to
| | 15:40 | working with tables as well as charts.
And there is various kinds of charts,
| | 15:45 | different bar graphs, three-
dimensional ones, stacking. You can see we have
| | 15:49 | also got pie charts down below. So all
kinds of options for creating charts or
| | 15:54 | adding charts to a presentation in Keynote.
| | 15:58 | We talked about comments a moment ago.
Here is where we are going to be going
| | 16:02 | later on to create Smart Builds. You
can see from this dropdown we have got
| | 16:06 | different transitional options:
Dissolving, Flipping, we have got the Grid,
| | 16:10 | Push, Shuffle, all kinds of different
transition options that we'll talk about later on.
| | 16:16 | Of course, when we are working with
images in a presentation, we can edit those
| | 16:21 | images, or improve those images right
within our presentation. We don't have to
| | 16:24 | go out to graphics application to do that
and bring it back into our presentation.
| | 16:28 | We have got Masking, Alpha, Grouping,
and maneuvering our images here right
| | 16:35 | from the toolbar.
| | 16:36 | Then we have the Inspector, and if we
click the Inspector, you can see we have
| | 16:40 | got some different options across the
top. We are going to be working with the
| | 16:43 | Inspector throughout this title. You
can see the Document Inspector. Over here
| | 16:48 | we have got another one for our slides.
| | 16:51 | Next we have got some transitions or
build options: Text, Shapes. There is
| | 16:57 | Rulers. It was selected. So we can work
with our Rulers, Tables, Charts, and so on.
| | 17:02 | To close the Inspector, click the Close
button. Media is where we are going to
| | 17:07 | go to add media to a presentation.
It could be a graphical image like a
| | 17:12 | photograph, it could be a movie, it
could be sound. This is our media browser
| | 17:16 | and this is where we get access to all
of those different multimedia options to
| | 17:21 | add to a presentation.
| | 17:23 | Colors is where we go to work with
colors in our presentation. So we get the
| | 17:27 | full, I'm going to give that a click,
the full color wheel, and you can see I
| | 17:31 | have got all kinds of options here for
working with colors in a presentation.
| | 17:36 | But we'll save that for later when we
have got objects like Shapes and so on
| | 17:40 | that we want to work with colors in.
| | 17:41 | Then we have also got our Fonts
buttons down at the end here. We can show or
| | 17:46 | hide the Font window by clicking this,
and we have all of the fonts and the
| | 17:50 | various families and typefaces, sizing
options at our fingertips when we have
| | 17:56 | got the Font window open.
I'm going to close that up.
| | 18:00 | You will notice I have got this
double arrow over here, and when I click on
| | 18:04 | that I see Format Bar. So I can get
access to that Format Bar that we looked at
| | 18:08 | from the View dropdown just by clicking
here. Clicking this and choosing Format
| | 18:14 | Bar will bring that up.
Clicking it again will close it.
| | 18:18 | All right. Now, down at the bottom
of our screen, we have also got some
| | 18:21 | options. You can see over here, now,
once I got many slides, I can choose a
| | 18:25 | slide thumbnail size. So as I click
this, right now you can see Medium is
| | 18:29 | selected, and that's fine. I can see
both my slides. But when they start to
| | 18:33 | pile up I may want to switch to Small,
and you can see that allows me to see
| | 18:37 | more thumbnails in my navigation pane.
Right now, because I have only got two,
| | 18:42 | Large might be sufficient. This just
allows me to see the contents better of
| | 18:47 | those slides.
| | 18:49 | Meanwhile, I can still continue to
work on my slides over here on the
| | 18:52 | right-hand side, but you can see what's
happened in 100% view here, I have got
| | 18:56 | scrollbars to move around the slide.
| | 18:59 | Now, if you don't like working with
scrollbars, you may want to change the zoom
| | 19:02 | level from 100% down to something like
75, for example. So it all depends on
| | 19:07 | how you like to work. I'm going to
change this back to Medium, which is the
| | 19:10 | default, and change this back to 100%.
You can see I have got quite a few zoom
| | 19:16 | options, and at 100% I'm just going to
expand my window here, so I don't need
| | 19:21 | to use scrollbars to work on my slide.
Once they disappear, I'm seeing the full slide.
| | 19:27 | All right. So that's a quick tour of
the user interface. Don't worry if you
| | 19:31 | have forgotten any of those items that
we have looked at, we are going to be
| | 19:34 | using a lot of these commands as we
go throughout this title, building our
| | 19:38 | presentations. Now that you have got
the background though, it should make a
| | 19:42 | lot more sense when we go to
these commands to actually use them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing the interface| 00:01 | In the previous movie, we took a grand
tour of the user interface. We saw that
| | 00:05 | there were a number of commands under
the menus as well as the toolbar and
| | 00:09 | I also mentioned briefly that the
toolbar was totally customizable. In fact,
| | 00:14 | we can adjust our user interface to suit
our needs, so as you start using Keynote
| | 00:18 | on a more regular basis you will
probably discover that there are number
| | 00:21 | commands you would like to use over-
and-over again and then there are those
| | 00:25 | that you may not use at all so you can
customize your toolbar to show the ones
| | 00:29 | you want and the ones you don't.
We are going to do that now.
| | 00:32 | And in the previous lesson we started a
presentation. If you have got that open
| | 00:36 | still you can just leave it there; if
you don't, we are going to create a new
| | 00:40 | presentation. So I'm clicking File and
New, it really doesn't matter what theme
| | 00:45 | we choose here, we just want to have
a presentation open so we can see the
| | 00:48 | toolbar. So I'm going to choose Craft
and then click Choose and that starts my
| | 00:52 | brand new presentation.
| | 00:54 | So as soon as I see the toolbar now I
realize that there might be some buttons
| | 00:58 | here that I never use. I never use
Comments for example and I don't want that
| | 01:02 | there, but I do print out a lot of
notes, so speaker notes and that kind of
| | 01:06 | thing. And there is no Print button
here, so maybe I'd like to add one.
| | 01:10 | To modify your toolbar you just right-
click anywhere on the toolbar and come down
| | 01:15 | to this pop-up menu and click Customize Toolbar.
| | 01:18 | Now, right away you see a number
of buttons appear, all these icons
| | 01:22 | representing a number of commands that
can be placed on the toolbar. So as I
| | 01:26 | scroll down you can see there is even
one for customizing the toolbar. And then
| | 01:31 | we have also got some
separators and spaces and so on.
| | 01:34 | Well, let's take a button off of our
toolbar first. We mentioned that comments.
| | 01:38 | Maybe we don't use that at all. So I'm
going to click and drag that down. Once
| | 01:42 | I removed it from the toolbar, I
release the mouse button to take it off
| | 01:46 | permanently.
| | 01:46 | Well, I like to print speaker notes and
that kind of thing, so I'm going to add
| | 01:50 | the Print button. Here it is down near
the bottom. I'm going to click and drag
| | 01:54 | up to the toolbar and I'm going to
release it in the exact location where I
| | 01:57 | want it to go. Notice the green plus
sign indicates I'm on the toolbar and I
| | 02:02 | can release, and there it is.
| | 02:04 | Now, down at the bottom, I do have some
separators and some spaces and you will
| | 02:09 | notice that I have got some separators
up here in my toolbar as well. So if I
| | 02:15 | wanted to I can click and drag those
off, and maybe I'd rather put in a fixed
| | 02:20 | space, so I'm going to scroll down,
and I'm going to grab that space and it
| | 02:25 | just gives me a little more room in
between my different sets of icons, that's
| | 02:30 | totally up to you.
| | 02:31 | Now, let's say you start modifying
the toolbar, you have added buttons,
| | 02:34 | removed, and you don't even remember
what was there. If you ever need to reset
| | 02:38 | back to the default notice down at the
very bottom here it says I can drag the
| | 02:42 | default set. This set that you see
down across the bottom is the default
| | 02:46 | toolbar, and I can simply click and
drag it up to the very top and when I see
| | 02:51 | the green plus sign, release and that
resets my toolbar back to the way it was
| | 02:56 | when I started. So, there
is the default at the top.
| | 02:59 | Now, couple other options to mention.
I want you to notice that I can see all
| | 03:02 | of these buttons all the way up to the
Colors button up here, which opens up
| | 03:07 | the Colors palette. Well, that's
because down at the bottom I have got a check
| | 03:11 | box that's checked off that says Use
Small Size, small sized buttons. If I
| | 03:16 | de-select that the buttons are bigger
and easier to read, but look over here on
| | 03:21 | the right I'm missing a few, so they
don't all fit when I don't use the Small
| | 03:25 | Size, so I'm going to turn that
back on by checking that check box.
| | 03:30 | One other item is how those buttons
are displayed? Currently you can see an
| | 03:33 | icon as well as a label. So, for
example, this green square with the word
| | 03:38 | Shapes underneath it represents the
icon and text and that's what's currently
| | 03:43 | showing down here in the Show dropdown.
If I click this, I can choose to show
| | 03:48 | icons only, so if you are really good
with Keynote and you know what all of
| | 03:52 | these mean, you can save some room by
removing the text part or maybe you need
| | 03:58 | just the text, and you don't need the
icon, that's another option. So these are
| | 04:02 | all buttons actually, but they appear as text.
| | 04:06 | I kind of like to show both, at least
in the beginning as I'm getting familiar
| | 04:10 | with Keynote this is going to show me
both the icon and the text underneath to
| | 04:14 | remind me what that button is going to do.
| | 04:17 | So when I done customizing the toolbar,
I click the Done button down at the
| | 04:21 | bottom, which saves all of my
changes if I have made any. So that covers
| | 04:25 | modifying your toolbar and your user
interface. In the next lesson, we are
| | 04:29 | going to look at some
basic presenting principles.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Presenting| 00:01 | In this lesson I would like to give
you a quick overview of what's going to
| | 00:04 | happen when you actually present a
slide show in Keynote, and we are actually
| | 00:08 | going to be getting more detailed in
the upcoming movies. But here I just want
| | 00:11 | to establish some basic information
that we'll be able to refer back to later on.
| | 00:16 | If you've got a Premium subscription
or you've got the CD for this title,
| | 00:20 | you'll have access to the exercise files
and I copied one of those exercise files.
| | 00:25 | It's a Keynote presentation called
Presenting. I have put it on my desktop,
| | 00:29 | so we are going to open that up now.
| | 00:31 | I am going up to File and then Open.
Navigate to my Desktop. That's where
| | 00:36 | I have copied Presenting. You can see
it's a Keynote presentation, you can see
| | 00:39 | the size, when it was created and so on.
I'm going to click the Open button to
| | 00:43 | bring that up on my screen, and now
I'm going to click over here in the
| | 00:46 | navigation pane on the very first
slide in my presentation, you can see it
| | 00:51 | deals with a Monthly Revenue Meeting.
In this case, this meeting is happening
| | 00:55 | in November 2007.
| | 00:56 | All right, so really what I want to
do is show you some of the features of
| | 01:00 | Keynote that we are going to be
covering in this title and before we go into
| | 01:03 | Presentation mode, let's look at some
important Preferences by going to the
| | 01:07 | Keynote Preferences up here and then
you will want to make sure that the
| | 01:11 | Slideshow is selected. You will notice
that all of the options here fall under
| | 01:16 | this heading When Presenting. So these
are options that control how Keynote and
| | 01:21 | your Mac behave when you actually
press Play to start your presentation.
| | 01:26 | These remember our general keynote
options, not slide show specific, so you
| | 01:30 | don't need to set your Preferences
for each and every slide show that you
| | 01:33 | create. This first option is Scale
slides up to fit display and you will notice
| | 01:39 | that it's not selected. Well, this
option increases the size of your slides to
| | 01:44 | the screen that it's appearing on,
and I would not recommend selecting this
| | 01:49 | option unless your audience is
having a lot of trouble viewing your
| | 01:52 | presentation at its current size.
Scaling your slides up can result in some
| | 01:57 | blurry and very jagged looking graphics
and texts, and you probably don't want
| | 02:01 | that. So we are going to leave it unchecked.
| | 02:02 | The next one kind of speaks for itself,
Exit presentation after the last slide.
| | 02:08 | Well, what's going to happen is when
you reach the last slide, you will view
| | 02:12 | the contents and when you press Enter
or you click your mouse to move to the
| | 02:16 | next slide, there is no next slide, so
it's going to exit the presentation and
| | 02:21 | your audience is going to see behind
the scenes of your presentation, and if
| | 02:24 | you don't want that, you might want to
deselect this checkbox. I would like to
| | 02:28 | leave it unselected. That means that if
I go to Navigate to the next slide and
| | 02:33 | there is no next slide because I'm at
the end of my presentation, that last
| | 02:37 | slide just stays there until I press Escape.
So I would like to leave that one unselected.
| | 02:42 | These next two options here have to do
with transitions. Transitions are just
| | 02:47 | animated effects that occur between
slides. So instead of having one slide just
| | 02:51 | appear on top of the other slide, you
can add transitions that do some cool
| | 02:55 | things like, have one slide push the
other off the screen or have a slide, look
| | 03:00 | like it's a page being turned over.
Two of these transitions are called Cube,
| | 03:04 | and Flip.
| | 03:06 | And what might happen is they make
get cut off when your monitor is at a
| | 03:11 | smaller resolution than the actual slide.
So keeping these options checked can
| | 03:15 | prevent that from happening. I kind
of like keeping these options checked
| | 03:18 | anyway, even if I'm using a large
enough display because the transitions make
| | 03:23 | it look like you are zooming in and out
of the screen and then zooming back in.
| | 03:26 | Anyway, it's hard to describe, but
you will see that action in a moment.
| | 03:30 | Next, if for some reason you need to
use Mac OS X: Expos?, and some Dashboard
| | 03:37 | features, you will see that we have a
checkbox to allow for those. During your
| | 03:41 | presentation, you will need to check
this option off, if you are going to use
| | 03:45 | those in a Full-Screen presentation mode.
You will also notice that this option
| | 03:50 | can reduce animation performance on
some hardware, meaning, the older, slower
| | 03:55 | computers might have trouble handling
Keynote in full-screen, simultaneously
| | 03:59 | with Expos? and some Dashboard effects.
| | 04:01 | So you can leave this unchecked
unless you really need it. Now down here we
| | 04:05 | have got a couple of radio buttons
and a checkbox. The first one determines
| | 04:09 | whether the mouse cursor appears on
the screen during your presentation. So
| | 04:14 | where it says, Show pointer only on
slides with hyperlinks or movies, you won't
| | 04:18 | see your mouse pointer unless
there is something to click on, on that
| | 04:21 | particular slide.
| | 04:23 | The other option is to show your
pointer whenever the mouse moves. So if the
| | 04:26 | mouse isn't moving you won't see it,
but the second you move your mouse, maybe
| | 04:30 | to point to an area of your slide, it
will appear. That's the one I'm used to,
| | 04:34 | so I'm going to select that one.
| | 04:35 | Notice also we've got a checkbox to
Show play back controls when a pointer is
| | 04:40 | over a movie. So we can insert movies
right into a slide and we want to see the
| | 04:45 | controls for playing, fast-forwarding,
rewinding and so on, whenever we move
| | 04:49 | our mouse pointer over a movie.
| | 04:52 | Now down at the bottom, we've got some
options here for when we are presenting
| | 04:56 | on a projector, for example, or a
second screen. So we can present on our
| | 05:00 | primary display or present on a
secondary display if we are using, let's say, a
| | 05:06 | laptop and we've got it hooked up to
a projector, what we see on our screen
| | 05:11 | might be different from what our
audience see, so we might want to present on
| | 05:14 | that secondary display by
clicking this option here.
| | 05:17 | All right, so it's time to take a
look at the actual slide presentation in
| | 05:22 | full-screen mode here. So I'm going to
close those, and we are going to come to
| | 05:26 | our Play button and give it a click. So
here is my first slide and you can see,
| | 05:31 | just on my screen, filling up the
screen, when I click with the mouse, I'll
| | 05:36 | move to the next slide.
| | 05:38 | So right away there you can see it's
using that Cube effect and it turned the
| | 05:43 | cube over and you can see my next slide,
it actually has some bullets and there
| | 05:47 | was some animation there
as the bullets moved around.
| | 05:50 | Now other options include hitting the
spacebar or hitting the Return key on
| | 05:54 | your keyboard. That will move you to
the next slide, and there are some more
| | 06:02 | fancy animations. I'm going to hit
Return again, and there is another
| | 06:07 | transition that takes me to the next
slide. And you can see here, I have
| | 06:11 | actually got a chart and it's building
as the slide appears. So this is a build
| | 06:16 | effect. I'm just going to hit Escape
here to show you what that looks like.
| | 06:20 | So here we are looking at the slide
back in our Navigator mode. I'm going to
| | 06:23 | click on the chart itself and go up
to the Inspector and make sure that the
| | 06:28 | Build Inspector is selected here. So
down below you can see I have some effects
| | 06:33 | for when it Builds In, for when it
Builds Out. Here I'm using a 3D-Grow effect.
| | 06:39 | The Delivery is By Elements in Set.
| | 06:42 | I also have more options, if I wanted
to show up automatically. So if I click
| | 06:46 | on this first one, which is the chart,
you can see it shows up automatically
| | 06:50 | after the transition of the slide and
then the other elements also show up
| | 06:54 | automatically. So I have full control
over that. I'm going to close the drawer
| | 07:00 | and I'm going to close my Build
Inspector and we'll return back to the
| | 07:04 | presentation. We are going to spend a
lot of time looking at transitions, build
| | 07:08 | effects, Smart Builds and so on, in this title.
| | 07:11 | So let's play again, and there is
that effect again. Now I'm just going to
| | 07:21 | click to move to the next slide. So
this one has another build effect and you
| | 07:26 | can see I can actually use builds on
something like a table here. So it's the
| | 07:30 | same values, but I'm displaying that
data in a different way using a table and
| | 07:35 | I would be able to show a row at a
time with a transition or an animated
| | 07:39 | effect, kind of cool.
| | 07:41 | That takes us to the last slide.
There was no transition there, and when I
| | 07:45 | click, notice that nothing happens.
I have to hit Escape to end my
| | 07:50 | presentation. That's thanks to our
preference I have set. That takes me back to
| | 07:55 | my Navigator mode right here.
| | 07:58 | So those are some basic things you
should know about presenting a slide before
| | 08:02 | we get into building our own. If you
want to start teaching yourself the
| | 08:06 | keyboard commands that I mentioned,
and as well as tons of other keyboard
| | 08:10 | commands, you can go up to the Help
menu up here, and down below you will see
| | 08:14 | that we've got keyboard shortcuts.
| | 08:17 | Now I highly suggest at least learning
the keyboard commands for controlling
| | 08:20 | your slide show in Full-Screen view
like we just did, but if you are a fan of
| | 08:25 | keyboard shortcuts, you will find
keyboards commands that control many, many
| | 08:28 | aspects of Keynote right here.
| | 08:30 | All right, let's move on to the next
chapter and we'll start learning about
| | 08:34 | building your own presentations next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Presentation BasicsCreating presentations| 00:01 | In this lesson, we are going to look
at the basics of creating your first
| | 00:04 | presentation in Keynote. Just before
you get into the application and start
| | 00:08 | adding slides and creating content,
it's not a bad idea to have your thoughts
| | 00:13 | organized and using an application
like Pages, for example, to create an
| | 00:17 | outline of the content that's going to
go into the slides in your presentation
| | 00:21 | will help you stay organized.
| | 00:23 | Now we saw earlier that Keynote does
have an Outline view but that still
| | 00:27 | requires you to have an idea of how you
are going to separate your information
| | 00:30 | into slides and how those
slides are going to be organized.
| | 00:34 | So go into Pages, you have got it
anyways, setup an outline, so you know
| | 00:38 | exactly where you are going to be going
once you get into Keynote. That's what
| | 00:41 | we are going to do right now. We are
going to launch Keynote and create our
| | 00:45 | first presentation.
| | 00:46 | So I have closed everything up on my
screen from previous lessons. It means
| | 00:49 | I'm going to come down to the dock
here and click on Keynote to launch the
| | 00:53 | application. As we saw in an earlier movie,
when we do that, the theme chooser shows up.
| | 00:59 | So here we can choose a theme to use
as we create our brand new presentation.
| | 01:03 | Of course, if we don't like that theme
later, we can go in and change it.
| | 01:07 | But to keep things simple, I'm going to
select the Black theme right up here at the top.
| | 01:11 | Then I click the Choose button to
create my very first slide, which is a
| | 01:15 | title slide here with a sub-
title using the Black theme.
| | 01:19 | All right, so here is where I type
in my title. I double-click to edit.
| | 01:22 | I'm going to do that and I'm going to
type in Client Services Monthly Meeting,
| | 01:32 | just like that. Down below where it says
Double-click to edit for the sub-title,
| | 01:35 | I'm going to do that. I'm going to type
in November 2007. I'll de-select that by
| | 01:43 | clicking outside the box. There is my
first slide in my very first presentation.
| | 01:49 | Now this is actually probably a pretty
good time to save your presentation.
| | 01:52 | You can get all caught up in adding slides,
and creating cool transitions, and
| | 01:58 | adding objects and so on. When you do
that, you might forget that you haven't
| | 02:02 | actually saved your presentation and anything
can go wrong and you can lose all that work.
| | 02:07 | So I'm going to go up to my File menu
here and I'm going to click on the Save option.
| | 02:12 | Command+S is the shortcut. Then we
can choose what we are going to call this.
| | 02:17 | You will notice that Untitled
shows up highlighted, so I can type right
| | 02:20 | over that. I'm going to type
in CSMonthly, just like that.
| | 02:26 | Now I get to choose where I'm going to
save that. Desktop is showing up for me
| | 02:30 | by default. I can use this to select
other locations. Of course, Command+D
| | 02:36 | always takes me to my Desktop. Another
option is to click this little dropdown
| | 02:40 | to expand our dialog box, so we can go
navigating through the various folders
| | 02:45 | and areas on our Mac, but I'm going to
leave it at Desktop. I'm going click on Save
| | 02:49 | and that's going to save my presentation.
I see the title up here over my toolbar.
| | 02:54 | So I know that all
of my changes have been saved.
| | 02:57 | All right, now just before we start
getting into adding slides and specific
| | 03:02 | types of content and so on, we are
going to look at the Inspector. Now
| | 03:08 | the Inspector appears up here in the top-
right corner. Specifically when I click this,
| | 03:12 | I want you to move over to the
Document Inspector. You will notice that
| | 03:17 | I have got three options up here: Document,
Audio and Spotlight. We are going to start
| | 03:22 | with Document.
| | 03:23 | Now under Slideshow Settings, here
are a number of options for setting up a
| | 03:28 | slideshow that's going to run
automatically. So you can see Automatically play
| | 03:32 | upon open is an option. So clicking
this check box means, every time I open up
| | 03:37 | this presentation, it's going to
start playing in full-screen view.
| | 03:40 | Now another option is to loop the
slideshow. So if I have got a hundred slides
| | 03:44 | in here, when it gets to the end
slide, what's going to happen?
| | 03:46 | It's going to go back to the first one and
continue playing. Now you have probably seen these
[00:03:501.17]
if you have ever been, say, in
a mall or at a kiosk where there is
| | 03:54 | information looping around in various pages.
| | 03:58 | You will notice it down below it
says Press "Esc" key to exit. So,
| | 04:01 | if you are looking at one of those looping
slideshows, whether you are at a kiosk or
| | 04:06 | at a trade show, for example, and
there is information going around, you can
| | 04:09 | press Escape to exit, unless there
is a little feature that's setup.
| | 04:12 | It's a little bit further down below. So
looping your slideshow is ideal for one of
| | 04:17 | those kiosks type presentations.
Automatically playing it upon open is a good idea.
| | 04:22 | Then you also have an option here to
restart the show, if it's idle for an
| | 04:27 | extended period of time. So clicking
this check box allows me to select the
| | 04:31 | period of time that it needs to be
idle before it restarts itself. Now that
| | 04:36 | doesn't really apply to a looping
slideshow that continuously plays, but
| | 04:40 | there are other ways to display your slide
presentation. I'm going to de-select that.
| | 04:45 | So here is the option that avoids
people from escaping out of your looping
| | 04:49 | slideshow and making changes to your
presentation. Require password to exit show.
| | 04:54 | By doing that, you are going to
use your Mac login password to actually
| | 04:58 | unlock the slideshow and that's the
only way to exit. I'm going to de-select
| | 05:03 | that as well.
| | 05:04 | Down below in the Presentation section,
you can see Normal is selected but
| | 05:08 | we have also got options to display
the presentation as a Hyperlinks only
| | 05:12 | presentation. We have got a Self-
playing option as well. Self-playing would be
| | 05:17 | ideal for that looping slideshow.
Hyperlinks only is a good option, if you want
| | 05:22 | some user input.
| | 05:23 | So it would be a slide presentation
that could loop around and so on, but
| | 05:27 | it won't automatically go from one
slide to the next using slide timings,
| | 05:31 | but rather hyperlinks it. It would
allow users to go in there and interact
| | 05:35 | with your slide presentation. So you
might click on links to go to the next
| | 05:38 | slide or just skip to a specific
area of your presentation and so on.
| | 05:42 | Not everybody reads at the same pace. So
it's a good option, if you don't want it
| | 05:46 | to automatically loop using some of
those timings that you have setup.
| | 05:49 | Self-playing. If we click that one,
then it allows us to go in and choose Delay
| | 05:54 | rates for the transitions. That's the
time between one slide and the next,
| | 05:59 | how longs it take to transition. Then we
have also got builds. So for the actual
| | 06:03 | objects in your slide, as they build,
what is the Delay rate there? You can see
| | 06:08 | it's in seconds and the default is
5 seconds for slide transitions and
| | 06:12 | 2 seconds for builds. So our actual
objects are building in a specific slide.
| | 06:17 | So I'm going to change this back to
Normal. Then of course, we have got our
| | 06:22 | slide size. We have talked about this
in the past. You can see I have got all
| | 06:27 | of these options here, depending on
where I'm presenting. So if I'm presenting
| | 06:31 | on a high-end monitor, maybe it's a
wide screen, plasma or a LCD panel, I might
| | 06:37 | want to choose one of these, but you
really got to know what you are going to
| | 06:40 | be presenting on. Most projectors can
handle 1024x768. They can all handle
| | 06:46 | 800x600. You are going to be safe
selecting 800x600. You can also choose Custom
| | 06:52 | slide size, if you want to enter your
own resolution. I'm going to leave it at
| | 06:56 | 800x600.
| | 06:58 | Now we also have the Audio option here,
under our Document Inspector,
| | 07:02 | that allows us to add a soundtrack, for
example. So if I had a soundtrack on my
| | 07:06 | Desktop, for example, I just drop it
right in here. For one of those looping
| | 07:10 | slide presentations, you might want to
have some music in the background,
| | 07:13 | for example. You can go right to your
iTunes Library and get it by clicking this
| | 07:17 | button as well and then
you can adjust the volume.
| | 07:21 | So we are going to look at audio
later on in this title. I'm going to leave
| | 07:25 | that for now and show you down below,
we have also got Slideshow Recording.
| | 07:29 | Now this new to Keynote '08 and you are
able to actually put in your own voice
| | 07:34 | recordings. So recording your own voice
and recording whatever it is you need
| | 07:40 | to be sounded in the presentation. It
can be done by clicking the Record button here.
| | 07:45 | Of course, you need to have a
microphone setup, but you are going to
| | 07:48 | record some slideshow narration that's
going to go along with the slideshow.
| | 07:52 | That's another option to adding a
soundtrack. Now this is brand new to Keynote '08,
| | 07:57 | so you won't see that in previous versions.
| | 07:59 | Then we have also got Spotlight. Now
if you have got Mac OS 10.4 Tiger and
| | 08:05 | you have got Spotlight, you know that this
will help you find documents basically.
| | 08:09 | Now we call our slide presentations a
document, just like a Pages document or
| | 08:14 | any other kind of document.
| | 08:16 | There is information we can put in here
to make it easier to find. You have got
| | 08:19 | tons and tons of presentations and
you want to locate a specific one,
| | 08:23 | if you have added some information in the
Spotlight section here, it's going to help you
| | 08:26 | down the road to find
this particular presentation.
| | 08:29 | So I'm going to type in my own name here.
Title of this one is Client Services Monthly.
| | 08:42 | Then I can put in some keywords here,
information that might show up
| | 08:45 | in this presentation like revenues,
costs, profits, ongoing tasks, etcetera.
| | 09:01 | So he more keywords you put in here,
the easier it will be for Spotlight to find
| | 09:05 | your presentation. You can also add
comments down here, 'Used for monthly
| | 09:13 | revenue meetings.' There we go. So the
more information you add here, obviously,
| | 09:19 | when you start to use Spotlight, the easier
it will be to find your actual presentation.
| | 09:24 | So you will notice up here, I have got
my Spotlight icon and clicking on that
| | 09:29 | allows me to type in something, like
client services. You can see as I start typing,
| | 09:35 | it narrows it down. Look at this.
I have got right at the very top,
| | 09:38 | the top hit, is my CSMonthly in our
presentation. So I found it very quickly.
| | 09:42 | I'm going to close that and just keep
in mind that this can be very handy,
| | 09:48 | if you use Spotlight.
| | 09:49 | All right, I'm going to go back to the
Document tab here, make sure everything
| | 09:52 | looks good. I'm going to close up my
Document Inspector. That covers creating
| | 09:58 | your very first presentation. In the
next lesson, we are going to dive deep
| | 10:02 | into adding content to your
presentation by adding different kinds of slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding slides| 00:01 | As you start building your presentations
obviously you are going to be adding
| | 00:04 | new slides as you go and that's what
we are going to look at in this lesson.
| | 00:08 | We are going to add some slides to our
presentation. This is a presentation
| | 00:12 | we started in the previous lesson.
We just created a brand new presentation using
| | 00:17 | the Black theme. You can see we have
got our title slide. And by default when
| | 00:21 | you create a new presentation Keynote
is going to give you this title with
| | 00:24 | subtitle slide.
| | 00:25 | Now, if you have been following along
you know it's pretty easy to add a new
| | 00:28 | slide to your presentation. We come up
here to the toolbar and click the New button.
| | 00:33 | You will notice that the new
slide is actually a title with bullets
| | 00:37 | down below, and by default this is
the new slide that gets added unless
| | 00:42 | you specify a different master. Now
every other new slide that we add to this
| | 00:47 | presentation will use the previous
master. In other words, if I have to click
| | 00:51 | the New button again, I get another new
slide with, there it is, the title and
| | 00:56 | bullets down below.
| | 00:57 | So I'm going to click on this one and
hit my Delete key on the keyboard to
| | 01:01 | remove it and we are going to start
with this particular slide using the master
| | 01:06 | that we're given which is title with bullets.
| | 01:09 | So I'm going to double-click here
where the title goes and I'm just going to
| | 01:13 | type-in some information according to
my presentation. We talked earlier about
| | 01:17 | having an outline prepared so you know
exactly where you are going with your
| | 01:21 | presentation. So we are going to follow
along with our monthly meeting here for
| | 01:25 | client services. The second slide is
just going to be our meeting agenda. So
| | 01:30 | I'm going to type that in up here.
| | 01:32 | And down below you can see I have got
one single bullet, it's a placeholder for
| | 01:36 | that bullet and it's centered vertically
in this placeholder area for my bullets.
| | 01:40 | So I'm going to double-click here and
start entering some agenda items.
| | 01:45 | So I'm going to start with something we call
The Good News, we always like to start
| | 01:48 | our meetings off with good news. When
I press Enter, I get a new bullet.
| | 01:54 | Next we'll get an update from the Training
Department, then we'll get an update from
| | 02:00 | the Customer Service Department. Each
time I hit Enter I get a new bullet.
| | 02:06 | We'll discuss the user conference for
2008, getting ready for that, and the
| | 02:14 | last thing we'll do is talk about our
product catalog, there we go. So, I won't
| | 02:22 | press Enter again that would give me a
new bullet, not to worry, if you do hit
| | 02:25 | Enter and you don't want that bullet
just hit your Backspace key or your Delete
| | 02:29 | key to remove that.
| | 02:31 | All right, so here we are, we have
got our second slide created and we are
| | 02:35 | going to talk about some modifications
you can make. We notice that the bullets
| | 02:39 | for example were aligned vertically
within the placeholder, and you may not
| | 02:44 | like that. Well, we are going to start
using our Inspector right now and in the
| | 02:48 | following lessons, we are going to
use the Inspector, in particular we are
| | 02:52 | going to click on the Text Inspector
here to make a number of changes to our
| | 02:56 | text, but we are going to do a simple
one here, and if you look at the Color &
| | 02:59 | Alignment section over here, the
center button which Center Alignment is
| | 03:04 | selected. So if I wanted my bullets for
example to be lined up at the bottom of
| | 03:08 | the placeholder, I use this button, but
I want them at the top just like that.
| | 03:13 | I'll close up my Inspector and de-
select by clicking outside the placeholder to
| | 03:19 | see what my finish product looks like.
| | 03:22 | Now like I said, we are going to dive
deeply into text, adding text to slides,
| | 03:27 | making adjustments. Another thing we
might want to do is just move this down
| | 03:31 | slightly. You can see when my mouse
pointer comes to the edge here, I can
| | 03:34 | actually click and drag this down. And
I have got those alignments, right now
| | 03:39 | it's centered, I'm going to drop it
down just a little bit right there. And of
| | 03:43 | course, I can size this. If I don't
need the full width and height I can make
| | 03:47 | changes by clicking and dragging the
handles. So that's about the size I want
| | 03:51 | right there. I don't want to be adding
any more bullets to this. There is the
| | 03:55 | alignment I like. I'm going to de-
select by clicking outside the selected area
| | 03:59 | to see the finished
product again. That looks good.
| | 04:02 | Now, there are lots of changes we can
make to text on a slide, we'll get into
| | 04:05 | that a little bit later on. But right
now let's finish off the structure of our
| | 04:10 | slide presentation by adding some more slides.
| | 04:13 | So, I'm going to go up here and click
New to add a new slide, notice that it
| | 04:17 | takes on the properties of the
previous slide which is a title with some
| | 04:20 | bullets and that's automatic in
Keynote if we were to change this layout to
| | 04:25 | something else, for example if I go
up to Masters here and choose Title &
| | 04:30 | Bullets in 2 Columns you can see that
looks different, and if I click the New
| | 04:34 | button now look what I get, I get
the title and I have got the two-column
| | 04:39 | layout here. You can't really see
until you start adding information.
| | 04:42 | But I'm going to delete that, hit my Delete
key on the keyboard by clicking over here
| | 04:46 | in the Navigation pane first and I'm
going to continue on with this style.
| | 04:51 | So I'm going to double-click here to
enter a new title, and like I said, this
| | 04:55 | is just going to be the outline or a
structure and you may prefer to work in
| | 04:59 | the Outline View that we talked
about earlier on by going up to the View
| | 05:03 | button, choosing Outline because as
you know you can start entering text
| | 05:06 | gradient here if you wanted to. Or
you can work right on the slide, so
| | 05:10 | double-clicking in the title area
allows us to type-in our third slide.
| | 05:15 | It's nice to have the outline view
because I can see the bullet points over
| | 05:18 | here under meeting agenda and use
those as I start creating my new slides.
| | 05:22 | I won't put any content in here yet. I'm
just going to add another new slide. So
| | 05:27 | number four, double-clicking in here.
I'm going to enter the next item, which
| | 05:31 | is an update from training. Add a new
slide, in fact, I'm going to add a couple
| | 05:40 | new ones just to save some time, go
back to slide five, I'm going to type right
| | 05:44 | in here. Slide number five is going to
be an update from customer service, and
| | 05:51 | you can see it makes room if it's too
wide for the placeholder, just creates a
| | 05:55 | new line, go to slide six, check that in
right here, User Conference 2008, good!
| | 06:07 | I need another couple of slides maybe
or at least one more for our product
| | 06:11 | catalog. So I'm going to add that now.
I'm going to come in here to do it. And
| | 06:19 | like I said, this is just an outline.
It's a starting point. I'm going to
| | 06:22 | switch back my view to the navigator.
That's the one I like to work in and go
| | 06:26 | back to slide number one.
| | 06:28 | So there is the outline of my
presentation. Now as we start adding content to
| | 06:32 | the various slides in our presentation
and modifying the appearance and so on
| | 06:35 | as we go through the upcoming lessons
we may find that we need to insert some
| | 06:41 | new slides or maybe take away some
slides and we'll be doing that as we
| | 06:45 | continue to build our presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing slides| 00:01 | As you continue to build your
presentations in Keynote, adding new slides,
| | 00:06 | changing the appearance of your
presentation with the various themes you have
| | 00:09 | at your disposal, adjusting the
layout of individual slides by choosing
| | 00:14 | different masters, you may find the
need eventually to further customize a
| | 00:19 | slide in a presentation. That's
what we are going to do in this movie.
| | 00:22 | You can see here, I'm still working
on my Client Services Monthly Meeting
| | 00:26 | presentation. If you are following
along, we have built seven slides so far,
| | 00:31 | which is basically a skeleton or an
outline. We haven't added a whole lot of
| | 00:35 | content yet. If you are skipping to
this lesson, you can go to your Exercise
| | 00:39 | Files. If you have got them, then
open up CSMonthlyA to get all caught up.
| | 00:44 | Now one thing I would like to do when
I'm presenting is to add a blank slide to
| | 00:47 | the end of my presentation. If I don't
have the Preference setup to stop at the
| | 00:52 | last slide in my presentation, things
are going to happen where you move to the
| | 00:56 | next slide and there is no next slide.
Then all of a sudden your audience is
| | 00:59 | looking at 'the behind the scenes
work' in your presentation. You might be
| | 01:04 | trying to close up with some closing
remarks or a Q&A session and they are distracted.
| | 01:09 | So I would like to add a blank slide
to the end of my presentation. So we are
| | 01:12 | going to go to the slide seven here,
and we are going to go up to the New
| | 01:15 | button. When we click New, we get a new
slide. That new slide will take on the
| | 01:19 | characteristics of the previous slide
by default, because the same master shows
| | 01:25 | up here for title and bullets, but
we can change that as you well know.
| | 01:30 | So let's change it by going up to the
Masters button here and we are going to
| | 01:33 | select Blank. Now we are using the
black theme. So Blank means, we are going to
| | 01:38 | see the background only, which in this
case happens to be black, which might be
| | 01:42 | perfect for the last slide in a
presentation. But if you want to make further
| | 01:46 | changes, like change the color of the
background or put in a special effect,
| | 01:50 | you can do that as well.
We'll do that in a moment.
| | 01:53 | Right now though, we are going to
modify another slide in our presentation.
| | 01:56 | I'm going to go slide six here, which is
the User Conference for 2008. You will
| | 02:01 | notice down below, I have got an
area for bullets, but I know that this
| | 02:04 | particular slide, I'm going to have
some information in bullets but I would
| | 02:08 | also like to have an image show up
here, for example. So I'm going to click
| | 02:11 | inside the bulleted area, the
placeholder, and I'm going to move right edge of
| | 02:16 | this end to about half way, right there.
Here might be a good spot to put in a
| | 02:21 | placeholder for an object. So an object
could be a movie, it could be an image,
| | 02:28 | it could be something you have
created in a graphical application, but this
| | 02:31 | would be a good spot to add that.
| | 02:33 | Now there is a number of different
ways to make changes to an actual slide in
| | 02:39 | your presentation. The one way that I
would like to do it is using the Slide
| | 02:43 | Inspector. So I'm going to go up to the
Inspector button up here. You will want
| | 02:47 | to make sure that slide is selected.
You will notice there is options here.
| | 02:50 | There is Transition and there is
Appearance. We are going to be talking about
| | 02:54 | Transition in detail later on in this
title. So make Appearance is selected here.
| | 02:59 | Right away, you can see the master
that's being used for this particular slide
| | 03:03 | title and bullets. You can see a
thumbnail representation of what that would
| | 03:07 | look like. We did make a change to that
by closing up the area reserved for the
| | 03:13 | actual bullets in this section. But
you can see there is a dropdown button
| | 03:17 | here. If I click, I'm going to see the
exact same masters that I see, by coming
| | 03:21 | up here and clicking on the Masters dropdown.
| | 03:24 | So I can change the master from here,
if I want to, by simply selecting it.
| | 03:30 | When I do that, notice that there
appears to be nothing on this slide, but
| | 03:36 | Keynote is pretty good at remembering
what was there. There was a title and
| | 03:39 | there was a body. You will notice down
below I have got check boxes for Title,
| | 03:43 | Body, there is an Object
Placeholder and Slide Number as well.
| | 03:48 | So if I come over here to Title, notice
that User Conference 2008 does show up.
| | 03:53 | If I switch my View to Outline,
although this is using the blank template or a
| | 03:58 | blank master, if I come down to
Outline view, I can see that there is still
| | 04:03 | information here in my title area. So
I'm using the blank master, but there is
| | 04:08 | a title. If I click the Body, you can
see it remembers what I did to the body
| | 04:13 | area of my slide as well.
| | 04:16 | Now another option is to actually add
that object, we are talking about, by
| | 04:19 | putting in a placeholder. So we don't
know what it's going to be quite yet, but
| | 04:23 | we can at least put the placeholder
in there by clicking this check box.
| | 04:26 | You can see it shows up here and it's quite
large. So we have some adjusting to do
| | 04:30 | here as well. So I'm going to actually
click in there and go to the top corner,
| | 04:34 | and just drag this down to about
the size of my bulleted list, like so,
| | 04:41 | perfect. So that will appear
there so long as this is checked off.
| | 04:45 | Another option is to show the slide
numbers in your presentation. This is handy
| | 04:50 | if, for example, you have handed out
notes to people. So using some of the
| | 04:54 | speaker notes and following along
with the slide numbers. If you have got
| | 04:58 | handouts for your audience and they
are looking at slide numbers, it might be
| | 05:02 | good to show the slide number
during the presentation as well.
| | 05:05 | Clicking the Slide Number check box
will show the current slide number, which
| | 05:09 | happens to be 6, that's correct. If I
wanted to add slide numbers to the others
| | 05:14 | as well, I can do them one at a time.
Notice that with my Slide Inspector open,
| | 05:21 | I can come in here and turn on Slide
Numbers. But imagine having 40 or 50
| | 05:25 | slides in a presentation, you don't want
to have to do this to each one of them.
| | 05:29 | You can select the first one where the
actual slide number should appear and
| | 05:34 | then using your Shift key, click on
the last one where you want slide numbers
| | 05:38 | to appear. I'm going to switch my View
here to the Navigator, so I can do this.
| | 05:43 | Clicking on 2 at the top and 7 at the
bottom, while holding Shift, selects them
| | 05:47 | all for me. Now all I have to do is
make sure that Slide Number is checked off.
| | 05:52 | All of them will get in an actual
slide number showing up at the bottom.
| | 05:56 | Now slide numbers are actual pieces of
text, aren't they? So if we come down
| | 06:00 | here to slide number 2 and click on
the 2, notice that there is a placeholder
| | 06:04 | for it. I can actually move that, I can
hit Delete to remove it from the slide.
| | 06:10 | It gets deselected up here but I can
turn it back on and treat it like any
| | 06:15 | other piece of text. So I'm going to
go right here to the center and drop it
| | 06:20 | right there where it was, prefect.
| | 06:20 | Let's go to our last slide now with the
Slide Inspector still open. You can see
| | 06:28 | we have got our blank slide, we have
got nothing selected here, we don't want
| | 06:32 | anything, but now it's time to work
with the background. So we do have a
| | 06:35 | Background section. Currently, we are
using a Color Fill and that color is not
| | 06:40 | really a color at all, is it? It's
black, it's a shade. But this is a color
| | 06:45 | well, so I can click here. With my
Colors palette, I go and choose a different
| | 06:50 | color, if I want.
| | 06:51 | So I'm going to go to this magenta here,
which is going to blind people. So I
| | 06:57 | want to make some adjustments to that.
I can go back to my color wheel here,
| | 07:00 | for example. I can make that a little
bit darker. So I can adjust the lightness
| | 07:05 | and the darkness. As I do that, you
can see my color wheel changing. Or I can
| | 07:11 | drag the pixel around till I get the
exact color I'm looking for. Maybe that's
| | 07:16 | it right there, I let it go. I have
changed the color of the Color Fill.
| | 07:20 | Now I'm going to close up the Colors
palette. That might be fine, but we can
| | 07:25 | take it a step further. Maybe a
gradient will be cool, going from one color to
| | 07:29 | another. Well, if we click this
little dropdown, we can switch to Gradient
| | 07:33 | Fill, there it is right there. Now we
have got two colors to pick from. Our
| | 07:37 | first color stays black but the second
color now can be chosen by clicking the
| | 07:42 | button. Maybe purple going
to a yellow would be good.
| | 07:46 | I am going to choose Yellow, but
then I'm going to go back and adjust the
| | 07:51 | darkness. You can see for me, the angle
of this gradient is actually set to 45.
| | 08:01 | We can change the angle. We can make
it flow from top to bottom, which is an
| | 08:04 | angle of 270 degrees. We can have it
go left to right, which is 0 degrees, or
| | 08:10 | we can use this color wheel to set the
angle to exactly what we want. I'm going
| | 08:15 | to close up the Colors palette to see
what that looks like. So that might be an
| | 08:19 | option for a final slide in my presentation.
| | 08:22 | There are some other Background
options as well. I'm going to go to this
| | 08:25 | dropdown and choose Image Fill this
time. Notice when I click Image Fill, the
| | 08:30 | last image I used appears for me here,
but I can go and choose any old image by
| | 08:35 | clicking the Choose button. I'm going
to be taken directly to my Pictures,
| | 08:39 | you can go to your Exercise Files and
you will have access to each of these.
| | 08:43 | Clicking on the image will show you a
thumbnail representation of that image.
| | 08:49 | There is my FlowerBlue. I'm going to
change it to the Yellow one. I'm going to
| | 08:54 | click Open. Notice that the Yellow one
here is kind of a portrait mode. So the
| | 08:58 | size could be an issue
but I'm going to click Open.
| | 09:00 | So right away, you notice that it's not
filling my entire slide. It's Scale to
| | 09:05 | Fit the slide top to bottom here, but
it's not stretched. That might be a good
| | 09:09 | thing, but it's not ideal for a final
slide in my presentation. So I have some
| | 09:14 | other options here.
| | 09:15 | You can see I have got Scale to Fill.
That's different. It scales it, doesn't
| | 09:21 | stretch it but it now fills the entire
slide top to bottom, left to right. Of
| | 09:26 | course, I'm zoomed right into the
flower itself. So let's see what happens if
| | 09:29 | we choose Stretch instead. Well, you
can see that actually distorts the image.
| | 09:34 | That's not ideal either.
| | 09:36 | One other option is to go back to the
Original Size, which is much large than
| | 09:41 | the actual slide itself. So you can see
I'm way zoomed in here. All right, what
| | 09:47 | about Tile? Well, that's not going to
work with this image, but if you have a
| | 09:50 | smaller image, images that are smaller
than the slide, you will get multiple
| | 09:55 | representations of that image going
from left to right, top to bottom. So it
| | 09:59 | will tile them for you.
| | 10:00 | All right, I'm going to go back to
Scale to Fill. Then maybe I would like to
| | 10:06 | tint this a little bit. Well, there is
another option. Image Fill has Tinted
| | 10:11 | Image Fill right below it on the
picker. So I'm going to go down to Tinted
| | 10:14 | Image Fill and then I can choose the
color that I want to use as my tint color
| | 10:19 | by clicking right here. I'm going to
go to a different color. Maybe I go over
| | 10:26 | to red. That's a neat effect right
there. Maybe darken it a little bit. When
| | 10:34 | I'm done, I can close up the Colors
palette. I can close up the Slide Inspector
| | 10:40 | to see my final slide.
| | 10:42 | So if I'm happy with that, I can keep
it as it is, but I can always go back to
| | 10:46 | my Inspector at anytime and make
adjustments. I'm going to make this darker
| | 10:50 | actually. There is my tint color
right there. I'm going to close up my
| | 11:00 | Inspector. Of course, I should
save my presentation at this point.
| | 11:05 | So adding slides, using themes, using
the various masters will give you a wide
| | 11:11 | verity, a wide range of options for
your presentation but you can always
| | 11:15 | customize slides further by
using our Slide Inspector.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using master slides| 00:00 | In the previous lesson we saw just
how easy it is to customize a slide once
| | 00:05 | you've chosen a master using a specific theme.
| | 00:08 | Well, what if you wanted to make that
change to all of the slides that use the
| | 00:12 | same master? That could be time-
consuming. So maybe you'd rather just edit
| | 00:17 | the master itself.
| | 00:19 | Well, in fact you can in Keynote make
changes to a master as well as create
| | 00:24 | your own masters to save your time down
the road. So you can see here I'm still
| | 00:28 | using my Client Services Monthly
Meeting presentation and we have been building this
| | 00:34 | as we go through the various lessons
in this chapter. And you can see at
| | 00:38 | the top that if you are skipping to
this lesson you can actually go to your
| | 00:41 | Exercise Files if you've got them and
opened up CSMonthlyB. That will give you
| | 00:45 | exactly what I've got on my screen.
| | 00:48 | And now what we are going to do is
actually make some adjustments to an actual
| | 00:52 | master and create our own. Now we
know that we can go up to View here and
| | 00:57 | choose to show the master slides by
clicking Show Master Slides here.
| | 01:02 | The other option is just to drag
this bar in between the two.
| | 01:06 | So we can click and drag all the way up
to hide them but we can click and drag
| | 01:10 | down to show the masters. So for
example, if I come down to slide number 2
| | 01:14 | here, you can see it's the Title &
Bullets using 2 columns master, and if I
| | 01:20 | wanted to make changes to this master
itself so that all of the slides in my
| | 01:24 | presentation using this exact same
layout will be affected, I can do that.
| | 01:29 | So I'm going to come in here to
slide number 2 and I'm going to edit the
| | 01:33 | master. Now when I come up here into
the Master Slides section and click on
| | 01:37 | that master, when I go up to my
Inspector now and make sure that Slide
| | 01:42 | Inspector is selected, notice that at
the top it doesn't say Slide Inspector.
| | 01:46 | It doesn't even say Slide. It says Master Slide.
| | 01:49 | So that's what I'm making changes to
now, and this is a little bit different
| | 01:53 | looking than when we are
making changes to a slide itself.
| | 01:57 | I am going to click on the slide here.
You can see in the Appearance section
| | 02:00 | what's selected and what's not. And
if I go to the actual master this whole
| | 02:05 | area changes. So Title and Body do show
up, and if I want to make it change to
| | 02:10 | the Body itself, I'll be
making the change to the master.
| | 02:14 | So it will be affecting every single
slide in my presentation that uses this
| | 02:19 | particular master. So for example if
I size this down, you can see that how
| | 02:23 | that effects the actual slide, and if I
move it back out, to right there, I'll
| | 02:31 | be making changes to the master.
| | 02:33 | Now maybe a slide number is something
that I'd like on this particular master,
| | 02:39 | so I'm going to put that down there,
now 01 is what's going to show up because
| | 02:43 | it's a master, it's not an actual
slide, it's more of the placeholder
| | 02:46 | representing where the slide
number will show up. I can put an object
| | 02:51 | placeholder in here, and this is
something we haven't seen yet down below.
| | 02:55 | Allow objects on slide to layer with the master.
| | 02:58 | Now little bit later on, when we start
adding some shapes and different objects
| | 03:02 | to our slides we'll be able to choose
a stacking order for those objects. So
| | 03:07 | what shows up on top of what?
| | 03:09 | Well, if you want to include the
actual placeholders here like our Title and
| | 03:13 | our Bullets in that stacking we
can do it, otherwise, they are in the
| | 03:17 | background and everything else sits on top.
| | 03:19 | But if you want to allow them to be
included in the stacking order you click
| | 03:23 | this check box right here. This will
all make sense a little bit later on when
| | 03:27 | we dive deep into working
with objects and stacking orders.
| | 03:31 | All right, another option is to change
our background, remember if we change
| | 03:34 | the background we'll be changing it
for every single slide that uses this
| | 03:38 | particular layout. So what I'm going
to do is actually turn this back off and
| | 03:44 | the slide number, and I'm go to a
different slide here that's actually very
| | 03:49 | common. This is the one that's Title
& Bullets, and I have got a number of
| | 03:53 | slides in my presentation
using this particular master.
| | 03:57 | So with it checked off up here I'm
going to click on it under Master Slides and
| | 04:01 | I'm going to go to my Background,
and I'm going to change the color to a
| | 04:06 | Gradient Fill, and right away look
over here on the left-hand side in the
| | 04:10 | Navigator Pane, you can see that all
of the slides that actually use this
| | 04:14 | particular master have changed, and
that's according to these colors that are
| | 04:18 | showing up down below.
| | 04:21 | By change of color, you are going to
see those changes not only here on the
| | 04:27 | master, but on every slide that
uses this master as well, all right?
| | 04:34 | Now that doesn't make sense, so I'm
going to go back to Color Fill, I'm going
| | 04:37 | to change the color back to Black. All
right, so that's modifying an existing
| | 04:45 | master, what if you wanted to create your own?
| | 04:47 | Let's see for example as you go through
the various masters you come across one
| | 04:51 | that you are going to use on a
regular basis. This one here called Photo -
| | 04:56 | Horizontal for example. But you
prefer to have the title at the top and the
| | 05:00 | photo down below. Once I scroll
through here, I don't see an actual master
| | 05:04 | that's going to allow me to do
that. So I'm going to create my own.
| | 05:08 | Now there are a couple of different
ways to do that. With Photo - Horizontal
| | 05:12 | selected, because it's close to what I
want. I can right-click and create a new
| | 05:17 | master slide and by default it's going
to be based on the one that's selected.
| | 05:22 | The other option would be just to
duplicate the one that's selected, very
| | 05:26 | similar, except that it will be named
differently. So if I choose Duplicate,
| | 05:31 | look what happens, I get
Photo - Horizontal copy.
| | 05:35 | Now just like selecting slides and
hitting Delete on the keyboard, I can come
| | 05:39 | into my masters here and delete them as
well, so I'm going to go to my new one
| | 05:44 | here, click on it, hit Delete to
remove that. I'm going to go back up to this
| | 05:50 | one and right-click and choose New
Master Slide. So it's very similar but it's
| | 05:55 | called Master #15. So I can double-
click down here where it says Master #15 and
| | 06:00 | type right over that, it should
actually say Photo - Horizontal and then
| | 06:09 | I'm going to add the word, perfect!
| | 06:14 | All right, so there is my new master
and there it is right here, I'm editing it
| | 06:17 | now on the screen. All I'm going to do
is I'm going to click in here and drag
| | 06:22 | this placeholder down, I'm going to
click in my title, drag it up, I have got
| | 06:27 | the guides to tell me when I'm centered,
there we go, and that's exactly what I need.
| | 06:34 | So now I've created my own master. If
I go up to the Masters dropdown in a
| | 06:37 | moment you'll see that it shows up
there as well. So I'm going to close up this
| | 06:43 | and I'm going to close up my masters.
I'm going to go to my very first slide in
| | 06:48 | the presentation, and I'm going to
click on the Masters dropdown, and you'll
| | 06:52 | notice that there is a new one down
here called Photo - Horizontal - Top Title,
| | 06:56 | interesting!
| | 06:57 | So not only can you modify existing
masters to suit your needs, it will save
| | 07:03 | you a lot of time if you are using a
number of slides in a presentation with
| | 07:07 | that master, or you can actually go in
and create your own masters to suit your
| | 07:11 | needs and then you will always have it
at your finger tips when you need it as
| | 07:15 | you build your presentations adding new slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing slides| 00:01 | As you continue building your
presentations and adding more and more slides to
| | 00:05 | a presentation, eventually the need
will likely arise where you will need to
| | 00:09 | reorder the slides in your
presentation. In other words, move them around,
| | 00:14 | juggle them up a little bit, and that's
we are going to look at in this lesson,
| | 00:17 | rearranging slides in a presentation
as well as content on slide itself.
| | 00:22 | So what we are going to do is change
views right off the top. You can see
| | 00:26 | I'm still using my Client Services Monthly
Meeting here, but I have added some new
| | 00:29 | slides to it and if you've got the
Exercise Files, you can open up CSMonthlyC
| | 00:34 | to follow along.
| | 00:36 | I am going to go my View button now and
change to the Light Table view and this
| | 00:40 | is maybe the easiest view to work in
when it comes to rearranging slides.
| | 00:44 | You do get a Thumbnail representation, a
little bit bigger than the Navigator View.
| | 00:47 | So it's easy to look at them, see the
content and then it's just a matter of
| | 00:51 | clicking and dragging to reorder them.
| | 00:52 | For example, if the good news belongs
at the end of this presentation I can
| | 00:56 | click on it, drag it down and
release it, you can see there is an opening
| | 01:00 | created for me and when I get to the
spot where it belongs, I release and
| | 01:04 | everything gets reordered, just like
that. I can move it back the same way.
| | 01:10 | What if I want to move more than one
slide? Let's say update from training and
| | 01:14 | the training revenues need to go after
the update from customer service. Well,
| | 01:18 | I can select multiple slides
holding down the Command key, clicking on
| | 01:22 | additional slides. Now I have got two
selected, so when I click and drag down
| | 01:27 | here for example, you will see there
is two attached to my mouse pointer and
| | 01:31 | when I release, I actually have moved
two slides, and I can move both of those
| | 01:36 | still selected back where they belong
by clicking and dragging, just like I did
| | 01:41 | the first time. All right? I can click
on one slide to de-select both slides
| | 01:46 | and have just one slide selected. I
want to right-click on this just to show
| | 01:49 | you something that we are going to
look at in a minute. It's Skip Slide.
| | 01:54 | If you are going to be creating a
presentation for varying audiences, for
| | 01:58 | example, if I'm going to show this is
to maybe upper management, I may want to
| | 02:02 | include an abbreviated version. In
other words there are certain slides in here
| | 02:06 | that maybe I don't need to talk about
in that particular meeting. So I can
| | 02:11 | choose to skip a slide, right-
clicking and choosing Skip Slide, you can see
| | 02:15 | collapses it and all the other slides
get renumbered. So when I go to play this
| | 02:19 | presentation it will skip over the
original slide 4, and go to what's labeled
| | 02:24 | now as the new slide 4. So if I'm using
slide numbers, no one is going to know
| | 02:28 | that I'm actually skipping some of those slides.
| | 02:30 | Now I'm going to go and present to
the team and I want to show all of the
| | 02:33 | slides that come over to the collapse
slide here, right-click and choose Don't
| | 02:37 | Skip Slide, and of course I can
select multiple slides. To do this, holding
| | 02:42 | down my Command key I can right-click
and choose to skip all three with all
| | 02:46 | three selected, and I can right-click
and choose Don't Skip and they all come back.
| | 02:51 | All right, let's change up our views
now because we can get organized in some
| | 02:55 | other views as well and there are
advantages to the different views. Let's go
| | 02:59 | back to Navigator, and I'm going
to go back up to slide number 1.
| | 03:03 | All right, if I want to change up the
order of slides like I did in the Table
| | 03:09 | View, I can come down to a slide and I
can click and drag it down and you will
| | 03:13 | see an actual blue bar, little blue
arrow pointing down in the bottom left
| | 03:17 | corner of the previous slide. And when
I release I'll move that slide. I can
| | 03:23 | move back, I can use my Command key to
select multiple slides or I can go over
| | 03:30 | to the left to the first slide and
click and drag down to select multiple
| | 03:34 | slides and then of course, I can move
as soon as I see that blue line, the
| | 03:38 | arrow, I can release. I'm
going to leave those there though.
| | 03:42 | One of the things I can do in
Navigator as well is create something called a
| | 03:46 | slide set. So if there are groups of
slides that need to stay together I can
| | 03:50 | create a slide set creating a parent-
child relationship. Let me show you what I
| | 03:55 | mean using our update from training.
| | 03:58 | The update from training includes a
slide on revenues. So does the update from
| | 04:02 | Customer Service. So if I want to keep
these groups together, I can do that.
| | 04:06 | All I need to do is to go to the
future child slide, which will be the
| | 04:10 | Revenues, and I'm going to indent it by
clicking and dragging it to slightly to the right.
| | 04:16 | So again I see that blue line but
notice that the arrow is indented.
| | 04:20 | So when I release I have actually created
that relationship I was talking about and there
| | 04:25 | is an arrow to expand and collapse
this view. So if I collapse it I'm seeing
| | 04:31 | slide 4 and then 6. Slide 5 I
don't see right now, which means if I
| | 04:36 | click and drag slide 4 down I'm moving
both of those slides. Move it back up
| | 04:43 | and moving them both, they stay together.
I can even do it while it's expanded.
| | 04:47 | If I click and drag you can see both
slides move with me, and I'm going to
| | 04:51 | leave it right there. The only danger
is I can move the child slide and make it
| | 04:57 | a child of another slide by clicking-
and-dragging down and releasing, and
| | 05:01 | that's not what I want to do. So I'm
going go up to my Edit menu and choose
| | 05:05 | Undo. And if I'm going to be moving
both of them, it's probably not a bad idea
| | 05:09 | just to collapse the branch like that.
| | 05:10 | All right, another option is -- I'm
going to move that back to use your Tab key
| | 05:17 | to create the relationship, tabbing
that one in, tabbing that one in creates a
| | 05:23 | couple of slide sets, and of course
there can be more than one child slide. Now
| | 05:28 | this is a set with three
child slides under the parent.
| | 05:31 | To move them back I can use the Shift
key and the Tab key on my keyboard or
| | 05:37 | just drag them over to the left, and
I'm going to drag them all over to the
| | 05:42 | left, like so, and that's where we started.
| | 05:45 | Now we can also work in the Outline View,
but it's a little bit different. When
| | 05:50 | I go to the Outline View, I can still
click on slides, I can still move them,
| | 05:55 | I see that blue arrow, but notice that I
can actually move information in between
| | 05:59 | bullets within a slide so I can start
moving the contents of one slide into
| | 06:03 | another slide. That's a little bit
dangerous unless you really meant to do that.
| | 06:08 | Another option, I can right-click and
you will notice that there is no Skip
| | 06:12 | Slide option here. So I can't skip
slides by right-clicking, but I can with the
| | 06:16 | slide selected go up to the Slide menu
and choose to skip a slide that way.
| | 06:21 | You can see what happens it does appear
collapsed but I still see the contents of
| | 06:26 | the slide here in my Outline View. To
get it back I go up to slide and choose
| | 06:31 | Don't Skip Slide.
| | 06:32 | Now if I wanted to, for example move
some information inside of another slide
| | 06:38 | like this one here and I click and drag
and I see my blue arrow here and I want
| | 06:43 | to demote it, so bring it down a level.
Notice that my arrow moves as I slide
| | 06:48 | left to right, so it can be on the
same level or it could be a sub-level, and
| | 06:53 | when I let go look what happens? Now
it's very handy if that's what I meant to
| | 06:57 | do but it really doesn't make sense
when I look at it over here where the
| | 07:01 | Client Services title slide becomes
just another set of bullets underneath
| | 07:07 | Update from Training. So I'm going to
up to Edit and choose Undo, and that sets
| | 07:13 | me back up where I was.
| | 07:14 | So that can be handy when you are
organizing data on the actual slides and
| | 07:18 | combining slides to create new ones,
but you have to be careful in the Outline
| | 07:22 | View, you can't do the exact same
things you can do in those other views like
| | 07:26 | the Navigator. So I'm going
to switch back to Navigator.
| | 07:29 | All right, so you should feel
comfortable now organizing your presentation,
| | 07:35 | sorting out slides, reorganizing
slides in the presentation and even
| | 07:39 | reorganizing information in slides by
combining them and creating slide sets.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Working with TextText box types| 00:00 | I like you to think for a moment about
a presentation you maybe attended where
| | 00:05 | a presentation was shown on the big
screen or on a monitor, maybe you have
| | 00:09 | viewed a presentation online, and I
want you to think about the individual
| | 00:12 | slides in that presentation. What do
you think the most popular object was to
| | 00:16 | appear on any given slide in the presentation?
| | 00:19 | Well, if you are thinking text, you
are right. Text is very important to a
| | 00:23 | slide presentation and text is treated
like any other object, whether it's a
| | 00:27 | graph, a table, a chart, an image.
Text is also an object just like the rest
| | 00:34 | and text will be treated like an
object when you work with text in a
| | 00:38 | presentation.
| | 00:39 | So it's that important, we are going to
dedicate this entire chapter to working
| | 00:42 | with text and we are going to start
with the basics and show you the different
| | 00:46 | types of text boxes you can work with
in a presentation, in Keynote. So let's
| | 00:50 | start a brand new presentation. We'll
go up to the File menu here and choose
| | 00:54 | New and from our Theme Chooser here,
I'm going to scroll down. I kind of like
| | 01:00 | this one here called Vintage and click
Choose. You can choose whatever theme you like.
| | 01:05 | So right away we are presented with the
first slide in our presentation, which
| | 01:09 | is a title with a subtitle. That's the
master that's being used here. But each
| | 01:14 | of these has a placeholder and you can
only have one title on a slide and you
| | 01:19 | can only have one subtitle or body in
the slide and what I mean by that is
| | 01:24 | those placeholders can not be
duplicated on the slide, we can add more text.
| | 01:29 | But when it comes to different views
and working with the Inspector, well there
| | 01:33 | is only one title and one body.
| | 01:36 | So let's add some text and then
I'll show you what I'm talking about.
| | 01:39 | We double-click to add the title, I'm
going to type in User Conference and down
| | 01:45 | below I'm going to double-click for the
subtitle and type in March 2008 and
| | 01:49 | I'm going to deselect that placeholder by
clicking below it. All right, let's check
| | 01:55 | out the Slide Inspector, we'll go up
to the Inspector button, make sure Slide
| | 01:59 | is selected and Appearance is selected
and you will notice that both the Title
| | 02:03 | and the Body in this slide is
visible. They are both checked off.
| | 02:08 | So if I didn't want to see the Body,
which happens to be the subtitle, I can
| | 02:12 | deselect that checkbox. Same thing
goes for the Title and there it isn't and
| | 02:18 | there it is. We also have a couple of
other checkboxes for Object Placeholder,
| | 02:22 | so remember what I said, text is an
object, so an object could be a chart,
| | 02:27 | it ould a shape, it could be text. If we
put a placeholder in there, we can then
| | 02:32 | adjust that placeholder and we can drag
objects in here and an object could be
| | 02:37 | a text box, believe it or not.
| | 02:39 | Slide Number is also and often, we
talked about that in a previous movie and
| | 02:43 | when we turn the slide numbering on
you will notice down below where the 1
| | 02:47 | appears on slide one. If I click on it,
that's actually a placeholder and it is
| | 02:51 | a text box, it's a smart text box
because numbering is automatic in a slide
| | 02:57 | presentation in Keynote
but it's still a text box.
| | 03:00 | Now that doesn't appear in our
Outline view. So let me show you what
| | 03:04 | I'm talking about. If I go up to the View
and choose Outline, you will see I have
| | 03:08 | got the title right here at the top.
Now it's not just the title of my
| | 03:12 | presentation, it's actually the title
of this slide because I'm using the title
| | 03:16 | placeholder here. I see it in Outline
view as the title of this slide and then
| | 03:22 | I also see the body down below which
in this case is March 2008. I can make
| | 03:27 | changes to that just by clicking in
there and making changes right here in
| | 03:31 | Outline view but if I add text I won't see it.
| | 03:35 | So by using the Title placeholder and
the Body placeholder, I'll be able to see
| | 03:40 | that and work with it in the Outline
view. So I'm going to change my view back
| | 03:44 | to Navigator and I'm going to
close this up and I'm going to add some
| | 03:48 | additional text down below. You will
notice we have got a button here label
| | 03:51 | Text Box and when I click on it, a
new text box appears in the center of my
| | 03:55 | slide, it's kind of hard to see there.
I'm going to drag it down where you can
| | 03:59 | see it and I'm going to use the
guideline to center it and it's just the word
| | 04:02 | text and you will notice these little
handles on the left and the right that
| | 04:06 | allow me to control the width of this text box.
| | 04:09 | Now the height will be determined by
how many times I hit Return as I'm typing.
| | 04:13 | So like any other placeholder we double-
click to add text and I'm going to type
| | 04:17 | in some text. Featuring world-renowned
speakers from across the globe. Okay, so
| | 04:30 | that barely fits on the slide, I
could have hit Return maybe about halfway
| | 04:34 | through, but I can come back after and
click in here next to the f in from and
| | 04:39 | hit Return just to wrap it around,
and you can see, I have got that
| | 04:43 | placeholder, that border around the
outside of my text box and it disappears
| | 04:47 | when I click outside of it. And when
I click on it again, there are those
| | 04:51 | little handles that allow me to
stretch it out if I wanted to.
| | 04:55 | So now I have got more space and my
text remain centered inside that box.
| | 05:01 | Notice though, if I switched to Outline
view it doesn't appear anywhere on the
| | 05:07 | Outline view itself, only on the
slide. So I'm going to switch back to
| | 05:12 | Navigator and if I wanted more text no
problem, I can add as many text boxes as
| | 05:17 | I like. Of course, if I don't want a
text box, with it selected when I see
| | 05:23 | those handles I can hit Delete on the
keyboard to remove it, simple as that.
| | 05:28 | Now what if you want text on a
slide and you want it to appear in the
| | 05:32 | background and make it so that you
cannot edit that text. So it's not actually
| | 05:37 | on the slide itself, it's going to
beyond the master, yes. So we can drag this
| | 05:42 | down halfway to see our master, there
are all of our different masters we can
| | 05:46 | use in this presentation. There is our
current master and if I click on that,
| | 05:52 | I can actually now add text to this
master and you can see where the title text
| | 05:57 | goes in the body and so on. I can
move that stuff around as well but if I
| | 06:02 | wanted to add some copyright
information, let's say I can use my Text Box
| | 06:06 | button up here. I'm going to move this
down. I'm going to double-click inside,
| | 06:12 | and I'm going to type in copyrite 2007.
That's how I like to spell copyright.
| | 06:21 | Notice that I have got that red line
underneath saying that's a spelling
| | 06:24 | mistake. I can right-click, go to
Spelling, and you can see Check Spelling as
| | 06:30 | You Type is turned on, that's why I'm
seeing it. I'm going to click on Spelling
| | 06:34 | and this is something that we are
going to look at a little bit later on, but
| | 06:38 | I'm going to choose the correct
spelling of copyright and correct it by
| | 06:42 | clicking the Correct button
and I'll close the speller.
| | 06:47 | Okay, so now because I have added
this to the master, when I go back to the
| | 06:51 | actual slide itself, you will notice
that appears down at the bottom and when I
| | 06:56 | click on it, I don't see the
placeholder like I do for the other text objects
| | 07:01 | in my slide. If I double-click it,
Keynote is smart enough to know I'm trying
| | 07:06 | to edit that. The object I'm trying to
select can only be edited in the master
| | 07:11 | slide. Do I want to edit the master?
Yeah. Clicking Edit Master brings it back
| | 07:15 | up, which means I can move this now
where it belongs down here in the bottom
| | 07:19 | right-hand corner. So I'll go back to
my slide now, that looks better and I
| | 07:25 | close up the masters and now you
should have a good handle on the different
| | 07:30 | types of text boxes you
can work with in Keynote.
| | 07:34 | Now we are going to take it a step
further and start formatting our text to
| | 07:38 | make it look different on the slide.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting text| 00:01 | Whenever you add text to a slide, like
we did in the previous lesson, you may
| | 00:05 | want to go back later and make
enhancements to that text. Maybe you would like
| | 00:09 | to change the font or the appearance.
Maybe you would like to change the color
| | 00:13 | or the size for example. That's what
we are going to do in this lesson.
| | 00:16 | We're going to take existing text on a slide
and make some changes to it using our Fonts palette.
| | 00:22 | Now the first thing we may need to do
is have some text on our slide. So we are
| | 00:26 | going to continue using the
presentation that we started in the previous lesson
| | 00:29 | here with our User Conference title
slide. If you are jumping to this lesson
| | 00:33 | and you've got Exercise Files,
go ahead and open up UserConfA and that
| | 00:37 | will get you all caught up.
| | 00:39 | Next we are going to open up our Fonts
palette. Now for me, the Fonts button
| | 00:43 | appears here at the end of my toolbar.
Now my Screen Resolution means that
| | 00:48 | I don't see all of the buttons on my
toolbar and I know that by this little
| | 00:52 | double arrow I see here at the end.
For example, if I close up this window a
| | 00:57 | little bit, you will see that
the Fonts button disappears.
| | 01:00 | Well, if I go to my double arrow here,
I'll see what's missing. The Format Bar
| | 01:04 | as well as my Fonts palette. So I'm
going to click on Fonts to open up the
| | 01:08 | Fonts palette and I'm going to stretch
out my window again, because I like to
| | 01:11 | be able to see that one.
| | 01:12 | Now in the Fonts palette, it's very
similar to most other applications where
| | 01:17 | you are working fonts. It could be
Pages in the iWork family. It could be any
| | 01:21 | other word processor for that matter,
where we've got columns working from left
| | 01:25 | to right. We have got Font Collections,
and currently All Fonts is selected for
| | 01:30 | me by default. You may have something
else selected depending on what you did
| | 01:35 | last with the Fonts palette,
but for me it's All Fonts.
| | 01:38 | And then under All Fonts, I see a list
of font families. Now this is going to
| | 01:43 | be every single font family, and it's
listed in alphabetical order. You can see
| | 01:47 | there is quite a few to choose from.
Now if I choose a different collection,
| | 01:51 | for example, if I go to my Favorites,
I have got nothing. I haven't setup any
| | 01:56 | favorites yet. What about Recently Used?
There is one that was recently used by me.
| | 02:01 | You may have something there or
nothing at all if it's your first time.
| | 02:05 | We have got some languages and we have
got some categories as well like Classic
| | 02:08 | for example. You can see that Classic
has a number of font families in it.
| | 02:13 | If we go down to Fun, it has a different
set of font families. I'm going to go
| | 02:18 | back up to All Fonts now to see them
all and just show you that one is selected
| | 02:23 | and that's Copperplate.
| | 02:24 | We chose a theme in the previous
lesson and keynote is really good, when you
| | 02:28 | choose a theme at selecting the right
font for that theme and the right color
| | 02:32 | combination. So you really don't want
to play around too much with what Keynote
| | 02:36 | offers you, but you can
definitely make some enhancements here.
| | 02:39 | So for example, Copperplate is kind of
a classy looking font. If I go back to
| | 02:44 | the Classic collection, you can see
the Copperplate does show up here and the
| | 02:49 | current typeface is set to Regular.
Notice I have got some typeface options for
| | 02:53 | the selected font family, like Regular
and Bold. Well, if I go to one of the
| | 02:58 | other ones like Baskerville, for
example, I get many more choices. So it all
| | 03:02 | depends on the font family, what you
see over here in the Typeface column. And
| | 03:06 | then of course, we can adjust the size as well.
| | 03:09 | Now before we can make changes to text,
we have to tell Keynote, what text do
| | 03:12 | we want to change? For example, if we
want to make some modifications to our
| | 03:16 | title, we have to select the title.
Now by clicking once, notice I select the
| | 03:21 | entire text-box. That means any
changes I make now will affect the entire
| | 03:26 | contents of that text-box. I don't
need to go inside and manually drag across
| | 03:30 | all of the text in this text-box.
However, if I want to make changes to a
| | 03:34 | single word, for example, then I would
have to double-click to get inside and
| | 03:38 | select the text that I want to change.
| | 03:40 | But we are going to start by changing
the entire contents of a text-box by
| | 03:44 | selecting the box itself. Let's try
one of these other font families like
| | 03:48 | Baskerville, for example. You can see
actually that's not too bad and it kind
| | 03:52 | of goes with our theme. Well, we do
have some typeface options. I'm going to
| | 03:56 | try Italic. That's kind of neat. How
about SemiBold? Well, that's much thicker
| | 04:02 | and heavier. What about if we did
SemiBold and Italic? There we go. I like that one.
| | 04:06 | It kind of stands out. Then we
have got Bold, where we get it super heavy.
| | 04:11 | Bold Italic. That might be too much.
So I'm going to go back to SemiBold
| | 04:15 | Italic. I like that one right there.
| | 04:17 | Notice in the next column we have got
the Size, and it's set to 82 right now.
| | 04:22 | And then we have got some presets here
as well. As I scroll up and down through
| | 04:26 | the presets, you can see that not
every single point size appears here, it
| | 04:30 | jumps from 24 to 36 and so on. So if
I wanted to try 72, for example, that
| | 04:35 | might be a little too small. The
next one up is 96. That's too big.
| | 04:40 | So if I want something in between, I
can then use this little slider here.
| | 04:44 | As I slide down, you can see I get smaller.
So if I go to 96 and start sliding down
| | 04:51 | from there, until I get the size I want.
I'm going to go right up to 72 and it
| | 04:59 | jumps me to the next one.
| | 05:01 | Now I can also come in here and just
highlight what's there and type over it.
| | 05:05 | If I want 81, for example, I can type-
in 81 and when I hit my Tab key to leave
| | 05:11 | that field, you can see the change on
my slide. So I would like to do that
| | 05:15 | until I get the exact size I want.
| | 05:16 | Now we are going to leave the Font
palette open and we are going to go to our
| | 05:20 | next text box, which is the body of
our slide. And in this case, it's our
| | 05:24 | subtitle, March 2008. In this, I just
want to make some enhancements too.
| | 05:29 | I on't really want to go through all the
changes of the fonts and typefaces and
| | 05:32 | so on, but I might want to enhance
what's there. At the top of the Font
| | 05:37 | palette, you can see I have got some
options and buttons here for underlining,
| | 05:41 | for strikethrough, for font colors
or text colors. I can also change the
| | 05:45 | background by choosing a
different document color.
| | 05:48 | Then I have got this neat one for
setting a text shadow up. When I choose a
| | 05:52 | text shadow, then I have some other
options over here to the right to adjust
| | 05:56 | that shadow. So let's do that. With
our text-box selected, let's go up to our
| | 06:02 | Underline button. I want that to stand
out. So if I choose Single and None is
| | 06:07 | the default, you can see how that kind
of stands out, but really we don't need
| | 06:11 | to use underlining much anymore.
| | 06:12 | Back in the old print days, you would
underline something, so that when it went
| | 06:16 | to print, it could be Bolded or
Italicized or something to really stand out.
| | 06:21 | So we can do that ourselves now. So
another option under Underline is Double or
| | 06:26 | Color and of course, if I click Color I
can choose the color that I want for my
| | 06:32 | underline. This is something you can't
undo by the way. So you can't go up to
| | 06:36 | the Edit menu and undo that if you
choose a color you don't like. You actually
| | 06:40 | have to go back and choose a
different color, or I'm going to come up here
| | 06:44 | actually and choose None for underlining.
| | 06:48 | Next, we've got strike-through and if
you are collaborating on a presentation
| | 06:51 | with somebody, this might be good. If
you think there are certain words that
| | 06:55 | don't belong, you can select those
words and then choose either a single or a
| | 06:59 | double strikethrough so that people you
collaborate with can still see the text
| | 07:03 | but understand that it should be removed.
I'm going to go back to None. And of
| | 07:08 | course, we can change the color of
that as well. When we choose Color, this
| | 07:11 | whole Color palette here shows up for us again.
| | 07:14 | All right, what about the color? If I
go to my Color button here, that launches
| | 07:19 | my Colors palette and I can change the
color of the font in this case. So if
| | 07:23 | I want orange, for example, you can see
that doesn't look so hot, but I might
| | 07:28 | want to go to a shade of orange and
there are different ways to adjust
| | 07:31 | brightness and so on. We can change
the different choices for the different
| | 07:36 | sets of colors. We can get very
technical here and choose the color we want.
| | 07:40 | We have also got the wheel and we can
move this little pixel around till we see
| | 07:44 | the color that we are looking for. That
might work good, but of course, this is
| | 07:49 | something that we cannot undo as well.
| | 07:51 | So here is a neat little trick. If you
find that you can't find the right color
| | 07:55 | and you want to set it back to what it
was or to match something else that's on
| | 07:59 | your slide, you can use this little
magnifying glass to go pick a color. So for
| | 08:04 | example, if I come in here to my User
Conference text and click, you can see
| | 08:08 | that March 2008 changed to that color
as well. And that's a color that appears
| | 08:13 | here next to the magnifying glass. I'm
going to close out my Colors palette.
| | 08:17 | To make this really stand out, maybe I
should take it off the slide, bring it
| | 08:21 | out a little bit, so it's floating
above my slide. That would be a shadow. So
| | 08:25 | I'm going to come up here and change
this to actually have a shadow, so with my
| | 08:31 | text-box selected. Now notice that I
actually clicked inside and the handles
| | 08:36 | disappeared from my text-box. So
when I went to my Shadow button, nothing
| | 08:40 | really happened. That's because I'm
inside the text-box and I haven't selected
| | 08:44 | any text yet.
| | 08:45 | So I would have to select all the text
or click outside the box and reselect it
| | 08:50 | with one click. Once I have got the
handles back, now when I come up here and
| | 08:54 | click on my Shadow button, see how it
comes out off the page ever so slightly.
| | 08:58 | Or I can adjust that. There are some
adjustment sliders over here that become
| | 09:03 | enabled when I turn on the Shadow,
like the opacity, like the blurriness as
| | 09:08 | well as the offset or the distance
and then we can set the angle as well.
| | 09:13 | So if I come over here and I start
moving the Opacity slider to the right,
| | 09:17 | you can see how my shadow gets darker.
As I go to the left, it gets ever so subtle.
| | 09:23 | I'm going to go right to about there.
I'm also going to soften it a little bit
| | 09:27 | by taking my Blur slider to the
right a little bit. Then I might want to
| | 09:32 | increase the Offset. Now notice, the
further to the right I slide, the further
| | 09:36 | off the slide my text appears to come.
So I don't want to overdo it but that
| | 09:41 | might be good right there.
| | 09:43 | If I don't like the angle that the
virtual light seems to be hitting my text,
| | 09:47 | I can take this and just move it around.
You can see the shadow moving around my
| | 09:51 | text until I get to the spot that I
want and release. 225. That looks good.
| | 09:56 | Now what if I want to make changes
to just specific text, not the entire
| | 10:00 | text-box? Well, let's double-click in
here and world renowned I think needs to
| | 10:05 | stand out. So I highlight that text by
clicking and dragging across so that you
| | 10:10 | can go right to left or left to right,
it's up to you. Now I'm maybe just going
| | 10:14 | to bold this. That's all. One simple
enhancement really makes it stand out.
| | 10:18 | That might be too much. SemiBold looks
a little better. To really see what that
| | 10:23 | looks like, I'll de-select by clicking
outside the box. That looks nice just like that.
| | 10:27 | All right, so I'm going to close up
my Font palette and those minor changes
| | 10:32 | that I made to my slide make it look a
lot different. Now keep in mind, when
| | 10:36 | you start making changes to your fonts
and font sizes and so on, you may have
| | 10:39 | to come back into your slide and make
some adjustments to the layout as well.
| | 10:43 | Now User Conference used to show up
on two lines. So it all seems kind of
| | 10:47 | squished down here.
| | 10:48 | So I'm going to click in here, I'm just
going to move it up a little bit higher
| | 10:52 | and I'm going to move my date up a
little bit higher as well, spread this out
| | 10:57 | and move this down slightly. There,
that looks better. Those are the changes
| | 11:03 | I like and those are the ones I want to
keep. So of course, I come up to my File
| | 11:07 | menu and save that to save my changes.
Notice also Command+S will accomplish
| | 11:15 | the same thing.
| | 11:16 | So that covers enhancements to
existing text on your slide. You should feel
| | 11:20 | comfortable now using the Fonts palette.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Text Inspector| 00:01 | In the previous lesson we discussed how
you can make changes to the appearance
| | 00:05 | of your text on a slide. We changed
the font, we changed the typeface,
| | 00:09 | we changed the look and feel by adjusting
colors and other enhancements. But what
| | 00:15 | about changing things like text
alignment and spacing and that kind of stuff?
| | 00:19 | Well, we actually make those changes
through our Text Inspector and that's what
| | 00:22 | we are going to look at in this lesson.
| | 00:24 | Now before we do, you will notice that
my presentation has grown by one slide.
| | 00:29 | I have added a new slide to the end
of my presentation and it's called
| | 00:33 | UserConfB. So if you have got the
Exercise Files, you can open up this
| | 00:36 | presentation and be all caught up with me.
| | 00:39 | Now here you can see I have got a
title at the top and I have got some text
| | 00:43 | down below, which is actually just a
free textbox. You can see when I click on
| | 00:47 | it, it's one box full of text.
Same thing for the title.
| | 00:50 | Now if I want to make changes to spacing,
to alignment and so on, I need to go
| | 00:56 | to my Text Inspector. So I'm going to
click the Inspector button and make sure
| | 01:00 | Text Inspector is chosen. You will
notice that I have got Text, Columns and
| | 01:05 | Bullets across the top and we are
going to focus on Text in this lesson.
| | 01:08 | Right below that, you can see a Color &
Alignment section. So the current color
| | 01:13 | of my typeface, you can see in my title
that I'm using this color, if I wanted
| | 01:17 | to change the color, I can do it from
here as well. If I click on that color,
| | 01:22 | then I have access to the various
means of choosing colors for my text.
| | 01:26 | Now one neat thing that I have done
that is probably a pretty good tip and you
| | 01:31 | should try it too, is you will see that
the current color appears here next to
| | 01:35 | my magnifying glass. If it's a color
you want to use in other slides as you
| | 01:39 | create more text, you might want to
save that color, rather than trying to find
| | 01:43 | it down below in the spectrum.
| | 01:45 | So you can click and drag that down
to any one of the squares down below to
| | 01:49 | save that color. Then you have easy
access to it in the future. So I have done
| | 01:53 | that twice now.
| | 01:54 | I am going to close up my Colors
palette and keep the color selected that I have.
| | 02:00 | It goes great with this theme.
| | 02:02 | Next, we have our Alignment buttons and
you can see we have Left, Center, Right
| | 02:07 | and then we have got this Full
Justification button as well. Right now, Center
| | 02:12 | is selected and that's ideal when you
are working with titles and sub-titles.
| | 02:16 | It's probably not a good selection,
when you are working with paragraphs of
| | 02:20 | text, for example. So if I came
down here and I see that I'm using Left
| | 02:24 | Alignment and I change that to Centered
you can see, well, it probably doesn't
| | 02:28 | look that great. Down in the left-
hand side it's very jagged and it's
| | 02:32 | distracting. So I'm going to go back to left.
| | 02:35 | For my title, I'll leave it Centered,
but down below, you can see I have got
| | 02:39 | some other options here for my
alignment of my free text. If I go to right,
| | 02:43 | well, that really doesn't make sense
for the paragraphs. It might look good
| | 02:47 | though for pieces of my text. For
example, the people who are being quoted
| | 02:51 | here, we might want their names on the
right but the quotes on the left. Well,
| | 02:55 | that means going in and actually
selecting the text that we want to change.
| | 02:59 | So I'm going to put everything back
to left. I'm going to come inside by
| | 03:02 | double-clicking and I'm going to
highlight the name. And that should be right
| | 03:07 | aligned. So I'm going to click my
Right Alignment. I'm going to do the same
| | 03:11 | with this other name down below. Click-
and-drag across it to select it and I'll
| | 03:16 | choose Right Alignment, great!
| | 03:20 | Now let's talk about the Full
Justification, what we call Justified Text. This
| | 03:24 | is where you will see everything
aligned on the left and the right. I'm going
| | 03:28 | to move this Text Inspector out of the
way a little bit and I'm going to select
| | 03:32 | this entire paragraph right here. So
right now, we know it's left aligned.
| | 03:37 | If I want it to be fully justified, I can
click the Justified button, and you can
| | 03:41 | see what happens, extra spaces are
being added between the words so that if
| | 03:45 | I move this Text Inspector out of the
way you can see its flush on the left and
| | 03:50 | the right, except for the
last line in the paragraph.
| | 03:53 | Well, that can come in handy
sometimes, not necessarily in a slide
| | 03:57 | presentation, but now you know what
it's about. I'm going to change that back
| | 04:00 | to Left, I think that looks better and
we'll move our Text Inspector back up
| | 04:06 | and talk about spacing now.
| | 04:08 | Now we do have some vertical alignment
options before we get to spacing, but if
| | 04:13 | I go into my title, for example, you
can see it's pretty centered here inside
| | 04:17 | the actual box. If I want it at the
top, I can click the Top Alignment.
| | 04:22 | Centered is where it was, and there
is Bottom Alignment, but not a big adjustment.
| | 04:27 | When I get into free text like below,
automatically the box is going to expand
| | 04:32 | to accommodate my text. So none of
these buttons really matter. You can see, as
| | 04:36 | I click on them, nothing changes. So
it's really more helpful when you are
| | 04:40 | working with title text
and sub-titles and so on.
| | 04:45 | All right, now we can go on to spacing.
Now you can see down below, I have got
| | 04:50 | a Character Spacing slider that
defaults to 0% and then the rest down below
| | 04:55 | kind of have to do with working with
paragraph text. So let's go in here and
| | 04:59 | let's try selecting our first paragraph.
I'm going to click and drag across the
| | 05:03 | first paragraph and adjust Character Spacing.
| | 05:06 | If I want to increase or decrease the
space between individual characters,
| | 05:11 | I can do that with this slider. As I go
to the left, you can see my numbers turn
| | 05:16 | to negatives and it's kind of squishing
my text together. So if I wanted it to
| | 05:20 | fit maybe on less lines, I could
keep doing that until it's all squished
| | 05:24 | together, but that's hard to read. So
I wouldn't want to necessarily go up to
| | 05:28 | -9%, but I can move it a little bit to
the left to create the space if I want.
| | 05:34 | It's pretty hard to see that I have
changed the Character Spacing. It's also
| | 05:38 | known as tracking in the publishing
word or you may have heard of kerning as well.
| | 05:42 | So I might want to go down to this
paragraph as well and select it.
| | 05:46 | A triple-click by the way is a
shortcut for clicking and dragging across an
| | 05:50 | entire paragraph. I'm going to move
that to -2 as well. That's a nice look
| | 05:57 | right there. I'll de-select by
clicking outside the selected text.
| | 06:01 | Next, we have Line Spacing. So that's
the amount of space in between the actual
| | 06:04 | lines in a paragraph. Now I don't have
to select the paragraph to do that,
| | 06:08 | I can just click anywhere in the
paragraph and change my Line Spacing. Single is
| | 06:13 | the default. You can see as I go to
the right, it increases the space between
| | 06:17 | my lines in the paragraph and of
course, I can squish them together too by
| | 06:22 | going to the left. But then it might
get a little bit hard to read.
| | 06:25 | So I'm going to go back to 1.
| | 06:28 | If I wanted to change the spacing for
both paragraphs, then I would have to
| | 06:31 | come in here and I would have to click-
and-drag across all of my text, making
| | 06:35 | sure it's all selected and then I would
make my change. But I don't want to do that.
| | 06:39 | We also have some options to change
the spacing before and after a paragraph.
| | 06:44 | Now when you come to the end of a
paragraph and you want to leave a space
| | 06:47 | between the paragraph and the next
piece of text. A lot of people will just hit
| | 06:51 | the Return key a number of times until
they get the desired number of space,
| | 06:55 | but each one of those Returns is
considered its own paragraph. So when you
| | 06:59 | start changing things like font
sizes and so on, they are affected.
| | 07:02 | What's better is to hit Return once
to go to the next line and end the
| | 07:06 | paragraph and then adjust the space
before or after that paragraph. So for
| | 07:11 | example, if I click and drag after
paragraph, you can see the space that's
| | 07:15 | appearing after this paragraph where
my cursor is flashing. It's in points as
| | 07:21 | well, 0 points is the default. If I
wanted to, I could do the same thing for
| | 07:25 | before the paragraph to increase space.
| | 07:29 | The last thing is our Inset Margin here.
You can see it's set to 3 points. Now
| | 07:34 | right now, if I look at the border that
goes around the outside of my text,
| | 07:38 | you can see that the text comes very close
to that border. Although this is free
| | 07:41 | floating text. If I click outside,
there is no border to speak of. So this
| | 07:46 | really doesn't matter in this case, but
if I did have a border around my text,
| | 07:50 | then I'm going to do that now by going
up to my Graphic Inspector. You can see
| | 07:56 | there is no Fill and there is no Stroke,
but if I change the Stroke to a Line,
| | 08:00 | you can see the line around
the outside of my text now.
| | 08:03 | I am going to go back to my Text
Inspector and it might be good to create some
| | 08:09 | space between my actual border here
and the text by using my Inset Margin
| | 08:13 | slider. You can see as I slide, the
box increases and the text squishes
| | 08:19 | together. So I can create a little bit
of space between my borders. I'm going
| | 08:22 | to move that back all the way over to 0.
Let's move it up to 3 points, that's
| | 08:31 | the default.
| | 08:32 | I am going to go back up to my Graphic
Inspector. We are going to be spending a
| | 08:35 | lot of time here in a future title, but
for now I'm going to change the Stroke
| | 08:40 | back to None. Go back to my Text
Inspector, look at everything. It looks just
| | 08:45 | the way I wanted. I'll de-select this
text to get a good feel. When I'm done,
| | 08:50 | I'll close up my Text Inspector.
| | 08:53 | So there you have it, a number of
additional modifications you can make to the
| | 08:57 | text in a slide, in your
presentation using your Text Inspector.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with columns| 00:00 | Odds are pretty good, you are not
going to work with columns very often in a
| | 00:04 | slide presentation, because as we've
discussed, you probably shouldn't have
| | 00:07 | slides with a whole lot of text on
them anyways. But for those rare occasions
| | 00:12 | where you do have a lot of text on a
single slide, you may want to put that
| | 00:16 | text into columns and we
have that capability in Keynote.
| | 00:19 | So what we are going to do is
continue to build on our presentation that we
| | 00:23 | started a couple of lessons ago, and if
you are jumping to this lesson and you
| | 00:26 | have got Exercise Files, you can go
in there and open up UserConfC to be
| | 00:30 | exactly where I'm here on my screen.
| | 00:32 | I am on slide number 2 and we do have
some text here in a free textbox. So when
| | 00:38 | we click on it, we see those handles on
the left and the right so we can adjust
| | 00:41 | the width of this box. We can't adjust
the height using a handle. The height is
| | 00:45 | determined by the amount of text that
we type in this box. We have learned that
| | 00:49 | quite a while ago. But things all
change when we go to columns, and to change
| | 00:53 | our text into columns, we go up to
our Inspector button, make sure the Text
| | 00:58 | Inspector is selected, and now we are
going to move over to the Columns tab.
| | 01:02 | Now you can see the default number of
columns is set to 1 here. That's one
| | 01:06 | single column, its Equal column width
checkbox is checked off. That's because
| | 01:12 | when we create multiple columns, we'll
automatically see equal widths for those columns.
| | 01:17 | Right now down below is just that
single column and it's 7 inches wide. But
| | 01:21 | let's see what happens when I change
it to 2 columns by clicking the Up Arrow
| | 01:24 | right here next to the 1. You can see
now I have got two columns. They are
| | 01:28 | listed here. They are both 3.325 inches
wide, equal column widths and there is
| | 01:34 | a space in between the two columns
called the Gutter of 0.35 inches. All of
| | 01:39 | these are adjustable, of course.
| | 01:41 | But before we get there, I just want
you to see that it doesn't look all that
| | 01:44 | right yet, does it? Our second column
over here which has a few lines of space
| | 01:49 | in between before we get to the next
column, this is centered vertically on the
| | 01:53 | right hand side, I may want to change that.
| | 01:56 | And if I change the height of my
box now, which I can do because I'm in
| | 01:59 | Columns, you can see it looks even
worse and as I scroll down, look at that,
| | 02:03 | part of the second column is now
showing up in the first column and this is
| | 02:07 | just a bit of a mess. So I'm going to
scroll that back up by dragging it up.
| | 02:12 | The first thing I'm going to do with
the box selected is change my Vertical
| | 02:16 | Alignment to top, and to do that you
may recall we go to our Text section of
| | 02:21 | our Text Inspector. You can see
Centering is chosen here for a Vertical
| | 02:25 | Alignment, we are going to change that to Top.
| | 02:28 | So already that looks a little bit
better. We'll go back to the Columns section
| | 02:32 | now and what we are going to do is just
adjust the size of our box, but at the
| | 02:37 | same time we want to make sure that
the second columns starts with the second
| | 02:41 | quote. So to do that, we
can insert a column break.
| | 02:44 | I am going to double-click to get
inside my textbox and then I'm going to click
| | 02:48 | once just in front of that double quote.
I'm going to go up to the Insert menu
| | 02:53 | and from here I'm going to choose
Column Break, and you can see automatically
| | 02:58 | that's moved now to the top of the next
column, which is column 2 in this case.
| | 03:03 | So even if I increase the size of
this box, I'm going to click outside, and
| | 03:07 | once on it again to get those handles
back. It will always stay over there on
| | 03:11 | the right hand side, just like so.
And of course, if I change this to three
| | 03:17 | columns, you can see what happens. Even
though this is messed up a little bit,
| | 03:21 | my previous second column becomes a
third column and starts at the very top of
| | 03:26 | the quote. I'm going to bump that back too.
| | 03:28 | Now the other thing we can do is
adjust the column width. So if we don't want
| | 03:32 | equal column widths as well as the
space in between those columns, all we have
| | 03:36 | to do is uncheck the Equal column
width checkbox and then we can come in here
| | 03:40 | to column 1 or 2, and make some changes.
| | 03:43 | So I'm going to double-click here on
my first column width and I'm going to
| | 03:47 | type in 5. When I hit my Tab key to
move to the next field, you can see what
| | 03:51 | happens. This is 5 inches wide, and
this one over here now is 1.65 inches wide,
| | 03:58 | but you will notice that because I put
in the column break, the second column
| | 04:03 | starts at the beginning of this quote.
What that means is that it doesn't all
| | 04:06 | fit in this text box
anymore. How do I know that?
| | 04:09 | Well, there is a little plus sign now
at the bottom handle here in the center,
| | 04:12 | which means I can click and drag down
until that disappears, knowing that
| | 04:16 | I'm oing to see all of my text. Well,
I'm going to change that back to Equal
| | 04:20 | column widths. There we go. I'm going
to change the size of this box, I'm going
| | 04:25 | to bring it back up right to there,
perfect. The other thing that I can change
| | 04:29 | if I wanted to increase or decrease the
space between these two columns is the
| | 04:33 | Gutter and I can double-click there.
Maybe 0.5 inches would be better,
| | 04:37 | a little more space.
| | 04:38 | I am going to hit Tab just to move,
there we go, and you can see because I have
| | 04:41 | got some blank lines in here, this is
getting pushed down. But that's okay.
| | 04:45 | I can come in here with a double-click
and just hit Delete on the keyboard to
| | 04:49 | remove that extra line space that was
inserted by hitting the Return key and
| | 04:54 | everything looks great.
| | 04:55 | All right, so when I'm done, I'll close
up the Text Inspector. I'll deselect my
| | 05:00 | textbox by clicking outside, and you
can see maybe just moving this down a
| | 05:04 | little bit will be good, and there we go.
That covers working with columns in Keynote.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with lists| 00:01 | Another way we can work with text in
a slide in a presentation is to put it
| | 00:05 | into a list format, and we have
already seen a bulleted list in previous
| | 00:09 | lessons. We can also do numbered lists
in Keynote and that's what we are going
| | 00:13 | to look at in this particular lesson.
| | 00:15 | So I'm still building on my user
conference slide presentation here from the
| | 00:19 | previous lessons, but if you've
jumped to this lesson, go to your Exercise
| | 00:23 | Files if you have got them and open up
UserConfD. That will get you all caught up.
| | 00:26 | The next thing we are going to do
is create a new slide. So I'm going to go
| | 00:30 | up to my New button, and that adds a
third slide. Because slide 2 was a blank
| | 00:36 | slide, that's what I get for slide 3.
| | 00:38 | That's okay. We can go up to Masters
and let's change it to one with bullets,
| | 00:43 | so we'll choose Title & Bullets. So we
have got our new slide, let's enter a
| | 00:47 | title. I'm going to double-click up
here and type in the word VENUES. These
| | 00:51 | will be venues for our user conference.
Now down below, next to this bullet,
| | 00:56 | I'm going to double-click and start
entering some venues. So I'm going to start
| | 00:59 | with the Congress Center.
| | 01:02 | When I hit Return, look what happens.
I get a new bullet. I'm going to hit
| | 01:07 | Return again and I'm going to add one
more. There we go. Now I won't hit Return
| | 01:15 | again because if I do, I'm going to
get another bullet and I don't want
| | 01:19 | anymore, that's it.
| | 01:20 | So when I click outside this textbox,
you can see what happens. It looks like
| | 01:25 | it's kind of over on the left hand side.
So I'm going to click back in here,
| | 01:28 | and I'm going to slide this left handle
over a little bit, so it's more towards
| | 01:32 | the center of my slide. I may have some
sub bullets going in some of these, so
| | 01:37 | that's probably a good
location for it right there.
| | 01:39 | With the textbox selected, I'm going
to go up to my Inspector now. We were
| | 01:43 | using Columns in the previous lesson,
so that's what we see under our Text
| | 01:46 | Inspector, but I'm going to go over to
Bullets, and we are going to cover some
| | 01:51 | of the bullet options now when you
work with a bulleted list and then we'll
| | 01:54 | also look at numbering as well.
| | 01:56 | So right now, my bulleted list is
centered vertically here. Now you will notice
| | 02:00 | there is nothing really to help us with
aligning our bullets vertically. If we
| | 02:05 | go back to our Text section though,
you may remember that we have vertical
| | 02:09 | alignment buttons here, and I'm going
to move this to the top, just like so.
| | 02:13 | Back we go to Bullets and we'll start
by talking about the Indent Level.
| | 02:17 | You will notice that one appears here.
Now I'm going to go inside my textbox by
| | 02:21 | double-clicking and I'm going to click
just anywhere in this first bullet.
| | 02:24 | You can see that that's a level 1 bullet,
same thing for the next item down, and
| | 02:29 | the next one, and the next one. But if
we wanted to have sub bullets under each
| | 02:34 | of these, we can insert a new level.
| | 02:36 | So for example, after Congress Center,
if I have some sub bullets I wanted to
| | 02:40 | put in, I click after Congress Center.
That creates a new level 1 bullet,
| | 02:45 | but I can use this little arrow here to
indent to a level 2, and I can go to 3 and 4
| | 02:51 | and so on. I want a level 2 bullet
there. All right, I'm going to type in
| | 02:57 | Ballroom A. When I hit Return, look
what happens. I'm still at level 2,
| | 03:01 | so I can continue typing level 2
bullets under this first level 1 bullet.
| | 03:07 | Now if I hit Return again, I'll get
the same thing. If I want to go back I'm
| | 03:11 | going to just hit Return and I'm going
to hit Tab. That's another way to indent
| | 03:15 | to a next level. You can see I'm at a
level 3 now. If I didn't mean to do that,
| | 03:19 | I can go back by using the left arrow
or if I have gone way too far, I can hold
| | 03:24 | down Shift and hit Tab as another
way to move back up through the levels.
| | 03:29 | If I hit Delete, you can see what
happens, the whole bullet is removed, and
| | 03:33 | that's exactly what I want right there,
perfect! So those are indent levels.
| | 03:37 | Now we can also work with the actual
bullets themselves and if we use numbers,
| | 03:41 | we can work and adjust
with the numbering as well.
| | 03:44 | Right now you can see Text Bullets is
selected and the bulleted list that
| | 03:49 | I have here going has little round dots
next to them, which are actually text
| | 03:54 | bullets. Now I can change those to be a
little bit more elaborate. If I want to
| | 03:58 | do one at a time, I can just click in
any one of these bullets and make my
| | 04:02 | change, but if I want to make the
change to the entire list, I can
| | 04:05 | click and drag across the entire list.
| | 04:08 | So now I'm going to change it from
Text Bullets to something else. If I go to
| | 04:12 | No Bullets, that's self-explanatory, I
won't see anything there, just a bunch
| | 04:16 | of lines of text. But another option is
to go to Image Bullets, and if I click
| | 04:21 | on that, you can see the default
image that shows up is this one and I can
| | 04:24 | scroll through the list looking at the
various images I have to choose from.
| | 04:29 | I am going to scroll down this list,
and that looks like a good one right
| | 04:32 | there. When I click on it, you can see
what happens, I get the bullets showing
| | 04:35 | up next to each one of these, and
it's a little bit big. Right now, the
| | 04:39 | Alignment is set to 0 point, so it's
lined up perfectly, it's not any higher or
| | 04:44 | any lower than the actual text. But
down below, you can see the size is set to
| | 04:48 | 100 %, it's the same size as my text.
| | 04:52 | Well, if I want it to be half the size,
I can come in here and type in 50, or
| | 04:57 | of course, I can use my Up and Down
arrows to change the size as well, and you
| | 05:01 | will see a change in front of your
eyes. But to get all the way down to 50,
| | 05:05 | it's probably easy as just to type in
50 and hit my Tab key to move out and
| | 05:09 | that looks much better. Notice that
Scale with text is selected and that's why
| | 05:14 | I have this option set to 50 %.
| | 05:17 | Now another option would be to create
my own image, my own custom image and
| | 05:21 | then I would be able to select it
using Custom Image. I haven't created
| | 05:24 | anything, you would have to use a
graphics application to do that once you've
| | 05:28 | got your image, and you would go
and select it using Custom Image.
| | 05:32 | Another option is not a bullet at all
but rather a number. If we go to Numbers,
| | 05:38 | you can see what happens. The
automatic numbering that appears here is 1 and
| | 05:43 | then for subbullets, it starts counting
over at 1, 2 and then 2, 3, and 4 and so on.
| | 05:49 | Now if I add something new right in
the middle here by pressing Return,
| | 05:52 | everything gets renumbered. The little
plus sign means that I'm not seeing all
| | 05:57 | of my text, so I'm going to click and
drag this down a little bit so I can see
| | 06:01 | it all. You can see everything got
renumbered for me as I was about to type in
| | 06:05 | the new number 3. If I hit Delete though,
I remove that bullet and you can see
| | 06:09 | I have got everything renumbered again.
| | 06:12 | Now because I have chosen Numbers, I
have got different options showing up down
| | 06:16 | below like the numbering scheme or style.
Right now, it's just set to 1, 2, 3,
| | 06:20 | but if I click on this, you can see I
can have in it brackets, on both sides,
| | 06:25 | just on the right. I can do Roman
Numerals in lower or uppercase. You can see
| | 06:30 | that's just the one bullet that's
affected unless I select everything and go
| | 06:36 | back in here and choose the
numbering system that I want.
| | 06:39 | Let's try something else now. Let's
try Tiered Numbers. This is a little bit
| | 06:47 | different. You can see what happens now.
I have got 1 and then 1.1, 1.2, before
| | 06:53 | it starts counting over at 2, then 3,
then 4. I have also got some options down
| | 06:59 | here as I enter new ones to continue from
the previous, or I could start at as new number.
| | 07:04 | So for example, if I have got ten items
and they don't all fit on one slide and
| | 07:08 | they kind of flow over into a second
slide, I can have that continuing from the
| | 07:12 | previous bulleted list or I could
have it start over at any number I choose
| | 07:17 | right here by clicking Start at. Now I
don't have too much that would actually
| | 07:21 | overflow so I don't have this
capability available to me right now.
| | 07:27 | Let's go back up to Bullets now and I'm
going to go up to Text Bullets. That's
| | 07:31 | what we had originally. I'll just show
you that we also have some options here
| | 07:35 | for Bullet Indent and Text Indent. The
Bullet Indent is the space between the
| | 07:41 | border of my box and the actual bullet.
The Text Indent is the space between
| | 07:45 | the bullet and my text. So if I come in
here to the Bullet Indent and I hit the
| | 07:50 | Up Arrow, you can see all the bullets
are moving in from the left. I can move
| | 07:55 | that back by going down with the Down Arrow.
| | 07:59 | Now the Text Indent, again because I
have got everyone of my item selected,
| | 08:03 | it's going to affect my entire list.
I can increase or decrease the space
| | 08:07 | between the bullets and the text as
well. So I'm going to bump this one up a
| | 08:12 | little bit in case I put a border
around this and then of course, when I come
| | 08:18 | back in here, you can see
it's kind of messed up my levels.
| | 08:22 | It's still a level 2 but because of my
options here for indenting, I have made
| | 08:26 | some adjustments to the actual level 2
bullets where they look like they are
| | 08:30 | level 1. So if I come up here and
press Return and then Tab, you can see what
| | 08:35 | happens to the bullets down below.
They go back to being level 2s. So it can
| | 08:39 | get a little bit messy, I'm just going
to delete that to take out the new one
| | 08:43 | and everything looks good. It's the
way it should be. I'm going to click
| | 08:45 | outside the text box and
that covers Bullets & Numbering.
| | 08:49 | It's probably a good idea to go in and
set up all of your bullet settings first
| | 08:54 | and then go inside the textbox and
enter your text, but either way, you have
| | 08:58 | got the capabilities of Bullets &
Numbering at your fingertips here under
| | 09:03 | Bullets in our Text Inspector.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Checking spelling| 00:00 | Odds are pretty good you are going to
be working with text on a regular basis
| | 00:04 | as you build your presentations in
Keynote. So now might be a good time to
| | 00:08 | discuss the built-in Spell Checking
functionality you get with Keynote and
| | 00:12 | other applications in the Mac OS X
Operating System. In fact, the Spell
| | 00:17 | Checking functionality is part of Mac
OS X and it's shared by applications like
| | 00:21 | Keynote and Pages and
Numbers in the iWork family.
| | 00:25 | So the first thing you need to do if
you have Exercise Files and you'd like to
| | 00:28 | be all caught up with me is to go to
the Exercise Files and open up UserConfE
| | 00:33 | and then come to slide number 3,
because you will notice down at the bottom in
| | 00:37 | my list of venues, I have a word with
a red dotted underline. That's part of
| | 00:43 | the Spell Checking functionality
kicking in here automatically. It's a feature
| | 00:47 | that checks spelling on the go
and here's where you turn it on.
| | 00:51 | From the Edit menu, come down to
Spelling and by default you will see a
| | 00:56 | checkmark next to Check Spelling as You
Type. So words that are not recognized
| | 01:01 | in the dictionary will appear with this
red dotted underline. So let's stick to
| | 01:05 | that one first and then we'll come
back to the other two options we see here
| | 01:09 | under Spelling.
| | 01:10 | I will click outside of the menu to
deselect it and now I need to get inside my
| | 01:14 | bulleted list so I'm going to double-
click down here. Not only does it get me
| | 01:18 | inside my list but it also highlights
the word that's not in the dictionary, in
| | 01:22 | this case deLaurier.
| | 01:23 | So if I right-click, and if you have
got a single-button mouse you can hold
| | 01:27 | down Ctrl and click, you will see in
the popup menu, we do have the Spelling
| | 01:31 | feature here, but up near the top you
will notice that No Guesses Found, so the
| | 01:37 | dictionary is having trouble guessing
what should be there. But we do have some
| | 01:40 | other spelling options down below that.
| | 01:43 | We can ignore this word, which means
it will just get skipped over in this
| | 01:47 | presentation but the next time it
shows up, it will show up with that red
| | 01:50 | dotted underline. So the other
option is to add it to the dictionary by
| | 01:55 | clicking Learn Spelling. Clicking this
option, which I'm going to do, adds it
| | 01:59 | to the dictionary and notice that the
red dotted line disappears. It's now part
| | 02:03 | of the dictionary and it's never
going to be included as a spelling error.
| | 02:07 | I am going to deselect my bulleted list
by clicking outside the border here and
| | 02:11 | now we are going to go to slide
number 2. You can see we've got a couple of
| | 02:16 | occurrences here where we have got
that red dotted underline and if I go to
| | 02:19 | slide 1, there is nothing really here.
| | 02:22 | It doesn't matter where you are in your
presentation when you launch the Spell
| | 02:25 | Checking functionality from the Edit
menu but that's what we are going to do
| | 02:29 | right now, click on Edit
and come down to Spelling.
| | 02:31 | I am just going to tell you what Check
Spelling does. It goes to the first word
| | 02:35 | it doesn't recognize in the dictionary
in your presentation here and highlights
| | 02:40 | it for you so you can perform actions
on it like we just did with the word
| | 02:44 | deLaurier. However, if you click on
Spelling that has the three dots after it,
| | 02:48 | you will open up the dialog
box and I prefer this method.
| | 02:51 | Right away it goes to the first word,
it doesn't recognize in the dictionary
| | 02:55 | which is actually on slide 2 here, the
word 'experience' you can see is spelled
| | 02:59 | incorrectly and in the Guess column
there is only one option to choose from. So
| | 03:03 | if we want, when we go over to the
right hand side and choose Correct, the
| | 03:08 | incorrect spelling in our presentation
will be replaced with what's selected
| | 03:12 | here in the Guess column, the
word 'experience' spell correctly.
| | 03:15 | But before we click on Correct, notice
we can also choose to ignore that word,
| | 03:19 | so it's going to skip over and move
onto the next. We can find the next, which
| | 03:23 | is very similar. It's not going to do
anything with the word 'experience' and
| | 03:26 | just move to the next spelling error.
Correct we talked about and then down
| | 03:31 | below here is our dictionary where
we can choose to forget this word or
| | 03:35 | actually learn this word,
which adds it to the dictionary.
| | 03:38 | So we are going to correct this one.
Clicking the Correct button does correct
| | 03:41 | it down here in my slide. And you can
see automatically the spell checker has
| | 03:46 | moved on to the next word and
highlighted it. It's the word 'Accommodation',
| | 03:49 | here is a typical error where it
looks like one of the m's was missing.
| | 03:55 | So in this case again we would also
hit Correct. Now doing that, you can see
| | 03:59 | what's happened here. It's moved to the
next word 'Center' and you can see the
| | 04:03 | way 'Center' is spelled here. Check
out the dictionary that's being used,
| | 04:07 | Canadian English. So in this case 'Center'
should be spelled with an 're' on the end.
| | 04:12 | But if I change dictionaries and I go
to the English Dictionary, and I click on
| | 04:19 | Find Next, you will notice there
aren't any. It goes to Center, stays
| | 04:25 | highlighted but you will notice in the
Guess column there are no options here.
| | 04:29 | So in this case, I might want to learn
this word or just click on Forget and
| | 04:34 | close up my Spell Checker.
| | 04:36 | Now when I click outside of my
bulleted list, you can see that red dotted
| | 04:40 | underline disappears because I'm now
using the regular English Dictionary.
| | 04:45 | It's not specific to Canadian English.
| | 04:47 | So that's the Spell Checking
functionality. As you begin to build your
| | 04:51 | presentations adding more and more
text, whenever you see that red dotted
| | 04:54 | underline, remember, that's the
dictionary kicking in finding words that are
| | 04:59 | not recognized in the dictionary. From
the Edit menu, you can choose to run the
| | 05:03 | Spelling dialog and move through the
entire presentation from start to finish,
| | 05:07 | fixing errors before you
save your final presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Find and Replace| 00:00 | We are going to take a look at the Find
& Replace feature now that's built into
| | 00:04 | Keynote. And by the way, it's very
similar to any Find & Replace feature
| | 00:07 | you may have used in other applications
like a word processor, for example.
| | 00:11 | Think about a slide presentation that maybe
has 100 slides in it and you have got a
| | 00:15 | certain word or phrase or even a
group of characters that are scattered
| | 00:19 | throughout the presentation and they
need to be changed to something else.
| | 00:22 | Well, going through each slide manually,
looking for the text and replacing it
| | 00:27 | manually with something else could
take a very, very long time. And you might
| | 00:32 | not be totally accurate. You could
skip something and miss it by accident.
| | 00:35 | Using Find & Replace, that won't
happen and you will save yourself a ton of
| | 00:39 | time because the Find & Replace
feature takes your commands, what you are
| | 00:43 | looking for, what you are replacing it
with and takes seconds to accomplish a
| | 00:46 | task. So let's take a look at it now.
| | 00:48 | If you have got Exercise Files, you
will need to open up UserConfF to be all
| | 00:53 | caught up with me and have the exact
same slides with the exact same text. So
| | 00:57 | first thing we are going to do is go up
to the Edit menu here and come down to
| | 01:00 | Find. You will notice, we have Find or
Command+F to launch the Find dialog box.
| | 01:07 | We have also got Find Next and
Previous and Jump to Selection, once we get
| | 01:10 | going and we have actually got
highlighted words or phrases or groups of
| | 01:15 | characters in our slide presentation.
| | 01:17 | So we're am going to click on Find
right here, Command+F on the keyboard will
| | 01:20 | give you the exact same thing, which
is our Find & Replace dialog box. Now
| | 01:24 | right away, you can see that we have
got two options at the top: a Simple Find
| | 01:28 | & Replace and then we have got some
Advanced options as well. We are going to
| | 01:31 | start with Simple and
that's selected, by default.
| | 01:33 | Then we have got a couple of fields,
the Find and the Replace fields. Here is
| | 01:37 | where we type in what it is we are
looking for and here is where we enter the
| | 01:40 | text that is going to replace what we
are looking for. Notice that I have got
| | 01:45 | some text in here from a previous Find
& Replace. Down below then I have got
| | 01:49 | some buttons with a various number of
options to replace what I'm looking for.
| | 01:54 | Replace every occurrence is the Replace
All button. Replace is going to replace
| | 01:59 | one single occurrence when it finds
it. Replace & Find will replace that
| | 02:03 | occurrence and then move on to the next
one and then I have got buttons to move
| | 02:07 | to the Next and Previous
locations of that group of text.
| | 02:11 | So let's try this out. We are going to
actually use these two pieces of text,
| | 02:15 | user in the Find field and customer.
So the scenario is we are changing the
| | 02:19 | name of our user conference to our
customer conference and we want to find
| | 02:23 | every occurrence of the word user
and possibly change it to customer.
| | 02:27 | Let's think about this for a second.
Would we click the Replace All button?
| | 02:31 | Well, keep in mind that wherever the
word user appears, customer will replace
| | 02:35 | it, even if user is used in a different
context by itself or if it's plural, it
| | 02:41 | will be replace with customer and
the s will stay put. So we've got to be
| | 02:45 | careful about using Replace All.
| | 02:47 | In this case, we probably just want to
move to the first occurrence of the word
| | 02:51 | user and we'll do that by clicking the
Next button. So right here because
| | 02:54 | I'm on slide 2 in my presentation, you
can see the word user is found in this
| | 02:59 | context, "practical and motivational
user conference". Okay, that does need to
| | 03:04 | be changed to customer. So we are
going to choose Replace or Replace & Find.
| | 03:08 | Replace is just simply going to replace
it and stop right there, but Replace &
| | 03:12 | Find will replace it and then search
for the next occurrence of the word user.
| | 03:16 | So I'm going to click Replace & Find.
See the replacement, it does appear down
| | 03:20 | here in my first paragraph and over
here on the other side, you can see
| | 03:23 | "networking opportunities
for users were incredible!"
| | 03:26 | So this is an occurrence that I do not
want to replace, so I'm going to choose
| | 03:31 | to go to the next one. This takes me
back to slide 1 now. You can see how it's
| | 03:35 | looped around, by default, User
Conference, yeah we are going to be changing
| | 03:38 | that to a Customer Conference. I want
you to notice something that's going to
| | 03:42 | happen here automatically.
| | 03:43 | The word User in User Conference, the
title has a capital U but I have typed it
| | 03:48 | here with no caps and the
replacement has no caps as well, but watch what
| | 03:53 | happens when I choose Replace. I need
to move this out of the way because it's
| | 03:57 | now on two lines, the word customer is
longer than user but it gets a capital,
| | 04:01 | by default. So it's smart enough to
know that if the word user had a capital,
| | 04:06 | the word customer is going to get one too.
| | 04:09 | Now we can move on to the next one and
there it is again, users as we saw it
| | 04:14 | earlier. So we have looped around
which means we are done. We can close this up.
| | 04:19 | Now before we click the Close button,
let's take a look at the Advanced options here.
| | 04:24 | Notice that Find user is searching
through the entire document, but if I want
| | 04:28 | to look through my notes, for example,
clicking this dropdown allows me to
| | 04:32 | choose Notes. We talked about how
you can add notes to your presentation,
| | 04:36 | Speaker notes. Well you can use Find &
Replace in them as well. We'll leave it
| | 04:40 | at Entire Document.
| | 04:42 | If we wanted to be specific with the
case, we could use capitals and lowercase
| | 04:47 | if we wanted to and then choose to
match the case so that it would only find
| | 04:51 | the word user with no caps in this case
or if I change this to a capital U,
| | 04:56 | it would only find the occurrence of
user with a capital U. Deselecting this
| | 05:00 | checkbox makes it so that
it's irrelevant of case.
| | 05:04 | Whole words is another option, if you
are searching for words that could be
| | 05:07 | part of another word, then you want to
make sure that if you are searching for
| | 05:12 | a single word to choose whole words.
That way, user, if it shows up in a part
| | 05:17 | of another word, for example, or users,
where it's plural, our Whole words will
| | 05:23 | only find the word user by itself.
And then of course, a replacement field
| | 05:27 | would be replace with whatever we type in here.
| | 05:30 | Notice that, by default, Repeat search
or the loop is turned on and we saw that
| | 05:34 | happen when we went from slide 2, all
the way back around to slide 1 to make
| | 05:38 | that change. With this deselected,
it will search from your current slide
| | 05:42 | towards the end and stop. So I would
like to leave that on so I don't miss any
| | 05:47 | slides by accident.
| | 05:48 | When you are done with the Find & Replace,
just click the Close button in the top-right corner,
| | 05:52 | deselect your text if it's highlighted
and you are done using Find & Replace.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Hyperlink preferences| 00:01 | In this lesson, we are going to
explore using hyperlinks in a slide
| | 00:04 | presentation here in Keynote. When
you create hyperlinks using text or
| | 00:08 | graphics, you are able to create links
to other slides in your presentation,
| | 00:13 | to web pages, even to email addresses,
and we are going to look at that in this lesson.
| | 00:18 | The first thing you will need to do if
you have got exercise files and you want
| | 00:21 | to follow along is go to the Exercise
Files and open up UserConfG, that will
| | 00:26 | give you the same slide
presentation I have here.
| | 00:29 | Next, we'll go to slide number 3
where we have got our Venues, and you will
| | 00:34 | notice in the bottom right hand corner
I have added this little icon titled Home.
| | 00:37 | We are going to create some hyperlinks.
We can do that using existing text, new text,
| | 00:42 | or even graphics like this little
icon at the bottom. We are going to try
| | 00:46 | each of those scenarios and we are
going to start with our Venues here.
| | 00:49 | Let's just say that during this
presentation if we want our users,
| | 00:53 | people viewing this presentation to be
able to check out these venues by going to
| | 00:57 | their websites, we can create
hyperlinks out of this existing text.
| | 01:01 | So for example, the Hilton here, I'm
going to double-click on, which highlights
| | 01:05 | the Hilton. Now I'm going to go up
to my Inspector and ensure that the
| | 01:09 | Hyperlink Inspector is selected here
near the end. With the text already
| | 01:13 | highlighted, all I have to do is
click the checkbox to enable it as a hyperlink.
| | 01:18 | Now I have got some options. What do I
want to link to? Do I want to link to
| | 01:22 | other slides in my presentation, like
the next or previous slide, first and
| | 01:26 | last, the last one viewed, or a
specific slide by entering the number here,
| | 01:31 | next to this slide icon? Well, in this
case I actually want to go to a website.
| | 01:36 | So clicking the Link To dropdown here
shows other options, including webpage,
| | 01:41 | another Keynote presentation, an email
message, or I can even create a link to
| | 01:46 | exit the slideshow.
| | 01:48 | But in this case I do want webpage, so
I'm going to select Webpage, which gives
| | 01:51 | me two other fields. Here I can enter
the URL and I'm actually just going to
| | 01:56 | take out part of what's there by
default. In my case, it's lynda.com; you may
| | 02:00 | have something else there or nothing.
But I'm going to type in www.hilton.com,
| | 02:07 | and that would take me to the Hilton website.
| | 02:10 | But I might want to take this a step
further. In this particular case, the
| | 02:13 | venue is not just any Hilton Hotel.
It's the one in our area. So I want to go
| | 02:18 | to that specific website, copy the
address out of the address field, which I
| | 02:22 | have already done and then
come in here and paste it.
| | 02:25 | So I'm going to highlight what's there,
so I can paste right over it. Holding
| | 02:29 | down Command and the letter V enters
that pasted website. So you can see now as
| | 02:34 | I scroll across, there is no way I
could have remembered to type in this entire
| | 02:38 | address to the specific hotel from
the Hilton website. But by copying and
| | 02:43 | pasting it, I'm able to have this
huge long address, but what displays is
| | 02:48 | what's in the Display
field here, one word, Hilton.
| | 02:51 | Well, I might want to add to that. I'm
going to make it more specific: Hilton
| | 02:55 | Lac Leamy. Now when I close my
Hyperlink Inspector, you can see that it updates
| | 03:01 | the text on my list, and this is a
hyperlink. I can see that as I hover over
| | 03:05 | it, the entire address appears across my screen.
| | 03:08 | Also, you will notice that there is an
underline for hyperlinks, and it's got
| | 03:12 | this blue border around the outside. Now,
when I deselect this list by clicking
| | 03:16 | out here on my slide, I lose the blue
shading in the border, but the underline
| | 03:21 | stays. That's how I know it's a
hyperlink. When I play this slideshow, we can
| | 03:25 | test it out.
| | 03:26 | So let's go up to Play, I'll give it
a click. When I come down to my slide,
| | 03:30 | notice that I do have a mouse pointer.
This is one of those preferences we can
| | 03:34 | setup, so that when we display slides
that have hyperlinks in them, the mouse
| | 03:38 | pointer appears so that we can
actually click those hyperlinks. So clicking
| | 03:43 | Hilton Lac Leamy should take me to
that website using my default browser, and
| | 03:47 | sure enough, there it is.
| | 03:48 | So I'm going to close up by browser.
I'm going to go back to Keynote now, and
| | 03:55 | I'm going to press Escape
to go back to Navigator mode.
| | 03:59 | All right, let's try some more. How
about entering text manually. I'm going to
| | 04:04 | go down here to this last item and I'm
going to highlight the whole thing and
| | 04:08 | typewrite over it, www.lynda.com. Now,
if I hit Tab or Enter, I'm going to be
| | 04:15 | starting a new bullet or whatever, but
to lock this in, I'm just going to hit
| | 04:19 | Enter, and I'll see it there, I have
actually started a new bullet that you
| | 04:22 | can't see at the bottom, so when I
hit Backspace, that will take it out.
| | 04:27 | So there is a link automatically
created for me, another one of those
| | 04:30 | preferences. Keynote recognizes this as
a web address. So that means if I go up
| | 04:35 | to my Inspector here, it's already
there as a Webpage. There is the URL and the
| | 04:41 | Display. So we can change the
Display but leave the actual URL as is.
| | 04:46 | I am going to come in here and type in
lynda.com website. Just like so. Then I
| | 04:54 | close my Hyperlink Inspector and I
play my presentation to test this out,
| | 04:59 | clicking this link should take me
directly to lynda.com in my default browser,
| | 05:04 | and sure enough here we are.
| | 05:05 | All right. Once again, I'm going to
Quit Safari and return to Keynote, and I'll
| | 05:12 | press Escape to exit out
of Presentation mode here.
| | 05:16 | The next thing I'm going to do is use a
graphic. So I have got this little icon
| | 05:19 | at the bottom and we'll create this
later on in another movie. I'm going to
| | 05:23 | click on it now and go back to my
Inspector. Once again, I can enable this as a
| | 05:28 | hyperlink just like I did for text. I'm
clicking the checkbox, and in this case
| | 05:32 | I actually want people who click on
this icon to go back to the very first
| | 05:36 | slide in the presentation. So I'm
going to choose the first slide right here.
| | 05:41 | Notice also the icons change slightly
now. I have got this little blue circle
| | 05:44 | with the white arrow in it, indicating
it's a hyperlink. So when I close up my
| | 05:49 | Hyperlink Inspector and play my
presentation, let's see what happens when I
| | 05:54 | click on my Home button. There we
go, right back to slide number 1.
| | 05:59 | Notice I can't see my mouse, but I can
click to move to slides, and as I get
| | 06:04 | through the last one here, my Home
button appears and I have got my mouse
| | 06:08 | pointer back. All right. Pressing
Escape gets me out, and back to my slide
| | 06:14 | presentation.
| | 06:15 | The last thing I want to show you is
an email address hyperlink. So in this
| | 06:20 | case I'm going to add a new slide, and
by default it becomes a new title with
| | 06:25 | bulleted list slide, and you can see
that that's the previous layout, so you
| | 06:30 | use the previous master to create this new one.
| | 06:32 | I am going to double-click up here
in the title and I'm going to type in
| | 06:37 | Contact Us, just like that. Now, you
might want to have several email addresses
| | 06:42 | or websites and so on, but just to
show you how an email address works,
| | 06:46 | I'm oing to double-click here for this
first bullet and I'm going to type in my own,
| | 06:50 | just like that.
| | 06:56 | Now, when I click out here, you will
notice it becomes a hyperlink by default.
| | 07:01 | If I click on it again, double-
clicking to highlight part of it at least, go
| | 07:05 | into the Inspector, you can see it's
an Email Message, there is who its going
| | 07:08 | to, and if I wanted to I could even put
in the subject here, Subject, just like so.
| | 07:21 | I am going to close that up, and
watch what happens when we test this out.
| | 07:26 | Anyone viewing this presentation when
clicking this link will automatically
| | 07:29 | launch their default mail program.
Here you can see that it's going to go to
| | 07:34 | drivers@lynda.com, and look at that,
the subject is already in there. All I
| | 07:39 | need to do is enter my question, my
comment, etcetera, and click Send to send
| | 07:45 | it off. I'm going to close that up and
close my Mail application, go back to
| | 07:51 | Keynote, and press Escape.
| | 07:55 | So let's just check out some of the
preferences that we have been seeing in
| | 07:58 | action here. I'm going to go up to
Keynote and click on Preferences. I'm going
| | 08:02 | to start right here with Slideshow.
Notice down below it says Show pointer only
| | 08:08 | on slides with hyperlinks or
movies. That's selected there for me.
| | 08:12 | If I choose the next radio button, it
will show the pointer whenever I move the
| | 08:16 | mouse, but it will always show up where
there is hyperlinks as well. I'm going
| | 08:20 | to leave it selected as is.
| | 08:23 | The other option is Auto-Correction.
I'm going to click right here on
| | 08:26 | Auto-Correction at the top, and notice
here that Keynote is automatically going
| | 08:30 | to detect email and web addresses.
So when I type in a web address, like
| | 08:35 | www.lynda.com, it automatically became
a hyperlink, same thing for that email address.
| | 08:42 | So if you have those turned on, you
will be able to create those hyperlinks
| | 08:45 | quickly and easily. I'm going to close
up my Preferences and that covers hyperlinks.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Working with Multimedia ElementsInserting shapes| 00:01 | At some point if you feel like you
need to add some fun and excitement to a
| | 00:05 | presentation or maybe add emphasis to
something that's on a slide in one of
| | 00:09 | your presentations in Keynote, there
are a number of shapes at your disposal
| | 00:12 | that we are going to look at in this lesson.
| | 00:14 | So if you following along and you have
got the exercise files, you will want to
| | 00:17 | open up this one called MultimediaA
from your exercise files. Then with me
| | 00:22 | we'll click on slide number 2.
| | 00:24 | Now, there are a number of different
shapes we can add to a presentation.
| | 00:28 | There are lines, geometric shapes
and then we can draw our own as well.
| | 00:32 | So we're going to start
by looking at lines here.
| | 00:34 | From the Shapes button here on the
toolbar, you will notice the top three icons
| | 00:38 | represent a line, a line with an arrow
at one end, and a line with an arrow at
| | 00:43 | both ends. So we are going
to start with our simple line.
| | 00:46 | Clicking on this actually draws the
line using the default style and appearance
| | 00:51 | according to the theme I have chosen,
and in this case you can see that it's a
| | 00:55 | white dotted line. But we can change that.
| | 00:57 | The first thing I'm going to do is just
anywhere on the line, click and drag to
| | 01:00 | move it over here to the left. Notice
the handles at each end. Those are the
| | 01:04 | starting and end points. I can click
and drag those when I see the double arrow
| | 01:08 | appear, as well as change the angle.
Once I have got what I like, I let go, and
| | 01:14 | there is my new line.
| | 01:16 | Now, to change the appearance, for
example, the stroke width or the color,
| | 01:20 | I need to go up to my Inspector. Clicking
on the Inspector icon and then choosing
| | 01:24 | Graphic Inspector right here allows me
to adjust the stroke. Notice there is no
| | 01:29 | Fill options in this case, because
it's just a stroke, it's just a line.
| | 01:33 | So down below you can see the Stroke
is set to Line, and if I click this,
| | 01:37 | I have also got Picture Frame if I wanted
to, but we are drawing lines here.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to leave it at Line. None, it
would just be invisible, so make sure Line
| | 01:46 | is selected.
| | 01:47 | Now, we are going to choose the styling.
You can see there is my dotted line,
| | 01:49 | but if I wanted a solid line, I could
choose that, or bigger dots. I'm going to
| | 01:54 | go to the solid line. You can see that
happens right away. There is my white
| | 01:58 | line, its now solid.
| | 01:59 | But I can change the color, and I
need to have it selected, by going to the
| | 02:04 | Color well here, I can choose various
ways to select the color that I want. So
| | 02:09 | if I wanted something like maybe a
dark blue here, see what that looks like.
| | 02:14 | Let's go a little bit greener. There,
that kind of goes with our theme.
| | 02:18 | Now, I might want to make that thicker
too, and you can see right now 3 pixels
| | 02:23 | is the default size for this particular
line. As I click the up arrow, it gets
| | 02:27 | a little bit thicker with every click.
Clicking the down arrow will thin it out.
| | 02:33 | There, that's good there.
| | 02:35 | Notice that I also have the
option to change the Endpoints. This is
| | 02:38 | interesting, because we saw from the
Shapes button here on the menu that we can
| | 02:42 | go to an arrow at one end or arrows at
both ends, or we can also do that here
| | 02:47 | by changing the endpoints. There is
the arrow for one point and there is the
| | 02:52 | arrow for the other. So this just for
convenience up here that you have these
| | 02:56 | other two options, because you can
create them right here from your Graphic
| | 03:00 | Inspector. I'm going to change the
Endpoint here to something different.
| | 03:05 | There we go.
| | 03:05 | I also have the ability to add a
Shadow. So I'll make it come off the page,
| | 03:09 | change the color of the shadow if I
wanted to. I'm going to make it a little
| | 03:13 | bit darker. Then once I have got my
color selected, I can close that up and
| | 03:18 | change the Angle, the Offset. I can Blur
it or take off the Blur, change the Opacity.
| | 03:27 | Then the Opacity slider you see down at
the bottom here is for the actual line
| | 03:31 | itself, not the shadow. So if I want
the line to kind of become see through,
| | 03:36 | I can slide the Opacity slider to the
left. You could see it almost disappears
| | 03:39 | there and then the further to the right
I go, the more opaque it becomes. Once
| | 03:44 | I have made all of my adjustments, I
can just simply close up the Graphic
| | 03:49 | Inspector, and there is my line.
| | 03:51 | So of course, if I wanted a quick and
easy way to draw an arrow, I have got
| | 03:55 | that here, as well as the double arrow.
You can see both of those are drawn
| | 04:00 | right here in the center of my slide,
but I can move them around, and again,
| | 04:04 | they are going to use those
default settings for this theme.
| | 04:07 | All right. Let's move on to slide
number 3 now. Here we are going to talk about
| | 04:11 | geometric shapes. If I click the Shapes
button here, you will notice that after
| | 04:15 | the three lines, I have got a number of
shapes. You would probably consider all
| | 04:20 | of these to be what we call geometric
shapes. These are pre-drawn shapes. The
| | 04:24 | very last option at the bottom is
where we draw our own free form shape.
| | 04:29 | So I'm going to go to maybe
the star here for example.
| | 04:32 | When I choose the star, you can see
its a little bit see through and I can
| | 04:35 | adjust the points. It shows up by
default here as a five-pointed star. Well, if
| | 04:41 | I want more points, I can slide this to
the right until I get what I'm looking
| | 04:45 | for, or less, I would go to the left.
I'm going to go up to 8, just like that.
| | 04:52 | Next, I'm going to move this over. Size
it using the sizing handles. Make it a
| | 04:57 | little bigger. Now, you notice I can
stretch it and distort it, but if I hold
| | 05:03 | down the Shift key, it's going to keep
its proportions. So hold down Shift as
| | 05:07 | you click and drag to keep those
proportions. Good. Just like that.
| | 05:11 | Now, if I want to make some additional
changes, like to the color and so on,
| | 05:14 | like we did for lines, I go back to
my Inspector. You can see now that I do
| | 05:19 | have the ability to change the Fill
for this one. So right now Image Fill is
| | 05:24 | selected. I can put any image there.
But if I wanted to go to No Fill, it kind
| | 05:29 | of just disappears. You can see the
outline just barely. If I want to change
| | 05:34 | that to a Color, I can then go and
choose my color from the Color well.
| | 05:43 | Next, we have got Gradient, so now I
can choose from two colors. Once I have
| | 05:53 | got my colors, I can close up the
Colors palette, adjust the angle if I want of
| | 05:57 | that Gradient.
| | 05:58 | Notice that for this particular shape
the Stroke is set to None, so there is no
| | 06:03 | actual outline. If I click on Line, you
are going to see the default black line
| | 06:07 | show up and again, I can adjust the
color, the thickness of that line. I can't
| | 06:14 | change the Endpoints because there are
no Endpoints. It just keeps going around
| | 06:19 | and around, this star. I can give it a
Shadow if I want, adjust the Angle, the
| | 06:24 | Color, the Offset, etcetera. There is
my Opacity slider for this shape as well.
| | 06:29 | So I'm going to leave it right like that.
| | 06:31 | All right. When I click off of it, you
see the end result. I'm going to close
| | 06:37 | up my Graphic Inspector.
| | 06:39 | Let's try another shape. I'm going to
come down here and just try a simple
| | 06:43 | circle. Now, a simple circle is drawn
for me and it is a perfect circle, but of
| | 06:48 | course if I go to any of these sizing
handles, I can turn it into an oval.
| | 06:53 | Again, holding down Shift
will keep it a perfect circle.
| | 06:57 | Then of course I have got all of those
options I saw for my Graphic Inspector
| | 07:01 | for this circle. Make a few changes.
Put in the Stroke as well. Change the
| | 07:15 | Color of that until we get exactly
what we want. I'm going to close up the
| | 07:21 | Inspector. There we go. That looks
good. So there are a couple of shapes.
| | 07:25 | Let's try one more on this page. I'm
going to go to this guy down here, little
| | 07:29 | balloon. So if you have got an image,
for example, a picture or a photograph of
| | 07:34 | someone on one of your slides and you
want to make it like they are talking,
| | 07:37 | you might want to use one of these balloons.
| | 07:39 | Now, we are going to be working with
shapes in great detail later on as we get
| | 07:43 | a little bit deeper, like flipping
this around for example, but for now we'll
| | 07:47 | just size it. We'll make some changes.
I'm going to change the Fill to None.
| | 07:53 | But I do want a Stroke there. I'm
going to use Line. Black is good. Just like
| | 07:57 | that. I'm going to close this up and
just show you that with any shape, just
| | 08:02 | like a text box, you can double
click in it and just start typing.
| | 08:05 | Now, because I had no Fill, I had to
go to the border to double click on it,
| | 08:13 | but with a Fill, you just click double
click anywhere inside the balloon. So
| | 08:16 | clicking out here will save that
change. Of course, with my text in here,
| | 08:21 | double clicking again, I can highlight
the text and go up to my Inspector and
| | 08:26 | make changes to the text using the
Text Inspector. If I don't like the color,
| | 08:30 | for example, I can change it here.
| | 08:37 | So there we go. Those are geometric
shapes. Let's move on to slide number 4
| | 08:41 | here now, where we have got the
ability to draw our own shapes, free form
| | 08:46 | shapes. So I'm going to go back to my
Shapes button here on the toolbar, come
| | 08:49 | all the way down to the bottom, and
click on this. This is just like using the
| | 08:53 | Pen tool. You can see my mouse pointer
has turned into a pen. So I can click
| | 08:58 | and let go and just click various
points and you are going to see my shape get
| | 09:03 | drawn with each and every click.
| | 09:08 | Now, automatically because I'm just
clicking on points, I need to come back to
| | 09:12 | the original one. When I do, to close
off the shape, you will see an additional
| | 09:16 | little circle appear next to my pointer.
That means I'm at the first click, and
| | 09:20 | clicking there will actually
close it off and complete my shape.
| | 09:24 | So you can see it's using the default
colors. In this case there is no Stroke
| | 09:28 | or border around my shape, but I can
make changes to that, just like I did the
| | 09:32 | others, going back to my Inspector. I'm
going to change the Fill color here to
| | 09:36 | a light gray. There we go.
| | 09:42 | The other thing I'm going to do is go
back to my Graphic Inspector and change
| | 09:47 | that color. So any text going in there
is going to be gray. But if I want to
| | 09:51 | change the Fill, I can come in here
and change the Fill for the particular
| | 09:56 | object by choosing Color Fill.
There we go. Now we have got gray.
| | 10:02 | I am going to change the Stroke to
Line. I'm going to make it a very faint
| | 10:13 | gray. There, that will
be easier to see the text.
| | 10:16 | For the line itself, let's change
its color as well to something less
| | 10:20 | conspicuous. That looks good like that.
If we wanted to, we could add a Shadow.
| | 10:27 | So clicking Shadow here, I'm going to
change the Angle slightly this way. Lower
| | 10:34 | the Offset, so it's not so obvious.
Blur it a little more to make it look more
| | 10:38 | natural. That looks good just like that.
| | 10:40 | All right. So that was just clicking
point to point. Now we can also click and
| | 10:46 | drag to create curved lines. So if I
go back here to my Pen tool and then I
| | 10:53 | click and drag, what you are going to
see is something like a Bezier tool. So I
| | 11:02 | have got those little dots, and I can
adjust the Angle. It's kind of hard to
| | 11:08 | see, it takes a little bit of practice.
There is the closed shape there. I can
| | 11:12 | size that up. You can see that by
clicking on it again, I get those red dots
| | 11:18 | back so I can make adjustments. There
we go. I'm going to click on that gain
| | 11:28 | and hit Delete.
| | 11:29 | We can also take shapes that we have
already drawn and turn them into curves too.
| | 11:32 | I'm going to go up to my Format
here, and go to Shape from the Format
| | 11:37 | menu, and choose Smooth Path. You can
see what happens automatically, it's all
| | 11:42 | smoothed out here.
| | 11:44 | I am going to click again on the
selected shape, and I get those red dots so I
| | 11:49 | can make adjustments. You can see I
have got my Bezier here, so I can adjust
| | 11:56 | the Angle. Sometimes it's easier
actually to draw the shape ahead of time and
| | 12:01 | then make these kinds of changes after.
Drag that closer, click again to get my
| | 12:09 | red dots back. Just like that.
Starting to look familiar.
| | 12:34 | You can see how we can continue to
work with this, adjusting the Angles, the
| | 12:37 | Size, and eventually get something
that looks like what we have got here,
| | 12:41 | created in our theme at the top for
our titles. Now, that's a different color
| | 12:46 | and border, etcetera, but of course we
could go in and create the exact same
| | 12:50 | thing you see up here. Nice of Keynote
to create themes for us so we don't have
| | 12:55 | to do this all by hand.
| | 12:56 | All right. To remove an object at any
time, just click on it. When you see the
| | 13:01 | handles, hit Delete on
your keyboard and it's gone.
| | 13:04 | All right. So that covers working with
shapes. We are going to go a lot deeper
| | 13:08 | into working with various kinds of
multimedia, including in the next lesson,
| | 13:13 | where we work with multiple shapes on a slide.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Stacking order| 00:01 | In the previous lesson we learned how
to work with shapes on a slide in one of
| | 00:05 | our presentations. Now we are going
to take it a step further and work with
| | 00:08 | multiple shapes in a presentation and
I'm going to show you some tricks for
| | 00:12 | making things line up, stack in a
proper order, and what we are going to do is
| | 00:16 | actually try to mimic what you see
here on my fourth slide this little STAR
| | 00:20 | logo on the right-hand side. So if
you are following along and you have got
| | 00:24 | Exercise Files, you want to open up
MultimediaB here to have exactly what
| | 00:28 | I have here on Slide 4. So you
can go ahead and go to Slide 4.
| | 00:31 | Now when I click on this image, you can
see it does show up with a border, but
| | 00:36 | I can't move it, I can't double-click
it to make changes to it, it's locked.
| | 00:41 | So that's one of the things we are going
to do, once we've created our logo we are
| | 00:44 | going to lock it, just like you see
here. So let's try to mimic what we see
| | 00:48 | here by starting with the text. I'm
going up to my Text tool and double-click
| | 00:53 | in here where it says Text and
type-in STAR all in capitals.
| | 00:57 | Now the next thing I'll need to do is
change the font it looks like, the color,
| | 01:03 | there might be an appearance here to
as well so I'm going to click on my
| | 01:05 | text-box and go up to the Inspector.
The first thing I'll do is click on the
| | 01:10 | Text Inspector. Here's where we get to
change the color. I'm going to change it
| | 01:14 | to black. That looks good. Close up my
Colors palette. And I think we are done
| | 01:20 | with the Inspector. Now we need to go
to our fonts, so I'm going to click my
| | 01:25 | double arrow here. You
may see your Fonts button.
| | 01:27 | This opens up our Fonts. I know this is
a fun one here, and as I scroll through
| | 01:32 | these clicking on them, you can see
the American Typewriter. That looks cool.
| | 01:37 | Oh Marker, looks like the one so I'm
going to click on Marker Felt, and the
| | 01:43 | Size needs to change as well. So I'm
going to use the slider here. Currently 28
| | 01:48 | is selected. As I go up, you can see
it gets a little bit bigger and a little
| | 01:53 | bit bigger. That looks like to be
about the right size right there, 41.
| | 01:59 | Excellent! Now I can't go over here and
click on the star to find out what size
| | 02:03 | it is. Remember it's locked so we are
kind of going by eye right now. We can
| | 02:06 | make adjustments later on if we need to.
| | 02:08 | Okay, I'm going to close up my Fonts
palette and the next thing it looks like
| | 02:13 | there is a reflection here and all
that is, is it's this object flipped and
| | 02:18 | duplicated. So what we are going to do
first with it selected, make sure it's
| | 02:22 | selected, we are going to go up to our
Arrange menu and we are going to flip it
| | 02:27 | vertically to see what happens. Yeah,
that's the effect we are looking for.
| | 02:32 | Going back to Arrange and choosing Flip
Vertically puts it back. So all we need
| | 02:37 | is a duplicate of this exactly before
we flip it. That means going to the Edit
| | 02:41 | menu and choosing Duplicate.
Command+D would do the same thing.
| | 02:46 | Now we need to align it up, but I'm
going to flip it before I align things up.
| | 02:50 | Let's go up to Arrange again and flip
this vertically. Flip it upside down just like that.
| | 02:56 | Great, all I have to do is make the
tips of it touched just like we have in our
| | 03:01 | logo and we have some adjusting to do to
this now as well. So back we go to our Inspector.
| | 03:07 | In this case I'm going to keep the
Color selected as black, but I'm going to
| | 03:11 | make some changes to it. Remember
everything we put on a slide is an object so
| | 03:14 | I'm going to go up here to my Graphic
Inspector, and the next thing I'm going
| | 03:18 | to do is create some Opacity. I'm going
to click and drag this over to the left
| | 03:24 | until I get that gray color I'm
looking for, and that might be right about
| | 03:29 | there. I'm going to go to 39% and
we'll see what that looks like in the end.
| | 03:33 | All right, I'm going to close this up,
and now I have got two pieces of text,
| | 03:37 | one is flipped upside down and grayed
out. To make these one object we can
| | 03:42 | group them together. There are a
couple of different ways to select all
| | 03:45 | objects. I can click on it, hold down
Shift and click on the other object, now
| | 03:49 | they are both selected. Or using the
Marquee, all I have to do is to make sure
| | 03:52 | that both of them get touched. See
there is one and when I touch the second it
| | 03:56 | gets selected as well.
| | 03:58 | With them both selected, I can go to
the Arrange menu and choose Group if I
| | 04:01 | want to, down here at the bottom. But
I can also choose Group right here from
| | 04:05 | my toolbar. That's the fastest way, so
I'm going to group them together and now
| | 04:09 | they are treated as one object.
That's nice, perfect! They will always stay
| | 04:13 | together then. Okay, the next thing we
need looks like a white star and a red
| | 04:16 | circle. So I'm going to draw my white
star and I go up to the Shapes, go down
| | 04:22 | to the star, give it a click, there is
my star. Now notice it's got 5 points by
| | 04:26 | default and it looks like, I need an
extra one here. So I'm going to slide this
| | 04:31 | to the right, just once. There is my 6-
sided star, and now I need to make some
| | 04:35 | changes to it as well. I'm going to
go up to the Inspector, make sure the
| | 04:38 | Graphic Inspector is selected. Change
it from Image Fill to a Color Fill and
| | 04:44 | change the color by clicking the Color
Well and I'm going to select White,
| | 04:49 | just like that.
| | 04:50 | There is no stroke. There is no border
around the outside of this. It doesn't
| | 04:53 | appear to be anyway so it looks like
I have got exactly what I need, I just
| | 04:56 | need to size it. So I'm going to
close up my Colors palette, close up my
| | 05:00 | Graphic Inspector. I'm going to move
this over and I'm going to Size it so it's
| | 05:06 | pretty much the same size as the star
I'm using for my logo. So I'm going to go
| | 05:11 | to the handles, I'm going to hold down
Shift to maintain its proportions. When
| | 05:15 | I get the right size, that looks like
it right there, I'll release and
| | 05:21 | I'm going to move it back just by
clicking and dragging it over here. Good!
| | 05:26 | Almost there, all we need is the red
circle. So I'm going to go up to Shapes
| | 05:30 | and down to the circle. Creates this
default circle for me, I'm going to move
| | 05:35 | it down here a little bit, and I'm
going to go up to my Inspector again, make
| | 05:38 | sure it's the Graphic Inspector. Change
it to a Color Fill and change the color
| | 05:44 | of course. We need red. I think this
might be the red over here. That looks
| | 05:48 | like it. So I'm going to close this up.
And close up my Graphic Inspector and
| | 05:55 | I'm going to hold down Shift again. I
need to keep this a perfect circle. So
| | 05:58 | holding down Shift as I drag
will create a larger circle.
| | 06:02 | So as I move this over, does it look
like it's about the same size? Pretty
| | 06:07 | close, close enough anyway. We can
resize this later. So all we have to do is
| | 06:11 | put the three together. So if I move
my star over here on top of my -- wait a
| | 06:15 | second, what's going on? How about my
text, I move it over. You see we have got
| | 06:19 | a problem. Whatever is created last is
on top by default. So here you can see
| | 06:24 | my star needs to come on top of the
red circle and it looks like my text here
| | 06:28 | is behind both of them. So I have got
some work to do, and I can do that from
| | 06:33 | the Arrange menu if I want, but I
have also got some options here on my
| | 06:36 | toolbar. You can see Front and Back.
| | 06:39 | Well, I know that the actual text
needs to be in the front so I'm going to
| | 06:43 | click Front with it selected. And I
know my circle needs to be in the back, so
| | 06:48 | I'm going to click the circle and
choose Back. Now it looks like we have got
| | 06:53 | the right stacking order. That's what
we call it. All we need to do is make
| | 06:57 | some adjustments in lining them up.
| | 06:58 | Now from the Arrange menu you will see
that you have also got Send to Back and
| | 07:04 | Send to Front or Bring to Front right
here. We have got Send Backward and Bring
| | 07:08 | Forward as well to go one step
through the stacking order at a time.
| | 07:12 | All right, right now though I'm going
to move my circle over here, I'm going to
| | 07:16 | move my star on top. Try and line it
up nicely. Looks pretty close, and
| | 07:21 | I'm going to take my text and I'm going
to move it inside the center just like
| | 07:25 | that. So looks like this can go a
little bit bigger. So I'm going to
| | 07:28 | click and drag it or holding down Shift,
so I don't lose the actual proportions
| | 07:33 | and then move it when I see my little
yellow lines, my guidelines show up.
| | 07:37 | That's good right there, and that looks
pretty good. It looks like we are able
| | 07:42 | to line things up. Not bad. Looks like
a little bit of space here between two
| | 07:46 | pieces of text. So in this case we
need to click on the text, we can't really
| | 07:50 | adjust the space between them without
ungrouping these two objects. We group
| | 07:54 | them earlier. Now we are going to go up
to Ungroup and we can do that from the
| | 07:59 | Arrange menu as well.
| | 08:00 | So now all I want is the bottom one
selected so I can move it upwards just like
| | 08:05 | that. I'm going to hold-down Shift,
click on the piece of text and group those
| | 08:10 | back together like so.
| | 08:13 | Clicking outside de-selects. Okay, so
looks pretty good. Now I would like to
| | 08:18 | make the whole thing a logo. So in
other words I want everything selected.
| | 08:22 | I'm going Marquee select the entire group
of objects and I'm going to group them
| | 08:27 | together. Clicking Group groups them
together. Looks like I need a bit of a
| | 08:32 | shadow now. So with this group together
I can go up to the Inspector, make sure
| | 08:36 | Graphic Inspector is selected, but
look at this. I don't get to choose a
| | 08:40 | Shadow. So again a little bit of
adjusting to do. We need to ungroup, click
| | 08:48 | just the circle. Here's where I'm going
to add my shadow, turn it on, I'm going
| | 08:55 | to leave that to particular selection
at black. But you can see I have got an
| | 09:00 | Opacity rating of 76, might want to
increase that slightly, to Blur, bring it
| | 09:07 | down just ever so slightly, the
Offset I'm going to pump it up on. Good!
| | 09:13 | Now back we go to group everything
together. So as long as everything is
| | 09:16 | touching my Marquee I can group them
together and it's one logo now that we'll
| | 09:22 | move around as a whole. Excellent!
| | 09:25 | To lock this now all we have to do is
select it, go to the Arrange menu and
| | 09:30 | click Lock. That's exactly where we go
by the way to unlock it when it's time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting photos| 00:01 | In this lesson, we are going to look
at a couple of different ways to bring
| | 00:03 | images into a slide in one of your
Keynote presentations and adding graphics,
| | 00:07 | photos, images and the like can
really add some visual interest to your
| | 00:12 | presentation. So if you have got the
Exercise Files and you are following along,
| | 00:17 | go there and open up ConferenceA.
You will notice this presentation has
| | 00:21 | four slides in it here in the
Navigation pane and if I click on slide number
| | 00:25 | four you can see we have got a title in
here, Entertainment, but nothing below.
| | 00:30 | So at our user conference, we are going
to have a band that's going to play and
| | 00:33 | we are going to insert some information
about them including a photo and like I said,
| | 00:37 | there is a couple of different
ways to do that. If you know where the
| | 00:40 | photo is, you can just open up the
location and drag it right here on to your
| | 00:43 | slide. Another method is to go via
iPhoto here from the Media center. So we are
| | 00:48 | going to look at both those methods.
| | 00:50 | So the first thing I'm going to do is
just kind of drag this window out of the
| | 00:53 | way so you can see that I have done
something here on my Desktop. I have copied
| | 00:57 | the Media Files folder that's part of
your Exercise Files right here to my
| | 01:00 | Desktop, so I have got easy access to it.
So I'm going to double-click to open
| | 01:04 | that up and in the Media Files, some of
these are photos. You can see there is
| | 01:09 | JPEGs, there is TIFs in here and you
can copy just about any kind of graphic
| | 01:14 | file, even PDFs and Photoshop
files, original Photoshop PSD files.
| | 01:20 | So I'm going to go in here and I'm
going to take this logo here, you can see
| | 01:24 | it's the jelly bricks logo and I'm
going to drag it right over here on to my
| | 01:28 | slide. You see the plus sign indicating
it's about to be copied when I release
| | 01:32 | the mouse, okay so there it is. I'm
going to close this up and move my window
| | 01:37 | back where I can see it and I'm
going to take this and just move it down
| | 01:40 | towards the bottom of the screen,
center it down there. I'm going to use that
| | 01:43 | guideline and actually, I'm going to
size this down so it's much smaller and
| | 01:50 | that's a good size right there,
we'll get it back to the middle, perfect.
| | 01:55 | All right, so that's one method,
another way is through iPhoto. So what I'm
| | 01:59 | going to do is actually copy those
files in the Media folder of the Exercise
| | 02:04 | Files into iPhoto. So I'm going to
come down here and open up iPhoto. Once I
| | 02:09 | have got that open, I move it slightly
out of the way, open up my Media Files
| | 02:14 | and I'm going to take this one right
here, the wall photo, actually the logo
| | 02:18 | can go in there too along with these live JPEGs.
| | 02:21 | So I'm going to hold down Shift+Click
to select all of these and I'm simply
| | 02:26 | going to drag them now into iPhoto
because once we are in iPhoto, I'll have
| | 02:31 | easy access to them from Keynote. So
I'm going to close both of these up,
| | 02:35 | I'm going to move this back over here
where we can see the full screen and to
| | 02:41 | insert the photo, I'm actually going
to go to my Media button here on the
| | 02:45 | toolbar. Notice Photos is selected for
me in Media, make sure you have selected
| | 02:49 | Photos and as I scroll down, I'm going
to see those images that I just copied
| | 02:55 | and there is the one that I want,
the wall photo. So all I have to do is
| | 02:58 | click and drag it on to the slide and
release. I'm going to close up Media and
| | 03:04 | show you that it comes in and it's
original size which is way too big, but I
| | 03:07 | have got the sizing handles, so I can
size it down, get the size I want, move
| | 03:13 | it into position and there we go.
| | 03:19 | Now, that's one way. If you are going
to be creating slides and you know you
| | 03:22 | are going to be using images, you may
want to create placeholders for those
| | 03:25 | images for later on. So I'm going to
click on my photo and I'm going to hit the
| | 03:29 | Delete key on the keyboard to remove it
and instead what I'm going to do is go
| | 03:33 | up to my Inspector button, make sure
the Slide Inspector is selected and
| | 03:38 | Appearance and I'm going to
choose to show the Object Placeholder.
| | 03:43 | So you can see that inserts it here on
to my slide. I'm going to close up the
| | 03:48 | Inspector. I'm going to move this into
position. I'm going to size it down as
| | 03:53 | well, move it to the spot where I'm
going to want a photo eventually and now I
| | 04:01 | would save my presentation and then
when it's time to put the photo in or if
| | 04:05 | the photo hasn't been taken let's say,
once I have got the photo, I can just
| | 04:08 | simply drag it into the placeholder.
And again I can do that, either dragging
| | 04:13 | from the actual location or I can go up
to my Media button here, go into Photos
| | 04:19 | and I'm going to move this out of the
way so you can see the placeholder. Watch
| | 04:21 | what happens when I click and drag it
into the placeholder, there is my plus
| | 04:25 | sign. When I release, you can see that
it's actually sized for me and it's in
| | 04:30 | the right spot. Thanks to that placeholder.
| | 04:33 | So I just saved a bit of work not
having to resize it and position it using the
| | 04:37 | placeholder. So like I said, using
images and graphics you can really add some
| | 04:43 | pizzazz to your slide presentation. If
you wanted to take it a step further,
| | 04:47 | you can take any of these images and
make some enhancements to them as well.
| | 04:51 | So what I'm going to do now is click
on my logo, drag it up to the top here,
| | 04:55 | I'm going to take this photo and move
it down and with the photo selected,
| | 04:59 | I'm going to go up to my Inspector. This
time I'm going to click on the Graphic
| | 05:04 | Inspector. Notice I'm not going to be
able to put any fill in here. It's an
| | 05:08 | actual photo. If I wanted to though,
I could put a border around it and
| | 05:12 | clicking the stroke, I could
choose to put a line around the outside.
| | 05:15 | Right now you can see, the line is a
solid line and it's black, so it's not
| | 05:19 | really showing up. I'm going to
change the color to white, there we go and
| | 05:23 | maybe make it a little thicker. That
looks good there. I'll close up my Colors
| | 05:28 | palette and if I wanted to, I could put
in a Shadow. Now the Shadow is black as
| | 05:33 | well. So if I changed it to a light
color, you can see how it shows up there on
| | 05:37 | my slide, don't really like that. So
I'm going to close it up, close up my
| | 05:41 | Colors palette as well.
| | 05:43 | I like this effect here, the
Reflection. As soon as I click the Reflection
| | 05:46 | checkbox, see what happens. It's
almost like it's on water and there is a bit
| | 05:50 | of reflection down below. I can also
adjust that Reflection's Opacity by
| | 05:55 | clicking and dragging the slider. So
I'm going to go right to about there,
| | 05:59 | I'm going to close up my Graphic Inspector,
click here to deselect and there is my
| | 06:07 | finish product. I like that.
| | 06:08 | So have some fun experimenting with
the various kinds of images you can bring
| | 06:12 | into a slide in your presentation and
then apply some of the cool effects like
| | 06:16 | we did just here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Instant Alpha| 00:01 | In some upcoming movies we are going to
be working with your images in a slide
| | 00:05 | in a Keynote presentation, adjusting
them, using some masking techniques to crop.
| | 00:11 | Before we get there, I just
thought I would show you one quick image
| | 00:15 | adjustment tool that's new to Keynote '08.
It's going to come in really handy
| | 00:20 | after what we just did in the previous lesson.
| | 00:22 | Now if you are following along and you
have got the Exercise Files and you are
| | 00:26 | jumping to this lesson, you can go
ahead and open up ConferenceB from the
| | 00:29 | Exercise Files folder. In that last
lesson we brought in the Jellybricks logo here,
| | 00:34 | and I don't know if you can see it,
but the background on the logo is not
| | 00:38 | quite as dark as the background of my
slide. So the black isn't real black here.
| | 00:43 | Now to exaggerate for this lesson, I'm
going to delete this logo and bring in
| | 00:47 | one with an even brighter background.
So I'm going to click on it, hit Delete
| | 00:51 | on my keyboard, go up to my Media, and
here in the Photos section, I'm going to
| | 00:56 | go to the logoRed and bring that in here.
Close up our Media palette here. Size
| | 01:05 | this down to about that size right
there. There it is, centered nicely.
| | 01:12 | So here is an example where obviously
it would be nice if it is blended in with
| | 01:16 | the background of our slide. In the
previous lesson, we brought one in with a
| | 01:20 | dark background but it didn't blend
perfectly. So we are going to use a new
| | 01:23 | feature, the Instant Alpha feature
to remove the background altogether.
| | 01:28 | So the background of our slide is
actually what's going to show through.
| | 01:31 | So I'm going to click on the image itself,
you will notice on my toolbar that the
| | 01:35 | Alpha tool is now available. So I'm
going to click on it. That changes my mouse
| | 01:40 | pointer when I move into the image
itself. All I need to do is go to the color
| | 01:45 | that I want to remove. In this case,
anywhere in the red here and then
| | 01:49 | I'm going to click and drag.
| | 01:51 | Now I don't know if you saw that,
but it just changed hue a little bit.
| | 01:56 | So it's actually highlighted, and when I release,
you can see that it's kind of removed
| | 02:01 | from the background here. It's still
highlighted because it's selected, but I
| | 02:05 | have got red inside the e and the b and
up here actually as well. So I'm going
| | 02:09 | to do the same thing, I'm going to
click inside and just drag a small circle.
| | 02:13 | Same thing over here. If I can get at it,
I'm going to try it in the e up here
| | 02:18 | as well. There we go.
| | 02:19 | All right, so when I click outside of
the image, you can see now it's actually
| | 02:24 | transparent aside from the letters in
the word Jellybricks here. If I want to
| | 02:29 | move this, I can actually click on the
background. It's not there anymore.
| | 02:34 | I have to go to one of the letters in the
word to move my logo around. So Instant
| | 02:41 | Alpha, I really like this new feature.
It allows you to take the backgrounds
| | 02:45 | out of your images like we just did,
so they blend nicely with your slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using photo cutouts| 00:01 | In this lesson we are going to
continue working with images in our
| | 00:04 | presentation, but we are going to look
at a couple of masters that will help
| | 00:08 | you keep your presentations consistent
by providing an area for an image and
| | 00:13 | then allowing you to mask out parts of
that image. A little later on we'll go
| | 00:17 | deeper into masking, but for now, if
you are jumping to this lesson and you
| | 00:21 | have got this Exercise files, you can
open up ConferenceC from that folder and
| | 00:27 | jump to slide number 4 and
you will be all caught up.
| | 00:29 | This is the slide we worked on in the
previous movie, and we added a photo
| | 00:33 | here, but now we are going to do it a
different way. We are going add a new
| | 00:37 | slide, so we'll click the New button,
and we are going to change the master. So
| | 00:40 | I'm going to go up to the Masters
button here, and I want you to notice down
| | 00:44 | near the bottom of the list, there is a
number of thumbnails that include this
| | 00:49 | little white rectangle, and each one of
these has Photo in the name, you'll see
| | 00:53 | Photo Horizontal Reflection, Photo
Horizontal, each of these little rectangles
| | 00:58 | represents the area where the photo will go.
| | 01:01 | Now we can size that and move it if
we want, but if we just simply choose
| | 01:05 | master and repeat this master for
a series of slides, we'll get some
| | 01:09 | consistency in our presentation. So I'm
going to go up to this one here, Photo
| | 01:12 | Horizontal, actually let's do it with
the Reflections, since in our previous
| | 01:16 | slide we used that reflection. I'm
going to give it a click. I'm going to
| | 01:20 | double-click to edit the title, so I'm
going to add in the words here, Venue number 1.
| | 01:25 | So now we want an image of our first
venue, and we are going pop it right in
| | 01:29 | here. If you have added some of the
images in the exercise files to your
| | 01:34 | iPhoto, you can access them through the
Media here, clicking the Media palette,
| | 01:39 | and making sure Photos is selected. You
can see we have got a number down here
| | 01:43 | that might pose well for an actual
venue for our customer conference, here's
| | 01:49 | our conference center.
| | 01:50 | So I'm going to click and drag that
in when I see the green plus sign, I'll
| | 01:53 | release. I'm going to close up the
Media palette, and there is the end result.
| | 01:57 | That's the default result. There
is some editing that we can do.
| | 02:01 | Now like an any other image I can
click on it, and I get those handles, but I
| | 02:05 | also get this little slider down below
and the Edit Mask button, because what's
| | 02:10 | really happening here is my image is
in behind this black mat you see around
| | 02:15 | the outside. So think of it that way,
like the slide is laid on top of the
| | 02:19 | photo, and I can move that around
behind the scenes if I wanted to, or I can
| | 02:24 | move the entire mask if I want.
| | 02:27 | So this image is a placeholder I see
that when I move my mouse over, I can drag
| | 02:30 | a new media file here to replace the
one that's there, or if I click and drag
| | 02:34 | you can see I'm actually moving the
entire mask, but if I click on Edit Mask
| | 02:40 | and then I click inside here with a
double click. I'm going to get the image
| | 02:46 | selected. Now right now you can't
tell because it's the same size as the
| | 02:49 | placeholder, but watch what happens
when we use a slider to make this bigger
| | 02:53 | and then click inside. After we hit
Edit Mask, you will see the image is
| | 02:58 | actually blown up in behind, and I'm
just seeing inside this little placeholder
| | 03:04 | what we call our mask, the end result.
| | 03:07 | So if I click one more time now, you
can see that the actual handles move to
| | 03:11 | the outside on the photo itself, and
I can choose an area of the photo that
| | 03:15 | should appear inside that placeholder.
See how the placeholder stays put, but I
| | 03:21 | can choose which area is going to be
viewed inside that placeholder. If I want
| | 03:27 | less of the ocean and more of the
grounds there that's good. I'll see the end
| | 03:32 | result by clicking outside the selected box,
there it is, and I get reflection down below.
| | 03:38 | So now if we create a brand new slide
by clicking New, we are going to use the
| | 03:42 | same master. I'm double click down here,
type in Venue number 2. You can see
| | 03:48 | now when I bring my image in here,
it's going to be very consistent with the
| | 03:51 | previous one. I'm going to go back to
Media, and from the Exercise files that
| | 03:56 | I have downloaded here to iPhoto, I'm
going to choose the Beach, I'm going to
| | 03:59 | bring it in, and Close this up.
| | 04:01 | So by default I'm seeing the entire
photo again, I can click on it, I can zoom
| | 04:07 | in, click Edit Mask. Now I can see the
image in behind, click one more time to
| | 04:14 | select the image, so I can drag it
around, and show exactly -- I don't want
| | 04:19 | those garbage pails in there, so I'm
going to move it just like so. Great,
| | 04:26 | clicking outside the box
deselects it, and shows me my end result.
| | 04:31 | So using some of the masters you can
get some consistency in your presentation,
| | 04:35 | if you use the same master for a series
of slides. In this case we are choosing
| | 04:40 | venues, and showing images inside a
placeholder using that mask. We have
| | 04:45 | ability to choose of the area of the
photo we want to show within the mask, and
| | 04:49 | even adjust the mask itself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Masking images| 00:01 | In this lesson we are going to
continue looking at the masking techniques we
| | 00:05 | have at our disposal here in Keynote.
In the previous lesson we used a master
| | 00:09 | to create an automatic mask, bring
in an image into that mask and then
| | 00:13 | adjusting the image and the area of the image
that was visible through the mask and so on.
| | 00:18 | Well, now we are going to continue
working with masks by creating our own.
| | 00:22 | We are going to create our own using the
Mask command, but we are also going to
| | 00:25 | use shapes to create masks as well.
| | 00:28 | So if you are jumping to this lesson
and you have got the exercise files,
| | 00:31 | you can open up ConferenceD, and if you are
following along, this is where we left
| | 00:36 | off in the previous lesson, at Slide 6.
So go ahead and click on Slide 6 and
| | 00:40 | we are going to add a new slide now.
| | 00:42 | I am going to go up to the New button
and click on it. Of course it's going to
| | 00:46 | be the same master as the previous
slide, which had our cutout here for our
| | 00:51 | image and our built-in mask. I'm going
to change that master and I'm going to
| | 00:56 | go to just a Title at the Top. So
let's double click in the Title area and
| | 01:02 | we'll enter a title. In this case I'm
going to type in Excursions, and I'll
| | 01:07 | click outside the box to deselect.
| | 01:09 | All right. So we are going to bring an
image in here now. I have downloaded my
| | 01:13 | images to iPhoto, but you have got
these images in your exercise files as well.
| | 01:17 | So by going to the Media button, I can
grab them right from iPhoto, with Photos
| | 01:21 | selected here.
| | 01:23 | There is Cuba, I'm going to drag that
right here on to my slide and release,
| | 01:27 | and close up the Media browser. Okay.
This image is obviously too big, so I
| | 01:31 | have got some manual labor here. I need
to click and drag that down in size and
| | 01:36 | move it into a good spot right there.
| | 01:39 | Now, if there is parts of the image I
don't want to include in my actual slide,
| | 01:45 | like on the edge here I don't want
that tower showing, and maybe there is a
| | 01:48 | little bit too much sky, I can use a
mask and I can create my own mask with the
| | 01:53 | image selected.
| | 01:55 | Now, when you mask, you are actually
not lobbying off pieces of your photo,
| | 01:59 | like you would when you are cropping,
you are just kind of hiding them.
| | 02:02 | So I'm going to go up with the image
selected to the Format menu and I'm going
| | 02:07 | to come down to Mask. I'll click right
there on Mask. Automatically, I get the
| | 02:12 | default rectangle showing up here in
the middle of my image. But from the
| | 02:16 | previous lesson you know you can
adjust both the image and the mask.
| | 02:21 | With the mask selected, I can go to the sizing
handles and just drag it up and over a little bit.
| | 02:28 | If you hold down the Option key as you
are clicking and dragging, you can see
| | 02:31 | you are growing it in all directions.
That's about the size I want the image to
| | 02:36 | be right there.
| | 02:37 | But I want to move that image around a
little bit. So I'm going to click on the
| | 02:40 | image or click again with the mask
selected now, it's the image that's
| | 02:44 | selected, which means I can move it
around, and right about there is the area
| | 02:52 | that I want to display. So I'm going
to click outside the selected image and
| | 02:56 | there is the end result.
| | 02:59 | Now, when an image is masked, if you
want to make changes to it or you want to
| | 03:03 | remove the mask, you have to click the
image, you will see the Edit Mask button
| | 03:08 | with the slider. But you will go up to
the Format menu and where it used to say
| | 03:12 | Mask, it now says Unmask.
| | 03:14 | So clicking Unmask will take the mask
away and you are left with your image.
| | 03:19 | That's on purpose, so we can do another
method of masking, and that's using a shape.
| | 03:23 | So I'm going to go up to my Shapes
dropdown and I'm going to select the
| | 03:28 | pentagon down here, near the bottom.
All I'm going to do is I'm going to grow
| | 03:32 | this. I'm going to hold down Option to
grow it in all directions, and with it
| | 03:37 | selected, I'm going to move it, so it's
right on top of my image, right about there. Good.
| | 03:42 | Now, to create a mask from that shape,
I need to select both the image and the
| | 03:48 | shape. The easiest way to do that, for
me anyway, is with the Marquee select.
| | 03:52 | I click and drag so that both are being
touched by the Marquee. Now I can go up
| | 03:57 | to the Format menu, and you will notice
I have got an option here to Mask with
| | 04:02 | Selected Shape. Mask with shape is to
create one from scratch using one of the
| | 04:07 | shapes that we selected from the
dropdown, but here I have already got the
| | 04:11 | shape in there, its selected, so I'm
going to choose Mask with Selected Shape.
| | 04:15 | You can see what happens. There is the
area that will display. So I can make my
| | 04:19 | adjustments now. If I want to move
things around, that's the area right there
| | 04:25 | that I would like to show. Of course, I
can use my slider to zoom in and out as
| | 04:29 | well, just like I did with a regular
rectangular mask. I'm going to move it
| | 04:34 | right out as far as I can, just
slide this up, and right about there.
| | 04:40 | So once I have got what I'm looking for,
I click outside the selected area to
| | 04:44 | see the end result. So there
is a mask with an actual shape.
| | 04:49 | Like I said, from the Format menu, you
can mask with some of the shapes that we
| | 04:53 | saw from the dropdown, and you can do
it all in one step so you don't have to
| | 04:57 | draw the shape first and then select
both and then Mask With the Selected
| | 05:02 | Shape, you could actually do it right
from here, choosing Mask with Shapes.
| | 05:05 | So if I click Undo-- actually, I would
have to hit it a whole bunch of times,
| | 05:10 | so I'm going do that until I get
back to my image. There is the Mask with
| | 05:17 | Shape. I'm going to click on the
shape only and delete it, and there is my image.
| | 05:22 | So let's try something different now,
let's draw our own mask. You can use
| | 05:27 | shapes. Well, you can actually draw
your own shapes. You knew that from a
| | 05:30 | previous lesson, so let's try that.
| | 05:33 | So I'm going to go up to Shapes here,
and I'm going to come down to my Pen
| | 05:36 | tool, and I'm just going to draw my own.
So I'm going to do it by pointing and clicking.
| | 05:43 | You can see it's starting to be drawn.
I can edit that. When I get to the last
| | 05:59 | red dot and I see that little circle
up here next to my pen, that means I'm
| | 06:03 | going to close it up. But I can click
again to get those red dots back, make
| | 06:08 | adjustments. There is a
different shape, isn't it?
| | 06:11 | So again, it's a same procedure. From
out here I'm going to Marquee select both
| | 06:14 | the image and the shape. I'm going to
go up to Format > Mask with Selected
| | 06:21 | Shape. I'm going to adjust, if I want
to zoom in or out. That's pretty close
| | 06:27 | right there to the edges. I'll
deselect to see the end result.
| | 06:32 | So lots of variations for masking. You
have a number of shapes. Rectangles.
| | 06:38 | You can draw your own shapes. In the end,
you are hiding parts of your photo to
| | 06:42 | display on the slide in
your Keynote presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting images| 00:00 | One of the things I really like about
Keynote is that you can make adjustments
| | 00:05 | to images in your slide presentations
right from within Keynote. You don't have
| | 00:10 | to go out to some external program.
So all of the functionality you might be
| | 00:14 | used to using iPhoto for example,
you have access to right within Keynote.
| | 00:19 | So as you bring images into the slides
in your presentation, it's nice to know
| | 00:23 | that you can go into those
images and adjust them accordingly.
| | 00:26 | So here we are where we left off in
the previous lesson with some masking and
| | 00:30 | if you are jumping to this lesson and
you have got the Exercise Files and
| | 00:33 | you want to follow along, you can go ahead
and open up ConferenceE to be all caught
| | 00:38 | up and we are actually going to go back
to slide number 6 here, which was our
| | 00:42 | second venue. It's an image of the beach
and I think we can improve upon this image.
| | 00:46 | So I'm going to click on the image.
Now, you will notice on my toolbar,
| | 00:50 | the default toolbar, I don't have a button
for adjusting images. But if I go up to View,
| | 00:54 | you will notice that Show
Adjust Image does appear here. So that's
| | 01:00 | something that I might want to add to
my toolbar. This will be a little bit of
| | 01:03 | a review, how to modify your
own toolbar or customize it.
| | 01:07 | So we right-click anywhere on the
toolbar in an empty space and choose
| | 01:11 | Customize Toolbar. Here we are going to
see the Adjust Image icon and I'm going
| | 01:16 | to drag it up here just between Media
and Colors just like so and I'm going to
| | 01:24 | click Done when I'm done and now I
have got easy access to that. So I'm going
| | 01:28 | to click on the Adjust Image icon,
which brings open this little dialog box
| | 01:33 | with lots of options to modify or
adjust our image. You can see sliders up at
| | 01:39 | the top for adjusting the Brightness
and the Contrast. The next section all has
| | 01:43 | to do with the Colors, Saturation,
the Temperature, cooler and warmer images,
| | 01:48 | the Tinting. Then we have got a
Sharpness slider as well as an Exposure slider.
| | 01:54 | So I'm going to start with down at the
bottom here where we see Levels. Now
| | 01:59 | you will notice that we have got a number
of peaks and valleys here and we have
| | 02:02 | also got over here on the right-hand
side a lot of empty space where we have
| | 02:07 | got no levels at all. So we can adjust
our levels by clicking-and-dragging
| | 02:11 | the sliders at each end. So we can change
the levels of our light and our dark tones.
| | 02:15 | So you will notice when I take
the right slider and I move it in,
| | 02:19 | you can see what's happening to my image.
It's getting a little bit brighter.
| | 02:24 | So all of these tones here in my
image are actually closer to the edge now
| | 02:28 | which would be considered light and
you can see I'm making it a little bit
| | 02:31 | lighter with each drag inwards to the
left. Same thing goes for the right.
| | 02:35 | These are the slider here for adjusting
the darkness and you can see as I move across
| | 02:40 | it's getting darker and darker.
So it's actually pretty good where it was.
| | 02:43 | It may be a little bit bright. I'm
going to slide in just ever so slightly
| | 02:48 | to the right. That's a good place to
start. So I have got 2% and 76% for this
| | 02:52 | particular image. It's
already starting to look better.
| | 02:56 | Now, I can adjust the Exposure and you
can see the defaults here are all zeros
| | 03:00 | except for Saturation. It's right down
the middle at 50 and the other two are
| | 03:04 | also zero, so keep that in mind. When
we adjust the Exposure, again it's kind
| | 03:10 | of adjusting the shadows and the
highlights. So if we go to the left for example,
| | 03:14 | you can see on my image gets
darker and darker. So this is like it's
| | 03:17 | underexposed and if I go to the right
all the way, it's going to be quite overexposed.
| | 03:24 | So somewhere in there is the right
combination and I think right about there,
| | 03:28 | I'm going to go up to 31 just
like so and you can see that has actually
| | 03:33 | adjusted my levels down below as
well. So I might want to adjust what's
| | 03:38 | happening down below just to cover
that high peak at the end, good.
| | 03:44 | It's starting to look better.
| | 03:45 | Now, let's move into the Color section
here where we have got our Saturation,
| | 03:48 | Temperature and Tint. I'm going to
start with Tint at the bottom and work my way up.
| | 03:52 | I find that works best. The Tint,
you can see adjusts between red and green.
| | 03:56 | Going to the left is towards
the red and you can see how my image is
| | 04:00 | getting quite pink and almost red there.
It doesn't look real anymore and if I go to the right,
| | 04:05 | this might be good on St. Paddy's Day,
but that's a little bit too green.
| | 04:10 | So if there is already a tint in there,
we can kind of remove it by moving our
| | 04:14 | slider left or right. I'm going to
go right there to about -6. Good.
| | 04:21 | Temperature, we can make our images
warmer or cooler by adjusting what we call
| | 04:26 | the Color Temperature. Going to the
right is going to warm it up and you can
| | 04:29 | see it's going to turn warmer as we
make it look a little bit more yellow.
| | 04:34 | If I go to the left, we have got some
blue in there. You can see it's actually
| | 04:38 | looking colder now.
| | 04:40 | I want this one because it's the beach
to warm up a little bit, I'm going to go
| | 04:44 | up to right there above 14. I like that.
Once again my Levels are changing all
| | 04:49 | the while as I make these changes, so I
might want to come back here later and
| | 04:53 | make some adjustments to my level.
| | 04:55 | Saturation is the amount of color, our
color intensity. So how much color do I want?
| | 05:01 | Do I want to bring out more color,
I go to the right, or do I want to take away color?
| | 05:05 | And if I go all the way to the
left there will be no color at all;
| | 05:08 | it just becomes a black and white
almost. I'm going to go actually to the
| | 05:13 | right a little bit and add a little extra
color. That's really starting to look good.
| | 05:17 | Now, it's up to Contrast and Brightness,
so if I want to brighten up the image
| | 05:21 | for example, I'll go to the right.
If I want to darken it make it look a little
| | 05:25 | bit closer to sunset for example, I'll
go to the left and I'm actually going to
| | 05:29 | go right there to 2, make it a
little bit brighter. Contrast as well.
| | 05:34 | So the difference between the highs
and the lows or the brights and the darks.
| | 05:38 | You can see if I go all the way to the right
there is a little too much contrast there.
| | 05:42 | It doesn't look real anymore and as I
go all the way to the left, you can see
| | 05:46 | there is hardly any contrast. It kind
of blurs in together. But somewhere in
| | 05:50 | there is a good contrast, I like
it right there at about 12, good.
| | 05:55 | So there is the adjustments you can
see down below in my Levels area and
| | 05:59 | I'm pretty good where I have got my
settings. I might just drag this in slightly.
| | 06:03 | There we go and that looks actually
okay where it is. I'm going to change it
| | 06:09 | maybe to 85% and you can see now
that my image as I work with the various
| | 06:14 | sliders in the Adjust Image screen
here is showing me a real-time preview of
| | 06:19 | what's going to happen and it's
actually fixing the image on the fly.
| | 06:23 | Of course, I can reset the image at
anytime. It will go right back to what it was.
| | 06:27 | It restores all the image adjustments
that we just entered back to its original state.
| | 06:32 | But I don't want to do that.
I like what I have got.
| | 06:34 | So I'm going to close up this little palette.
I have got easy access to it if I need it again.
| | 06:39 | I'm going to deselect to see
what that looks like. There,
| | 06:42 | that's a much nicer looking photo.
I like that a lot better.
| | 06:46 | So using your Adjust Image icon up here
on the toolbar if you have added it to
| | 06:50 | the toolbar, if not you need to go the
View menu to select Show Adjust Image,
| | 06:56 | gives you access to all of those
settings so you can adjust your images
| | 06:59 | right here from within Keynote.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding movies and sound| 00:01 | Up until now we've been working a lot
with graphic images but now we're going
| | 00:05 | to take it a step further, and I'd
like to show you how to input audio into a
| | 00:10 | presentation. Whether it be one slide
or the entire presentation as well as
| | 00:15 | movies. So if you are jumping to this
lesson and you have got exercise files,
| | 00:19 | you can go ahead and open up
ConferenceF. And if you've been following along
| | 00:23 | you will notice here that we are
working on our Customer Conference
| | 00:25 | presentation and we are on slide
number 4. So go ahead and click on slide
| | 00:30 | number 4. Here you can see is our
entertainment slide. So we're going to be
| | 00:33 | featuring The Jellybricks. And it
might be nice to have one of their songs
| | 00:36 | playing in the background when we
come to this slide in the presentation.
| | 00:40 | So all we need to do is find that
audio. Now I have included the audio clip
| | 00:44 | that we are going to use in your
exercise files. And the first thing I did was
| | 00:48 | I downloaded it to my iTunes, so I
can access it from here by clicking the
| | 00:52 | Media Browser. Now if you don't have
the audio actually in iTunes that's okay,
| | 00:57 | because you can drag it from any
location right on to your slide. So here
| | 01:02 | you can see in iTunes I do have one audio
file down here labeled 'Easy For You'
| | 01:07 | by The Jellybricks, and pretty much
any kind of audio file you can play in
| | 01:11 | QuickTime, you're going to be able to
bring into your Keynote presentation.
| | 01:15 | So watch what happens when I click and
drag it here onto my slide and release.
| | 01:20 | You can see I have got this speaker
icon representing the audio itself.
| | 01:24 | So I'm going to close up my Media Browser now.
Don't worry about this image and where
| | 01:28 | you place it or the size because it
won't show when you actually play your
| | 01:32 | slide presentation, but it's here to
remind you that you have actually got some
| | 01:35 | audio on this slide. Well, we can do
though with it selected is go up to our
| | 01:40 | Inspector and click on the QuickTime
Inspector because here we've got some
| | 01:46 | options for playing our audio clip. Now
you can see that this is actually over
| | 01:51 | three minutes long and I can choose
when to start and stop this. So I can set where--
| | 01:56 | in this case it's not a movie;
it's just an audio clip. But if I wanted it
| | 01:59 | to start at a certain point in the
song I can just move this slider to that point
| | 02:04 | and if I only wanted it to play
up until at certain point as well
| | 02:08 | you can see I can choose the end time.
| | 02:10 | I am going to leave it for the whole
thing and even though it's over three
| | 02:15 | minutes long, if I play my presentation,
I only spend a minute on this slide,
| | 02:20 | That's how much of the song is going
to play. As soon as I move to the next slide
| | 02:23 | it will stop playing automatically.
| | 02:26 | Now Poster Frame is not available but
it will be very handy when we get into
| | 02:30 | movies. Movies will have a border if
you want it to put in a poster frame and
| | 02:35 | a picture that's going to
show up representing that movie.
| | 02:38 | Start movie on click. Do we want it to
start when we click or when we arrive at this slide?
| | 02:43 | So we could arrive at this slide and
not hear anything until we click our mouse.
| | 02:47 | I'm going to leave that deselected
so it starts playing automatically.
| | 02:51 | I also have the option to play this
sound once or repeat it, which is called
| | 02:57 | looping, or to loop back and forth. Now
it wouldn't make sense with this audio clip
| | 03:01 | to loop back and forth. That means
when it gets to the end, it plays
| | 03:04 | backwards to the beginning and then
starts over again. Rather I'd want this
| | 03:08 | song to start at the beginning when it
gets to the end. If I spend more than
| | 03:13 | three minutes and five seconds on this
slide... Here I can adjust the volume
| | 03:17 | and how would I know what the volume
is unless I could play it? And we've got
| | 03:21 | these controls down at the bottom.
| | 03:23 | Clicking the Play icon is going to play this tune.
| | 03:26 | (Rock music starts playing.)
| | 03:27 | And at this point I could
tone that down if I needed to.
| | 03:33 | All the way down, background music.
| | 03:36 | I'm going to leave it just past halfway here.
| | 03:38 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 03:41 | And I'll hit Pause. These
are the regular controls for
| | 03:43 | rewinding, fast-forwarding, moving to
the end or moving to the beginning of the clip.
| | 03:48 | All right so we've got it in there.
Let's test this out. We don't have to close
| | 03:52 | the Inspector right now. We can just
go to the Play button and test out this slide.
| | 03:57 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 03:59 | There you go. You see when you
get to this slide the song's going to play.
| | 04:03 | If I click, to go to the slide you
can see the song just stopped. All right,
| | 04:08 | I'm going to press Escape and go
back to that slide number 4.
| | 04:11 | All right, so that's playing an audio
clip on a specific slide. Now I'm going
| | 04:17 | to click on the actual icon and hit
Delete to remove it because you may also
| | 04:22 | want to play a clip throughout the
entire presentation. Now it wouldn't make
| | 04:26 | sense to play this song necessarily
for the entire presentation because
| | 04:30 | it doesn't apply. But if we had an entire
presentation on The Jellybricks maybe it would.
| | 04:33 | And if you were setting up one
of those kiosk type presentations where
| | 04:37 | people are just viewing information on
slides that go by, it's always nice to
| | 04:41 | have music playing in the background.
So really it doesn't matter what slide
| | 04:44 | you are on; I like to go to
slide number 1 before I do this.
| | 04:47 | And we're going to instead of importing
our audio by clicking-and-dragging it
| | 04:51 | onto a slide, we're going to do it a
different way. So I'm going to close up my
| | 04:55 | QuickTime Inspector and move over to
the very beginning here to the Document
| | 04:58 | Inspector. And with Document selected
you can see that I have got down below
| | 05:03 | some options for looping the slideshow.
This is handy if you are going to be
| | 05:07 | setting up one of those kiosks and
down below we've also got some options for
| | 05:12 | the presentation and the slide size.
| | 05:15 | Next though we've got an audio section
and when we click on audio you can see
| | 05:19 | that we can have a sound track inserted
right into this little area and it will
| | 05:23 | play for all of our presentation, not
just a single slide, and we can access it
| | 05:27 | directly from the iTunes library
if you put your audio clip there.
| | 05:31 | Clicking this little button takes us there.
That's the only one I have got. I'm going to
| | 05:35 | move this down out of the way a little
bit. So I can drag this audio clip right
| | 05:39 | inside the Soundtrack well. When I
let go you could see it's in there.
| | 05:44 | So I'll close up the Media Browser and
I have got those options in here for this
| | 05:48 | particular audio track. Play Once.
If I leave it at that it will play through
| | 05:52 | the song and stop. So I may have
additional slides at the end of the
| | 05:55 | presentation where there is no music.
So I'm going to change that to Loop.
| | 06:00 | Now another option is just to turn it
off. We can leave the audio clip attached
| | 06:04 | to this presentation but we can
turn it off when we want to show this
| | 06:08 | presentation without the music.
So we don't actually have to remove it,
| | 06:12 | just turn it off and then turn it back
on when we want it. Kind of like that.
| | 06:16 | Here's our Volume slider again.
Click the Play button to test this out.
| | 06:19 | (Rock music starts playing.)
| | 06:22 | Adjust our volume like so.
| | 06:25 | Press pause when we are done
testing and we are all set up now.
| | 06:29 | So I'm going to close this up
and I'm going to play my presentation
| | 06:32 | here from slide number 1.
| | 06:34 | (Rock music starts playing.)
| | 06:36 | Here we go. So if a song
is playing in the background,
| | 06:38 | as I click through the
various slides it doesn't stop.
| | 06:41 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 06:44 | We are on that slide
with the Home button.
| | 06:47 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 06:50 | Now if I hadn't taken the audio clip
| | 06:51 | out of this particular slide we'd be hearing
it twice. Which is why it was important to
| | 06:56 | remove it the first time.
| | 06:58 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 07:00 | And eventually we arrive
at the very last slide so
| | 07:03 | pressing Escape will take
us out and stop the audio clip.
| | 07:07 | All right, I'm going to go back up to
my Media Browser again and I want you to
| | 07:15 | see that if I go to Movies here in the
iTunes library, I don't have anything,
| | 07:20 | but I do have a movie clip that we
can enter into one of our slides in this
| | 07:25 | presentation. So I'm going to close
this up for now. I'm going to go back up to
| | 07:31 | the Inspector and Audio and over
here where I've got my sound track
| | 07:35 | I'm actually going to turn it off because
I'm going to be inserting a movie into
| | 07:38 | one of the slides in this presentation.
We don't want the movie and the audio
| | 07:42 | overlapping one another.
| | 07:44 | So with that turned off I'm good to go
now insert my movie clip, and I'm not
| | 07:50 | going to do it on an existing slide.
I'm going to add a new slide and
| | 07:54 | I'm actually going to add it after our
Entertainment slide. So clicking on slide
| | 07:57 | number 4 gets us there. I'm going to
click New and I'm going to change the
| | 08:03 | master here to Title Only and we want
the title at the top. I'm just going to
| | 08:10 | type in The Band and down below is
where we might have a movie clip of the
| | 08:15 | band who is going to be entertaining
us at our Customer Conference.
| | 08:19 | So all we need to do now is find that media
clip. I'm going to move this out of the way
| | 08:24 | and I'm going to go to my Media Files
here because I have also got that movie file
| | 08:29 | I was telling you about, Can't
Be Wrong, right there and I'm going to
| | 08:31 | click and drag it down
into the actual slide.
| | 08:36 | Here we go. Done with the Media Files.
Then move this back in place and
| | 08:41 | you can see right now just a black screen.
I'm going to move it in here and I can
| | 08:45 | size that, make it bigger, smaller,
move it around. That's a good size right there.
| | 08:51 | Make sure it's centered, good.
All right, all I need to do now to test
| | 08:54 | this out is play the slideshow.
Let's see what happens when I hit Play.
| | 08:57 | You can see automatically it's starting
from the beginning, which is a black screen.
| | 09:03 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 09:07 | And I'm just going to press Escape
because there is some adjusting to do here.
| | 09:11 | So one of the things we saw earlier
is we can create what we call a picture frame,
| | 09:15 | so we can actually have an
image there instead of a black screen.
| | 09:18 | Something representing the movie. And
the other thing we can do is maybe adjust
| | 09:22 | that volume down a little bit. Play
around with it. So we are going to go back
| | 09:26 | to our Inspector with this movie area
selected. And this time we're going to go
| | 09:31 | up to QuickTime. Notice Poster Frame is
available. We can also adjust the Start & Stop.
| | 09:36 | If we don't want to see that part
at the beginning we can move this across,
| | 09:40 | and notice down at the bottom
I can see exactly where I might be
| | 09:43 | starting this. So I'm going to start
it right before that, just like that.
| | 09:49 | So it's only - it looks like 5 seconds in.
| | 09:51 | Now with Poster Frame, I can also
choose by clicking this slider, moving it across.
| | 09:56 | So finding a good image that's
going to sit on the slide until
| | 10:00 | the movie starts playing. That's pretty
good, I get to see all of the members and
| | 10:04 | then I have those other options we
saw for the audio clip. I can start
| | 10:06 | the movie with a mouse click or if I
don't click in this check box it will start
| | 10:11 | automatically when I arrive at this
slide. Down below I've got that Repeat
| | 10:15 | option as well. So I can loop --
looping back and forth doesn't make sense.
| | 10:19 | The only time I think that looping back and
forth would really make sense is maybe
| | 10:23 | with a sound effect for example. So if
we've got a whistle going up, it would
| | 10:27 | come down going back and forth if you
choose that Loop back and forth option.
| | 10:32 | So I'm going to leave it at Loop.
In case we stay on the actual slide
| | 10:37 | for longer than three-and-a-half minutes,
it's going to loop back to the beginning
| | 10:40 | of the song. I'm going to
test out the volume again.
| | 10:42 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 10:47 | Tone it down just a little bit.
| | 10:49 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 10:51 | That's pretty good right
there. Pause to stop that.
| | 10:55 | And let's test this out.
I'm going to click Play.
| | 10:58 | (Rock music playing.)
| | 11:04 | That's a little better.
(Rock music playing.)
| | 11:08 | And I'll press Escape.
Of course moving to the next slide
| | 11:12 | would stop the movie and I
would continue with my presentation.
| | 11:16 | I am just going to go to the previous
slide, Slide 4, and press Play from there
| | 11:19 | as you can see how it shows up at the
next slide. So clicking to the next slide,
| | 11:23 | (Music playing.)
| | 11:24 | we saw that picture frame for
a second and then it goes right into the video.
| | 11:28 | (Music playing.)
| | 11:30 | Clicking again takes us to the next
slide and the movie and the audio stops.
| | 11:33 | All right.
| | 11:35 | So there you have it, adding audio and
even video to your presentation can
| | 11:39 | really add some pizzazz, some visual
effect to increase the interest in your
| | 11:45 | presentation and even enhance it a
little bit, adding more information.
| | 11:49 | As they say picture adds a thousand words.
Well, if it's a video that's made up of a
| | 11:54 | lot of pictures. So think of the
message you are sending out there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding web views| 00:01 | Up until now we have been inserting
all kinds of different multimedia objects
| | 00:05 | into our presentation. We have got
images and logos. We have got audio.
| | 00:10 | In the last movie we inserted some video
here as well. The last object I want to talk
| | 00:15 | to you about that can be inserted
into a slide in one of your Keynote
| | 00:17 | presentations is something called a Web View.
| | 00:20 | I want you to think about giving a
presentation and you refer to maybe a website,
| | 00:24 | where people can get more
information. Wouldn't it be nice if they
| | 00:27 | could see a snapshot of that website,
and maybe even create a hyperlink that
| | 00:31 | will take them to that website? That's
what we are going to do in this lesson.
| | 00:34 | So we are going to continue using the
same presentation from the last lesson,
| | 00:38 | but if you are jumping here and you
have skipped to this lesson and you have
| | 00:41 | got the exercise files, you can open
up ConferenceG to be all caught up.
| | 00:46 | We are going to go to the last slide
in the presentation and add a brand new one.
| | 00:49 | So click the New button. There is
our new slide, using the same master as
| | 00:53 | the previous slide.
| | 00:54 | My Web View is going to take up most of
this page, most of this slide here, so
| | 00:59 | probably I should change the master to
a blank slide. I'm going to click the
| | 01:02 | Master button and select Blank. Now I
have got more room for my Web View, and
| | 01:07 | here is how we insert it. Pay careful attention.
| | 01:11 | Actually, it's very easy. We go to
Insert and select Web View. So automatically
| | 01:17 | it inserts a Web View for me using the
homepage of my default browser. In this
| | 01:22 | case it happens to be Google. But I'm
going to stretch this out, make it even
| | 01:27 | bigger. We can do that. It's not
actually going to stretch the image. It's just
| | 01:31 | going to show more of the web page.
Of course, we can change that web page.
| | 01:35 | I am going to come in here to the URL.
Notice that the Hyperlink Inspector
| | 01:40 | launched automatically for me, and that
this actual Web View here that shows up
| | 01:44 | on my slide will be Enabled as a
hyperlink unless I deselect this checkbox.
| | 01:50 | I'm going to leave it selected, and
I'm just going to change the URL.
| | 01:53 | So let's say we want to talk about
lynda.com. I'm going to type it in here.
| | 02:00 | Down below I have got a checkbox that
says Update automatically. Well, the next
| | 02:04 | time I open up this presentation, I see
the most recent lynda.com homepage, but
| | 02:10 | right now I need to see it in my slide
by clicking the Update Now button. I'll
| | 02:14 | see the results right away. So there it is.
| | 02:17 | You can see it's getting cut off a
little bit on the right. That's okay. I can
| | 02:20 | go to these handles and just stretch
it out a little further, move it over
| | 02:25 | until I get enough room to show
everything I need to show on this particular
| | 02:29 | web page. That's probably good right there.
| | 02:31 | All right. I'm going to close up my
Hyperlink Inspector, and just to let you
| | 02:38 | know, when you size this window, you
are not actually going to be stretching
| | 02:43 | and distorting or scaling down the
image, you are actually just cutting off
| | 02:47 | parts of the web page. So I'm going
to bring it down to about here. This is
| | 02:51 | interesting, because when you create
some extra space at the bottom, you might
| | 02:56 | want to put in another Web View. Let's
say I wanted it to be a subpage of the
| | 03:00 | lynda.com homepage here. Well, then I
could insert that address, and of course,
| | 03:04 | I could use my browser to go to the
location and just copy the address from the
| | 03:08 | address field and pop it into my
Hyperlink Inspector, or if I know that,
| | 03:13 | I could just type it in.
| | 03:14 | So I'm going to insert another one.
Now, if you find yourself inserting Web
| | 03:18 | Views on a regular basis, you might
want to customize your toolbar. We have
| | 03:22 | done this a couple of times in this
title, but I'm going to right click here on
| | 03:25 | an empty space on my toolbar
and choose Customize Toolbar.
| | 03:30 | If I want the Web View icon in there, I
just come down here and get it and then
| | 03:33 | I pop it in here wherever I want it
to go. I'm going to pop it right there.
| | 03:36 | Good. I'm done. I'll click the Done
button, and now every time I click this
| | 03:42 | button, I'll get a new Web View.
| | 03:44 | Notice that it's the default again.
Same size, same URL, but I can size this
| | 03:51 | down, which I'm going to do, so it's
about the same size as the top one.
| | 03:55 | There we go.
| | 03:58 | Of course, I'm going to change the
URL. Now, we do have The Jellybricks
| | 04:06 | performing at our conference, so maybe
it would be good to have a link to their
| | 04:09 | website here. I'm going to type that in,
www.thejellybricks.com. I'm going to
| | 04:18 | Update that Now, and I'm going to
see the top portion of that website.
| | 04:23 | Remember it's also a hyperlink, so
clicking it in the presentation while
| | 04:26 | I'm playing it will take me to their
website because it's enabled here.
| | 04:30 | So I'm going to close
that up and just test it out.
| | 04:33 | Let's click the Play button, and if I
click on the lynda.com Web View, look at
| | 04:39 | that. It opens up my default browser
and takes me to that page. Interesting!
| | 04:45 | I am going to quit Safari and try it
with The Jellybricks. So I'm going to go
| | 04:49 | back to Keynote now, and here it's
still playing the presentation. I can click
| | 04:54 | right on The Jellybricks Web View,
which opens up a web page. Look at that. It
| | 04:59 | takes me right to their site, so
I can get additional information.
| | 05:02 | So if you are setting up a kiosk kind
of presentation, this could be handy.
| | 05:06 | Also, if you are giving the presentation,
it's kind of neat to be able to show
| | 05:11 | a clip or a static image of a website,
and if it's a hyperlink, take people
| | 05:16 | directly to that website by
creating what we call a Web View.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Working with Tables and ChartsAdding tables| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to look
at working with tables and charts in your
| | 00:04 | Keynote presentations. In this lesson,
we are going to focus in on tables to start with.
| | 00:09 | Now if you have ever used tables in
another application, like a word processing
| | 00:13 | program, for example, or if you have
ever used a spreadsheet application, then
| | 00:17 | you are probably pretty comfortable
working with tables. They work in rows and
| | 00:22 | columns. You can enter data, which
could be text, it could be numbers, you can
| | 00:26 | even perform automatic calculations
in a table. That's what we are going
| | 00:29 | to look at starting now.
| | 00:30 | I am working with a presentation we
have been working with in previous lessons here.
| | 00:35 | If you are jumping to this lesson
and you have got Exercise Files,
| | 00:39 | look for UC1, short for User Conference 1,
find that one, open it up and then move
| | 00:45 | to slide number 4 with me. You can
see we have got a title here, 2007
| | 00:50 | Attendance Figures, sounds like a good
title and a good candidate for entering
| | 00:54 | a table to show some data.
| | 00:56 | So to add a table to a slide, pretty simple.
Come up to the toolbar, click on Table
| | 01:02 | and you are done. Well, almost done.
You can see what's happened
| | 01:06 | automatically here. I do get a table
entered onto my slide. It's got three
| | 01:11 | squares across and three squares down
for a total of nine. So in other words,
| | 01:16 | three rows and three columns. Each of
these squares we call a cell. Now we can
| | 01:21 | click on cells to enter data in them,
to format them, change their appearance
| | 01:26 | and so on.
| | 01:27 | So let's see what else happened here
by default. The Table Inspector has
| | 01:31 | launched for me over here on the right
hand side. You can see that the Table
| | 01:35 | Inspector icon is selected and the
Table button is selected. There is also a
| | 01:40 | Format button over here for
formatting cells and applying formulas and
| | 01:44 | conditional formats.
We'll talk about that later.
| | 01:48 | Right now, we'll go back to Table and
you can see down below that the default
| | 01:52 | number of Rows and Columns is set to 3.
That's what was created for me. Of
| | 01:56 | course, I can adjust that. If I need
more rows, I can bump it up with the up
| | 02:00 | arrow. If I need less rows, I can
bump it down. You can see what else is
| | 02:06 | happening here. The table stays the
same size as a whole but the cells, the
| | 02:10 | rows and the columns, either shrink
or grow according to the number that
| | 02:15 | I select here.
| | 02:17 | Another option is to come into the
field itself and just type in a number,
| | 02:22 | pressing Tab or Enter will lock those
in for you. I'm going to bump that back
| | 02:26 | down to 3. Now you have also got the
opportunity to add header rows, header
| | 02:31 | columns and footer rows as well in
Keynote. A header row is typically where you
| | 02:36 | are going to enter a title or some
labels for the various columns. The header
| | 02:41 | column is where you are going to type
in labels for the various rows. I'll show
| | 02:45 | you what I mean.
| | 02:46 | If I click on Header Row, a new row
gets added to the top here. So it doesn't
| | 02:50 | use an existing one. Here is where I
might type in some actual labels for each
| | 02:55 | of these columns. Notice that
there is some formatting that's applied
| | 02:59 | automatically to make it stand out
as a header row. Same thing goes for a
| | 03:04 | header column. A new column gets added.
Now I might want to put in labels for
| | 03:08 | the individual rows here.
| | 03:11 | A footer row is going to add a row to
the bottom and shade it as well. So you
| | 03:15 | can put information at the bottom that
kind of is separate from the data in the
| | 03:19 | table. Maybe a grand total or something
that might appear down here. I'm going
| | 03:23 | to turn off the footer row, but I'm
going to keep the header column and the
| | 03:27 | header row just as it is.
| | 03:29 | All right, working our way down, we
have got Edit Rows & Columns. So here we
| | 03:33 | know we can increase the number of
rows and columns, which adds new rows or
| | 03:37 | columns to the end of our table. But
let's say I have just typed in here, Item
| | 03:44 | 1 and you can see it's kind of getting
cut off here. We'll talk about that in a
| | 03:48 | second. In here, I want to add a new
row but I want to add it above where
| | 03:53 | I'm typing. Well, I'm going to come back
here, select this cell. I'm going to go to
| | 03:59 | my Edit Rows & Columns menu.
| | 04:01 | Notice that I can add rows but I can
choose to add the row above my selected
| | 04:05 | cell or below. Choosing Add Row Above
gives me a new row above where I was
| | 04:10 | typing. I could have added it below
as well. How about column? Same thing,
| | 04:15 | I can add a column before my cell or
after my selected cell. Adding before
| | 04:20 | inserts a new column here.
| | 04:23 | Now to remove columns and rows, you
have to remove an entire row or an entire
| | 04:27 | column, you can't just remove the
cells. Your table is always going to be a
| | 04:30 | rectangle. I'm going to click in here
and come down to Delete Row. I'm also
| | 04:36 | going to delete this column. So I'm
going to go back to this button and delete
| | 04:41 | the column as well.
| | 04:42 | I am going to come inside this cell here,
highlight this text and hit Delete on
| | 04:46 | the keyboard to remove it. So you
notice, the cell didn't actually grow to
| | 04:50 | accommodate my text as I was typing it.
That's an option we can choose to turn
| | 04:55 | on or not. Here it is right here,
Automatically resize to fit content. So with
| | 05:01 | this checked off, whatever I type in
here, you can see how the cell grows.
| | 05:10 | If I take the text out while
Automatically resize to fit content is selected,
| | 05:15 | it's going to shrink down back to its
original size. With that not checked off,
| | 05:20 | obviously as I type, text is going
to get cut off and I need to manually
| | 05:24 | stretch things out. When I remove text
as well, it won't shrink down. It will
| | 05:29 | stay big, even though it doesn't need
to be that big, depending on what I have
| | 05:33 | typed inside the cell.
| | 05:35 | All right, another option is to set
the column widths and the row heights
| | 05:38 | manually. So if I wanted this
particular row up here, I'm going to
| | 05:42 | click and drag across the entire row
to be a certain row height. I can adjust
| | 05:48 | that here by bumping it up or bumping
it down. I'm going to bump it down, so
| | 05:53 | it's not quite as big as the other cells.
| | 05:55 | The other thing I might like to do is
bring all these cells together, kind of
| | 05:59 | merge them together into one, so I can
just enter a big title across the top.
| | 06:03 | Well, it's back to the Edit Rows &
Columns menu here. You can see down here at
| | 06:07 | the bottom, I have the ability to
Merge Cells. So I'm going to click on that
| | 06:11 | and now it's one big cell.
| | 06:13 | If I come down here to the columns and
do the same thing, I can merge cells in
| | 06:18 | a column. It's the same option. There
we go. Then I realize, well, maybe I
| | 06:24 | shouldn't have done that. It needs to
be 3 rows or maybe at least 2. With this
| | 06:30 | selected, I can split it by coming in
here and choosing to Split Rows. So you
| | 06:36 | can see automatically I have got 2 now.
Coming back in here and choosing Split
| | 06:41 | Rows again, it gives me 3 but they are
not equal. I can line these up, stretch
| | 06:46 | them out, if I wanted to. Clicking and
dragging across all 3 might be a good
| | 06:50 | idea to make these all equal and
there is the ability to do that.
| | 06:55 | I am going to go up to my Metrics
Inspector here. Notice that I can choose an
| | 07:01 | exact Width and Height for my table.
I can also Constrain Proportions. I'll
| | 07:08 | select this to maintain the aspect
ratio of the width to the height,
| | 07:11 | when I'm resizing an object. So I don't want
to stretch it around. I have also got the
| | 07:15 | ability to choose an exact Position and
even do things like Rotate and Flip the
| | 07:20 | table around.
| | 07:23 | Back up here up to my Table Inspector,
I'm going to come down here to my menu
| | 07:29 | and I'm going to choose Merge Cells
to set that back, good. So it's almost
| | 07:36 | ready now to start inputting some data.
The other thing you can do to make it
| | 07:39 | easier to read is to alternate the row colors.
| | 07:42 | Now you can do that manually by
shading them yourselves or you can come down
| | 07:46 | here to alternating row color. You
click the checkbox to do that and you can
| | 07:50 | see we go from gray to black, to gray
to black. As we add more rows, the same
| | 07:55 | thing will happen automatically for
us. You will notice over here, we can
| | 07:58 | choose those colors as well. It
doesn't have to be gray and black. We could
| | 08:02 | choose, for example, red instead of
gray and then black is the background that
| | 08:08 | we see. I'm going to switch it back to
a lighter gray. There we go and close up
| | 08:14 | my Colors palette. Turning this off brings
it back to its original color, which is black.
| | 08:19 | All right, so the only other thing
that I might want to do here is resize my
| | 08:24 | table as a whole. When I'm working on
cells, I don't see the actual little
| | 08:27 | handles to size my table. So I click
off the table and I click once on it again
| | 08:32 | to get those handles back. Maybe I
want to stretch it out this way. This
| | 08:36 | doesn't need to be so wide in here. So
I might want to click in here and close
| | 08:41 | this up a little bit. You can see
what's happening now. It's not automatically
| | 08:45 | resizing my column width, so I can click
and drag myself to do that, till I get
| | 08:51 | exactly what I'm looking for. That
looks good. Click in a cell to see the
| | 08:57 | results, click off the table.
| | 08:59 | Last option is to size the table to
the exact measurements I need.
| | 09:04 | So I'm clicking here on the table to select it.
Now I'm going to go up to my Metrics
| | 09:09 | Inspector. You will see the Size
right now is set to 5.47 in x 3.96 in.
| | 09:15 | I'm thinking this should be 6 inches. So
I'm going to type in 6. I'm going to hit
| | 09:20 | my Tab key to move over to the Height.
I'm going to put in 4. I'm going to hit
| | 09:25 | Tab one more time. It takes me down
to the Position. I'm okay with the
| | 09:28 | Position. I can do that myself, but
you can see the actual size of the table
| | 09:32 | has been adjusted to my measurements.
Now I can just move this till I feel like
| | 09:36 | it's centered. There we go and release.
| | 09:39 | All right, we are going to continue
working with table cells. In particular,
| | 09:43 | we are going to do a little bit of
formatting and working with some of the numbers
| | 09:47 | and calculations as we
move forward in this tutorial.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing cells in a table| 00:00 | In the previous lesson, we built our
first table on a slide in our Keynote
| | 00:04 | presentation. Now we are going to do
a little bit of formatting with the cells.
| | 00:08 | So we are going to add some content,
then we are going to make it look nice,
| | 00:11 | we are going to use some tricks as well,
built into tables some functionality that
| | 00:15 | will automate the process. So let's do that now.
| | 00:18 | You can see that I'm still working
on the presentation from the previous lesson,
| | 00:21 | but if you have got the Exercise
Files and you are jumping to this lesson,
| | 00:24 | you haven't been following along,
you can open up UC2 to have exactly
| | 00:28 | what I have here on the screen. Also,
the Table Inspector is open. So if it's
| | 00:32 | not for you, go up to your Inspector
and make sure Table is selected right here.
| | 00:36 | Now we are going to work a little bit
more on this table. For example, I'm just
| | 00:41 | going to click here inside the table
and I'm going to click on any cell here to
| | 00:45 | drag this little column over. You can
see I don't need it to be so wide.
| | 00:49 | I just want it to be graphical. You can see
what's happening here. I'm going to move
| | 00:53 | this out of the way, so you can see
that I have got one column wider than
| | 00:57 | the others right now. So they
are not evenly distributed.
| | 01:00 | If we want them to be evenly
distributed, you are not going to find that
| | 01:03 | anywhere here in our Inspector. You
will find it, however, if you go up to
| | 01:07 | the Format menu and Table. You can see
there is some options here we don't see in
| | 01:12 | the Inspector, such as
Distributing Columns Evenly.
| | 01:16 | Now we can also right-click in here to
see that pop-up. You can see there is
| | 01:20 | more down here than what I'm seeing.
Look at that, we have got Select All
| | 01:24 | Cells, Clear All Cells and so on, but
definitely the one that I want to do is
| | 01:30 | to distribute those evenly. So I'm
going to move up to Format, down to Table,
| | 01:36 | and I'm going to choose Distribute
Columns Evenly. You can see what happens.
| | 01:40 | It just readjusts things for me so I
don't have to eyeball it. I like that.
| | 01:44 | All right, so I have got my columns.
I have got my rows. I'm going to start
| | 01:48 | entering some data now. Right here at
the top, I'm going to double-click and
| | 01:52 | you can see my cursor is flashing by
default in the center. Now using the Text
| | 01:56 | Inspector, we can do all kinds of
text enhancements, choosing the color,
| | 01:59 | alignment, etcetera. But in here, I'm
just going to type in the title, which is
| | 02:05 | User Conference 2007, just like so.
I'm going to enter some data for the User
| | 02:13 | Conference. I might want to put in
some levels here at the top, for example, Training.
| | 02:18 | I want to track the Main conference
attendance and maybe get a Total as well.
| | 02:27 | All right, over here I want to put in
the actual numbers and then revenue.
| | 02:33 | It looks like I could use another row
for some additional labels at the top.
| | 02:38 | So to insert an actual row above my
selected cell, you know what to do.
| | 02:43 | We have talked about this in the previous lesson.
| | 02:46 | I am going to go back to our Table
Inspector here, click on the Edit Rows & Columns.
| | 02:50 | We are going to add a row above our
selected cell. You can see what happens.
| | 02:56 | It's the same width and height
as the others. I'm going to move this
| | 02:59 | back out of the way so we can see it.
In here, I'm just going to put in
| | 03:04 | the number sign and over here I'm going to
put in the dollar sign representing the revenues.
| | 03:09 | Okay, this entire table might need to
move up now. So I'm going to click once
| | 03:13 | on it after de-selecting it, to just
drag it up a little bit higher on my slide.
| | 03:17 | Okay, so far so good. Let's enter
some numbers now. So I'm going to
| | 03:22 | click on this cell here next to
Training. I'm going to put in 237, just like that.
| | 03:29 | At the Main conference,
let me add 867, good.
| | 03:35 | We will get a Total down there momentarily.
Let's put in a dollar amount for this now.
| | 03:40 | You can see that as I enter
the dollar amounts here, I don't need to
| | 03:43 | put in the dollar sign because I can
choose the actual formatting of
| | 03:47 | the numbers that I put in, in a moment.
So I'm just going to put in a value and
| | 03:53 | for the Main event, like so. We'll leave
this blank for now, knowing that we could
| | 04:00 | total this up ourselves, but we can
also have it done automatically.
| | 04:03 | So if these numbers actually change, the
totals will change automatically as well.
| | 04:08 | Okay, so this is just a number. It's
a quantity but this is a dollar amount
| | 04:12 | over here and so is this. So I'm going
to highlight both of these cells and
| | 04:15 | I'm going to format these now. So to format
the actual type of data that's going in there,
| | 04:20 | I'm going to come up to the Format
button. You can see Cell Format right
| | 04:25 | at the top. It's selected as Automatic.
| | 04:27 | I am going to click on that and you
can see I have got some choices here.
| | 04:30 | Number or Currency, there is Percentage.
Date and Time is a number format.
| | 04:36 | Fraction, Scientific, and there is
Text down at the bottom. This is going
| | 04:39 | to be Currency. So see what happens.
Automatically I get dollar signs and
| | 04:43 | decimal places. The symbol that we are
using by default is the dollar sign,
| | 04:48 | the U.S. Dollar sign, but we have got
lots to choose from. We can see them all
| | 04:52 | listed here. I'm going to
leave it as the U.S. Dollar.
| | 04:55 | The decimal places, I don't need them.
I'm going to knock it down to 0.
| | 04:59 | That fits better in the cell anyway.
A thousands separator is showing up there.
| | 05:04 | Without that, you can see it's a
little harder to read. So I'm going to leave
| | 05:06 | that in there. We also have an
Accounting style, which spreads out some space
| | 05:11 | between the dollar sign and the
actual number. I don't need that.
| | 05:16 | Then you can see that we've also
got next to Decimals here, -100.
| | 05:20 | Negative numbers will show up with a minus
sign, in red, in brackets, or in red and
| | 05:26 | brackets, if we wanted to. We don't
expect any negative, so we'll just leave
| | 05:30 | the default selected
which is to show a minus sign.
| | 05:33 | We also have some conditional formatting.
This is kind of cool. For example,
| | 05:37 | if we want any thing that's over 90,000
to stand out. Maybe that was our target
| | 05:41 | and if we beat it, it should show up as
a different color perhaps. Then we can
| | 05:45 | setup some rules. So I'm going to do
that here with this cell selected and
| | 05:50 | I'm going to go over to my Show Rules.
I'm going to turn this on first by clicking
| | 05:54 | Conditional Format.
| | 05:55 | Show Rules. I'm going to click Choose
a rule. I'm going to say Greater than.
| | 06:00 | Actually, Greater than or equal to and
I'm going type in 90,000. Now I can choose
| | 06:07 | to change the Fill Color. I'm not
going to. I'm going to choose to change
| | 06:11 | the Text Color. You can see automatically
it turned red back there. I can change
| | 06:15 | that color to something different,
maybe something a little brighter. There we go.
| | 06:19 | I close up my Colors palette.
I'm going to close this up and leave that on.
| | 06:25 | You can see that looks very different.
| | 06:26 | Now if I came in here and typed in 89,000
and press my Tab key, it doesn't show up
| | 06:33 | in pink because it doesn't meet
that condition. So let's do 97,000.
| | 06:43 | I'm not going to press Enter. That adds
a new line. Tab actually locks it in.
| | 06:46 | You can see I have got my brand
new condition working well here.
| | 06:52 | So conditional formatting is an
option. Wrapping text in the cell,
| | 06:55 | it's automatically going to wrap around in
the cell to fit the content. So it's not
| | 07:00 | going to go past the borders, it's
going to wrap around and go down.
| | 07:03 | And if it's automatically going to adjust the
size of your cell, as we saw in the previous lesson,
| | 07:09 | then you are going to end up
with different sized cells in your table.
| | 07:12 | So that's a little bit of formatting.
Let's go back to our Table button here now.
| | 07:16 | Let's say just down here that
this grand total and this grand total,
| | 07:21 | we don't actually want to see the borders
down here, just the numbers. So we want
| | 07:24 | to change the borders for those
cells only. You can see we have got
| | 07:28 | Cell Borders here for the left, and the
middle, the right, here is our bottom one,
| | 07:32 | here is our top one, inside selected
cells, and around the outside of selected cells.
| | 07:38 | I am going to change the bottom one
for both of these. I'm going to click on that
| | 07:42 | and I'm going to choose from here,
None. That's just going to disappear.
| | 07:47 | I'm also going to change the right
hand cells for both of these to None.
| | 07:55 | Same thing for this one. I'm going to
click out here to show you the final product.
| | 08:04 | Now the table still has cells here,
you just don't see the borders.
| | 08:07 | So it doesn't look like a rectangular table,
but there are cells in here that we can type in.
| | 08:12 | You can see they get
highlighted when I click on them.
| | 08:14 | The other thing we can do is
setup a cell background. I'm going to
| | 08:17 | click-and-drag over these two cells
again. None is selected by default
| | 08:20 | but I can choose to put in a color. I can
choose the color from here. I'm going to go
| | 08:27 | for light pink. That's maybe a little
bit too much. Let's go for a light gray,
| | 08:32 | there we go.
| | 08:34 | Alternating Row Color, we talked
about it as well in the previous lesson.
| | 08:37 | You can turn that on here. You could
also go to a Gradient Fill, where you can
| | 08:40 | choose a couple of different colors.
So I'm going to choose my top color to be darker,
| | 08:47 | my lower color to be a little
bit lighter. Here we go. That's good
| | 08:52 | right there. I can choose the
angle of that gradient as well.
| | 08:56 | As soon as I do that, you can start
to see the line between the two.
| | 09:00 | So I'm going to leave this at, clicking
the arrow straight down, 270. All right,
| | 09:06 | let's close that up. De-select the table
by clicking outside of it. We are ready now
| | 09:12 | to put in some calculations here for
these two cells. They are going to add up
| | 09:16 | the number of attendants as well as
the revenues. We'll do that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using table calculations| 00:00 | In the last couple of lessons as we
built our first table and did some
| | 00:03 | formatting with the various cells in
our table, we also entered some data.
| | 00:08 | You can see we entered some text in here.
We entered some numbers for the number of
| | 00:11 | people attending our conference for
training and the main conference itself.
| | 00:16 | We also put in some numbers, some values
here. You can see one of the values is
| | 00:21 | colored automatically. We set up a rule
for that, a condition, and it's working
| | 00:26 | beautifully for us. Now all we need
to do is add up these numbers to get a
| | 00:29 | total down at the bottom.
| | 00:31 | So we are going to work with
calculations in this lesson. If you haven't been
| | 00:35 | following along in building this
table with me, and you have jumped to this lesson
| | 00:38 | and you have got the Exercise
Files, you can go in there and open up
| | 00:41 | UC3 and then click on slide
number 4 to get all caught up.
| | 00:46 | So let's start down here under our
first column here, where we have got
| | 00:49 | the number of people attending our
conference. So one click selects the table,
| | 00:53 | another click selects the cell. This
is where we want to put the formula.
| | 00:57 | So we need to make sure that the Table
Inspector is open. So I'm going to go up to
| | 01:01 | Inspector, make sure Table is selected.
Then down below, we'll click on
| | 01:05 | the Table button itself.
| | 01:07 | So here is where we did all of our
formatting, worked with our borders, sized
| | 01:11 | our table, and so on. When we go to
the Format button, we have an opportunity
| | 01:16 | here to put in something called a
Quick Formula. Now notice the Quick Formula
| | 01:20 | is set to None by default. So there is
nothing showing up in those cells.
| | 01:24 | When I click this button though,
I have got some quick formulas.
| | 01:27 | So I can get quick Totals or Sums,
Averages, find out what the minimum or
| | 01:32 | maximum numbers are, account and
then we have also got the Products or
| | 01:36 | multiplication. But down below, we have
also got the Formula Editor. So when
| | 01:40 | we get good with this, we can go in
and start entering our own formulas.
| | 01:44 | I am going to enter sum by click Sum.
You can see what happens down here.
| | 01:49 | Keynote is very smart. It knows there
is no numbers over here to the left or
| | 01:52 | the right. There are some numbers
above. So it's going to total those up to
| | 01:56 | give us our total.
| | 01:56 | Now I can come over here and do the
exact same thing or I can copy this.
| | 02:02 | You will notice in the bottom-right corner
there is a little white dot here and
| | 02:06 | when I move my mouse over it,
it turns into a plus sign, which means
| | 02:09 | I can click-and-drag to the right to copy
that formula over to the right. It keeps
| | 02:13 | the formatting of the column above,
like we said earlier. So when I click off
| | 02:18 | the table, I see the grand total.
| | 02:20 | All right, I'm going to click in this
cell here and delete that. Click here and
| | 02:25 | delete that one as well. Now we are
going to take it a step further.
| | 02:28 | So I'm going to delete the values here and
here. So just clicking in the cell, hitting
| | 02:34 | delete on the keyboard removes them.
I'm going to insert a new column here.
| | 02:37 | So you remember how to insert a new
column? Go back to Table here in our Table
| | 02:41 | Inspector, Edit Rows & Columns, click
the menu. We are going to add a column
| | 02:46 | before our selected cell, so Add
Column Before. All right, I'm going to move
| | 02:51 | this up and over a little bit and I'm
going to temporarily move my table.
| | 02:55 | So I'm going to click outside the table,
click on the table once and drag it over
| | 02:59 | to the right, so we can see the
contents. I'm going to put dollars up here.
| | 03:06 | Here I'm just going to type in Total.
| | 03:09 | So what we are going to do is put in
the unit cost. I'm going to maybe type in
| | 03:14 | Unit beside here. I'm going to double-
click to get inside and type Unit.
| | 03:19 | Over here I'm going to click twice and
put in Total $. There we go. So instead of
| | 03:25 | coming up with our own number, why
don't we put in, we have got the number of
| | 03:28 | people attending, put in the unit cost.
In other words, what we charge each person
| | 03:33 | to get a total.
| | 03:34 | So for the training, I'm going to put
in $150. I'm going to move down to the
| | 03:40 | next one here and for the Main event--
you can see the dollars is showing up,
| | 03:44 | because that's what was there before.
For the Main event, this is a little more
| | 03:47 | expensive. It's going to be $300. I'm
going to hit Tab to move over to the next cell.
| | 03:53 | It keeps that formatting as well.
Because we inserted the column before
| | 03:57 | what was already there, we keep the
same formatting, in this case, dollar amount.
| | 04:01 | Next I'm going to put those vertical
bars back in and back in at the bottom
| | 04:06 | as well. So again, I'm going to highlight
all three and I'm going to go over here.
| | 04:10 | I'm going to put all of the
inside bars in there. I'm going to choose a
| | 04:17 | thin line. Actually, a little thicker
than thin, and we want one at the bottom
| | 04:22 | as well for each of those and at
the right. That fills them all in.
| | 04:29 | Let's get the bottom one, set to that,
bottom one is set to straight line.
| | 04:37 | We'll de-select to see what that
looks like. Okay, that's good.
| | 04:39 | So we have got the shading, but now
we have separated these, because we are
| | 04:42 | getting a little bit more intense with
the numbers that we are putting in our
| | 04:46 | columns. So in this case, the total
over here in this cell, I'm going to click
| | 04:51 | a second time to get in there, is going
to be the number times the unit cost
| | 04:56 | to give us a grand total. So here is
different kind of formula that I want to enter here.
| | 05:00 | So back I go to the Format button and
I'm going to put in an actual formula,
| | 05:06 | a Quick Formula, which in this case is
going to be the Product. So as Keynote is
| | 05:10 | smart enough to figure out it needs to
take the numbers on the left? You bet.
| | 05:14 | So it takes this times this to give me this.
| | 05:18 | Now of course, I can double check on
that at any time by going into that
| | 05:21 | Formula Editor I was talking about.
Before I go in there though, just so you know,
| | 05:25 | each column is labeled as is
each row. We don't see it right now, but
| | 05:31 | each row is given a number, each
column is given a letter. So when
| | 05:36 | I double-click on a cell that has a
formula in it, you can see that my little
| | 05:40 | formula opens up here.
| | 05:43 | It's got a formula in there that starts
with an equal sign. That's how Keynote
| | 05:46 | knows this is a formula. Product and
then in brackets the cells that are being
| | 05:51 | multiplied. In this case it's B3:D3.
Now it's not really right. There happens
| | 05:58 | to be text in B3. Notice that I have
got column headings, A, B, C, D, E.
| | 06:03 | There is my row headings, 1 through 5.
Really, I need this to be C times D,
| | 06:09 | or the product of C and D.
| | 06:11 | So I'm going to change my B3 here to
a C, just like that. Notice that it's
| | 06:18 | these two cells now that get highlighted.
So I'm going to accept those changes
| | 06:22 | by clicking the green arrow, check mark,
and I have got my brand new formula.
| | 06:27 | Now just like we did with our sums,
we can go to the bottom-right corner.
| | 06:31 | When we see the plus sign, we can
drag this down, just like so.
| | 06:36 | So now the formula that's appearing
here is actually this cell times this cell.
| | 06:41 | It's relative addressing. In other words,
since we have moved the formula down here,
| | 06:44 | it's taking these numbers,
and double-clicking will show me that
| | 06:48 | it's C4 and D4, perfect. I'm going to
accept those changes. We are going to
| | 06:53 | click down here.
| | 06:54 | All right, so we can still get the
total numbers and we don't really need
| | 06:59 | the total units, but we do want a grand
total. In fact, I don't need to add these up.
| | 07:05 | So what I'm going to do is actually
put in my word Total over here and
| | 07:10 | I'm going to format all of these cells the
same. So the first thing I'm going to do
| | 07:14 | is just click-and-drag over these
three and I'm going to merge them.
| | 07:17 | So I'm going to go back to Table,
I could have right-clicked but
| | 07:21 | I'm going down here to Merge Cells.
So right away, you see the formatting has
| | 07:27 | changed to take on the first cell, which
was just black. In here, my text is centered.
| | 07:31 | I don't want it centered,
so I'm going to come up to
| | 07:34 | my Text Inspector and Right
Alignment. That looks better.
| | 07:39 | In fact, I'm going to click in here
and type in Grand Total. There we go.
| | 07:45 | So down here I actually want that sum,
don't I? I can go back to Table Inspector,
| | 07:52 | back to the Format button. I'm going
to come down here and choose the Sum formula.
| | 07:58 | Look what happens. I get a 0.
Why do you think that is? Well,
| | 08:02 | each of these formulas is taking numbers to
the left. So Keynote automatically here in
| | 08:07 | this cell is looking for numbers on
the left. There aren't any, so I see a 0.
| | 08:11 | Once again, I need to edit that formula.
Now that I know that I have got column
| | 08:15 | labels and row labels, it's not so
hard. I'll double-click and notice what
| | 08:20 | it's trying to do here. It's B through D,
but actually what I want is to take that out,
| | 08:27 | and in brackets I really want E3,
and I want that to go to E4.
| | 08:39 | And I add some brackets. Here we go.
We need the colon. When I click the check mark,
| | 08:47 | I'll see the brand new total. It's a
grand total, which totals up these two numbers.
| | 08:51 | So here is a product and here
is a product, but down here is a sum.
| | 08:57 | Now I might want to do some color
coding with that as well. Remember we have
| | 09:01 | got our conditional formatting that we
can apply. So here if we reach 300,000,
| | 09:06 | let's say that was our target, then
we'll have it turn a different color.
| | 09:09 | Let me show you something a step beyond
what we looked at in the previous lesson though.
| | 09:13 | I am going to turn on the Conditional
Formatting and Show Rules. Here we are
| | 09:18 | going to choose the rule. In this case,
I'm going to say Greater than or equal to.
| | 09:23 | I'm going to type in 300,000, like so.
I don't want to change the Fill but
| | 09:30 | I do want to change the Text Color to
that pink. But what if it's less than?
| | 09:34 | I might want it to be a different color.
Actually, if it's going to be greater than
| | 09:38 | or equal to 300,000, that should
be some shade of green I think.
| | 09:42 | There we go. I'm going to
move this out of the way.
| | 09:46 | I want another condition here set. So
I can go to the plus sign to add a new one.
| | 09:51 | Notice that Greater than or equal
to shows up by default, but I'm going to
| | 09:55 | change that to Less than. I'm going to
put in the same number and I'm going to
| | 10:03 | change that so that the text color does
turn that red color. So we are in the red.
| | 10:08 | I'm going to close up my Colors
palette and I'm going to close up
| | 10:13 | my Conditional Formatting dialog.
| | 10:15 | I am going to click outside the table
to see the end result. Notice I'm getting
| | 10:19 | a little bit cut off here. These
numbers are getting a little bit big.
| | 10:23 | So I'm going to click in the table itself,
and I'm just going to stretch it out just a
| | 10:28 | little bit. You can see it's stretching
all of my cells. That way it kind of stays
| | 10:31 | proportional until I have got enough
space that I'm happy. Good, now I can move it
| | 10:36 | into the center where
it belongs, right there.
| | 10:39 | There's just one more thing that I
think we should do and that's test out
| | 10:42 | our conditional formatting. Now we can see
it's actually working because our number
| | 10:46 | down at the bottom for grand total
is appearing in that kind of dark pink color.
| | 10:50 | That's because our number is
coming out below 300,000. So we said,
| | 10:55 | if a number was 300,000, it should show
up in this color. If it was 300,000 or more,
| | 11:00 | it should show up in
green. So let's test that out.
| | 11:02 | Because our table has a lot of
automation built into it using the formulas,
| | 11:07 | that means we can come over to the
numbers used in those formulas and change them
| | 11:10 | and see those results instantaneously.
So I'm going to click once on the table,
| | 11:14 | once on the cell for Main. I'm going
to change the number from 867 to 1000.
| | 11:20 | Watch what happens when I hit
my Tab key. Well, my total has changed
| | 11:25 | automatically for me, because there is
a formula there. Look what's happened
| | 11:28 | down below in the grand total. It's gone
over 300,000 now so it does appear in green.
| | 11:34 | Everything is working nicely.
| | 11:36 | I am going to come back to my 1000
number and change that back to 867, hit Tab.
| | 11:42 | It goes back down below 300,000,
and turns that reddish pink.
| | 11:48 | So everything is working nicely.
That covers calculations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting tables| 00:00 | If you have been following along in
the last few lessons as we built a table
| | 00:03 | here on a slide in our Keynote
presentation, you know that we can create rows
| | 00:09 | and columns, we can enter data, numbers,
and format those numbers to appear a
| | 00:13 | certain way such as a currency
formatting or just an automatic regular number
| | 00:17 | formatting. We also have the ability to
format the cells, so we can put in some
| | 00:21 | shading and some conditional
formatting as well, like we did.
| | 00:25 | Now we are going to talk about the
table as a whole and formatting it as an object,
| | 00:29 | like any other object we would
format in Keynote. So the first thing
| | 00:33 | you will need to do, if you have got
Exercise Files and you haven't been
| | 00:36 | following along, is to open up UC4,
User Conference 4 is what that stands for,
| | 00:42 | and jump to slide number 4 by clicking
on over here in your navigation pane.
| | 00:47 | So here is our User Conference 2007 table.
You can see we have got the data in there.
| | 00:52 | We are going to do a little
formatting now with the table itself.
| | 00:55 | So we're going to click once on the table.
That selects the table, like any other object,
| | 01:00 | a shape, an image, whatever.
When we go up to our Inspector icon and
| | 01:05 | switch to the Graphic Inspector, we
can now do things with this table that
| | 01:10 | we could do with other graphics in Keynote.
| | 01:12 | For example, change the Fill.
Currently, it's set to None. We can see right
| | 01:16 | through some of these cells. We do
have a row header and a column header that
| | 01:21 | are formatted for us, but we can go
in here to Fill and choose perhaps
| | 01:25 | a Color Fill. Of course, we want to
change the color from white, because we can't
| | 01:29 | see any of the data. Then you can
decide how to want to choose those colors.
| | 01:35 | Some of those are pretty wild.
| | 01:38 | We can also go to a Gradient Fill,
which allows us to choose two different
| | 01:42 | colors, blending from one to another.
If we go back to Image Fill, I like this one.
| | 01:49 | From my Pictures folder here I
have got the images you have in your
| | 01:53 | Exercise Files. I'm going to take my
ConfCenter here. Click Open to send that
| | 01:58 | into the background. So I'm going to
close up my Colors palette here for a second.
| | 02:03 | I'm going to move this table
over where you can see it, because
| | 02:06 | the image is being scaled to fit right now.
| | 02:08 | So it will reach the borders at the
top and the bottom, but you can see the
| | 02:11 | image doesn't actually reach all the
way to the left and the right. So I have
| | 02:14 | some options here. I can stretch that
out, or I can zoom in until it's scaled
| | 02:19 | to fill the entire table. So like I said,
Scale to Fit is selected, but we can
| | 02:24 | come to this button here, choose Scale
to Fill, you can see how we zoom in.
| | 02:28 | so it fills the entire table. The only
part we can't see down here is where we put
| | 02:32 | in our Gradient Fill for a specific
cell. We have some conditional formatting
| | 02:36 | here as well. So this number
really stands out. I'm happy with that.
| | 02:40 | The other option is to stretch it. So
again, we see the top and bottom and then
| | 02:45 | it stretches it to fill the width. So
it might distort your image a little too much.
| | 02:49 | If you don't like that, go back
to Scale to Fill. Original Size, that's
| | 02:55 | the original size of the image. You can see
it's a higher resolution that we're using here.
| | 02:59 | So we are way zoomed in,
I don't like that one at all.
| | 03:03 | Tiling wouldn't apply, but if we had a tiny
image, it could be tiled going left to right,
| | 03:07 | top to bottom, throughout our table.
| | 03:09 | So I'm going to go back to Scale to
Fill. That one works well for this
| | 03:12 | particular table. You can also
adjust stroke widths and styles.
| | 03:17 | The stroke would be the lines we see around
the outside of the table and around each of
| | 03:22 | the cells. You can see if line is selected.
The only other choice is to have
| | 03:26 | nothing there, which makes it very hard
to read. So I'm going to put those back.
| | 03:31 | Then we might want to do things like
change the thickness and maybe even the
| | 03:34 | color of those lines. So if I come to
the color well here, and choose something
| | 03:38 | like black, that might be easier to
look at. I might want to format the text as well.
| | 03:43 | In this case, numbers and text.
I'm going to close up my Colors palette,
| | 03:48 | and just bump those up a little bit.
In fact, I'm going to change the color
| | 03:53 | because the black is blending in with
the back of the slide here. So I'm going
| | 03:56 | to come in here, choose
something that we'll be able to see.
| | 04:00 | Maybe I'll go to another option for
choosing colors. Let's go over to the
| | 04:08 | color wheel. Let's make that a little
bit darker. There we go. I'll close up
| | 04:15 | my Colors palette. Another option
would be to change the actual shadow.
| | 04:20 | Now there's no end points when we are
talking about a closed shape like a table,
| | 04:24 | but we can add a shadow.
| | 04:25 | When we click the shadow, you can see
there is a bit of a shadow, the default
| | 04:28 | color being that yellowish color
around the outside, but I can change things,
| | 04:33 | like the angle. I want to go in the
other way, decrease that Offset by bringing
| | 04:38 | this number down, change the color
by clicking the color well. I'll go to
| | 04:44 | a bluer color. All right, that's nice.
The Blur, I'm going to drop it down too,
| | 04:52 | so it's not as drastic. The Opacity,
I'm actually going to bump that up
| | 05:00 | to right about 89. That looks good.
| | 05:03 | The Opacity setting you see down here
is for the entire table. Eventually,
| | 05:07 | the table will disappear if we go all
the way to the left, but we can adjust it.
| | 05:11 | I'm going to leave it at 100% in this
case and close up my Colors palette.
| | 05:16 | All right, now this particular object
that we are formatting using our Graphic
| | 05:21 | Inspector can also be formatted for the
text that appears inside it, or in this case,
| | 05:26 | the data. So I'm going to go up
to my Text Inspector. Now by default,
| | 05:31 | with no text or cell selected,
whatever I choose here is actually going to
| | 05:36 | apply to all of my text.
You can see why it is selected.
| | 05:39 | So if I come in here and choose
something like black, you can see the data now
| | 05:45 | changes for the entire contents of my
table, except for one cell where we set up
| | 05:49 | conditional formatting. We wanted it to
show up in red, if the number was below a
| | 05:53 | certain value, in this case, 300,000.
I'm going to change the color maybe to
| | 06:00 | a color that matches our border. There we go.
| | 06:02 | All right, probably white was the best.
So with the color selected up here,
| | 06:08 | I'm going to change it back to white.
Then I might want to make it change to
| | 06:12 | that image in the background. So back we
go up to our Graphics Inspector and you can see
| | 06:19 | we have got the image here selected.
Maybe we just want to change the Image
| | 06:25 | Fill to a Tinted Image Fill.
| | 06:29 | In this case, you can see the tinting
that is selected by default. Of course,
| | 06:32 | I can click on that to choose a
different tinting, but more importantly,
| | 06:37 | I can adjust the Opacity, if I wanted to,
of that tint, something that makes the image
| | 06:45 | less important and the data more
important. There we go. So we'll close that up.
| | 06:54 | Now I'm going to de-select the table,
close up my Graphic Inspector, and move
| | 07:00 | my table into position here. There is
the center. Now if I want to make changes
| | 07:05 | to specific cells, we can select
those cells. I don't like this line coming
| | 07:10 | across here, so I'm going to click
inside my table and then I click-and-drag
| | 07:14 | from this cell down to this one or
from this one up so they are both selected.
| | 07:18 | In this case, I do want the
Inspector back, but this time,
| | 07:22 | we're going to our Table Inspector. From
the Edit Rows & Columns, we want to merge
| | 07:27 | those cells together. So the
image still shows in from behind.
| | 07:31 | You can see there is a little bit of
formatting, because this is a column header.
| | 07:35 | Same thing goes for our row
header at the top. We can see the image
| | 07:41 | through there, but there is a little
bit of formatting in these cells because
| | 07:44 | they are headers.
| | 07:45 | All right, how about the text? I'm
going to click in this cell here and go up
| | 07:51 | to my Text Inspector. I think I might
like to make a couple of changes here.
| | 07:55 | In fact, everything here is okay. The
alignment is okay. I might just want it to
| | 08:01 | be aligned at the bottom of the cell.
So I'm going to click that one there.
| | 08:04 | Now I want to make some changes to
the actual text itself. So I'm going to
| | 08:07 | close this up and I'm going to open
up my Fonts palette. There we go.
| | 08:14 | You can see the currently selected Collection
is set to Fun. If I want to change that font,
| | 08:19 | then I'm going to move this out of the way
so we can see those changes happening.
| | 08:23 | That's way too much. Not bad.
I think we need a more classic look actually.
| | 08:31 | So I'm just going to go over here to
the Classic collection and try some of these.
| | 08:38 | Once I have found the one that I like,
I can make some changes by using
| | 08:42 | some of the typeface options like
Regular or Bold. I like the Bold. Of course,
| | 08:47 | I can change the Size over here as
well, either typing it in, using the scrollbar,
| | 08:52 | or even the slider. That's a
good size there. I can see that
| | 08:57 | that's actually going to fill the entire
cell almost. Good, so I'll close that up.
| | 09:03 | De-select by clicking outside the table.
| | 09:05 | A lot of formatting may not be ideal,
but we can play around with all kinds
| | 09:10 | of formatting, formatting the cells,
the text in those cells and of course,
| | 09:14 | the entire table, changing
backgrounds and shadows and so on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About charts| 00:00 | No matter how hard we try to create
some visual interest for the data that
| | 00:04 | we enter into a table in our presentation,
really a table is just for organizing
| | 00:09 | that data in the rows and columns to
make it easy to read. They are still
| | 00:12 | numbers. It's still text. If we want a
visual or graphical representation of
| | 00:17 | this data, we should be working with a
chart and that's what we are going to
| | 00:21 | do in this lesson.
| | 00:22 | So if you have been following along,
we are still working with our User
| | 00:25 | Conference presentation here from the
previous lesson where we formatted our chart.
| | 00:29 | If you are jumping to this
lesson and you have got the Exercise Files,
| | 00:33 | you can open up one called UC5, short
for User Conference 5, and we are all
| | 00:38 | going to jump to slide number 5 now,
where we have got a title 2007 Attendance Figures,
| | 00:44 | but nothing down below.
| | 00:46 | So our previous slide, we displayed
those figures in a table. Now we are going
| | 00:49 | to display it in a graphical
representation. We are going to insert a chart.
| | 00:54 | Now there are a couple of different
ways to insert a chart into Keynote. We can
| | 00:58 | go up to out Chart dropdown here. And
it is a dropdown, so here is where we can
| | 01:03 | choose from different styles of bar
graphs. You can see two-dimensional,
| | 01:08 | three-dimensional, we have got
stacking bars, horizontal bars, horizontal
| | 01:12 | stacking bars, both in two dimensions
and three dimensions. We have also got
| | 01:16 | line graphs. We have got some
area graphs, pie charts and so on.
| | 01:20 | So if you know exactly what you are
looking for, you can get a good head start
| | 01:25 | here by selecting it from the dropdown.
Then you don't have to go back and do
| | 01:29 | the formatting later.
| | 01:30 | You can also insert charts from the
Insert menu. So when you go up to Insert
| | 01:34 | you will notice that you have to
click on Chart, which will automatically
| | 01:39 | insert a two-dimensional bar graph for
you. So that two-dimensional bar graph
| | 01:44 | we see as chart number 1 on our dropdown,
that's what you will create by going
| | 01:49 | up to your Insert menu and
selecting Chart from here.
| | 01:53 | So let's just skip a step and
we'll go up to Charts. We know we want
| | 01:56 | three-dimensions. So we are going
to go to the bar graph but choose the
| | 01:59 | three-dimensional one on the right here.
And a few things will happen by default.
| | 02:04 | First of all, the chart will show up,
in this case our three-dimensional bar
| | 02:08 | graph. You can see the formatting. It
looks like stacks of word. We have also
| | 02:12 | got our Chart Data Editor where we are
going to update our data. Then we have
| | 02:17 | got the Chart Inspector as well for
adjusting the look and feel of our chart.
| | 02:22 | So before we start working with this
chart and updating it with our data, it's
| | 02:27 | important that we get familiar with the
various components of a chart and we'll
| | 02:30 | look at that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Elements of a chart| 00:00 | Before we begin working with our chart
and modifying the data in that chart and
| | 00:05 | changing the formatting and changing
the chart type even, I'd like to cover
| | 00:10 | some of the basics of a chart, some
of the terminology that you need to be
| | 00:14 | comfortable with as well as some of
the components that make up any graph or
| | 00:18 | chart in Keynote.
| | 00:20 | So the first thing that's happened here,
you can see when we inserted our brand
| | 00:24 | new chart in the previous lesson, and
by the way, if you are skipping to this
| | 00:27 | lesson, we are still using UC5. If
you have got the Exercise Files, you can
| | 00:31 | open that up. I just come to the Chart
dropdown here and select the second one
| | 00:35 | back here, which is our 3-D bar graph.
| | 00:38 | This is what we get by default. So
the bar graph is created for us based on
| | 00:42 | some sampled data. We are going to
close up the Chart Data Editor and come back
| | 00:46 | to that later. And then I want you to
be able to see this. First of all, there
| | 00:49 | is something at the top, an object up
here that's separate from the chart down
| | 00:54 | below. So we can move both of these
objects around. This is what we call our
| | 00:58 | legend and without the legend, we
really wouldn't have any idea what's going on
| | 01:02 | in our chart down below.
| | 01:04 | I am going to stretch that out and
I'm going to hold down my Shift key so I
| | 01:07 | keep the proportions of this chart. So
you can see it a little better. There we go.
| | 01:11 | Let's start with the legend. Now
the legend of course can be moved around.
| | 01:14 | If I want the legend off to the side,
I can put it there, but the legend is
| | 01:18 | telling me a little bit about what
I'm seeing here in the actual bar graph.
| | 01:22 | Notice the different color codes.
| | 01:24 | Now in this case, we are using
different types of wood, it would appear by
| | 01:28 | default. We have got different colors
or stains for that wood. And you can see
| | 01:32 | one of them is called Region 1 and the
other is Region 2. They are represented
| | 01:37 | by the different bars here.
| | 01:38 | Now what we are looking at is actual
values. You can see each bar represents a
| | 01:43 | different value in what we call a
Data Series. So the legend is telling us
| | 01:48 | about the Data Series. There is two
series, Region 1 and Region 2 and it's a
| | 01:53 | series because there are values in the
series for 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010.
| | 01:58 | We have also got values in the second
series for Region 2, you can see, for the
| | 02:03 | same years 2007 through 2010.
| | 02:06 | So we have got a legend, we have got
Data Series and then the information
| | 02:10 | that's displayed on our graph is
making use of a couple of axes. We have got
| | 02:15 | our X axis, which goes across the
bottom here, the horizontal one. Our vertical
| | 02:20 | axis is also known as the Y axis.
| | 02:22 | Here you can see across the bottom
that we are working through time in this
| | 02:26 | case, through the various years and
going vertically up the Y axis we are
| | 02:32 | displaying values. In this case, the
values go from 0 to 100, but we really
| | 02:36 | don't know what that represents yet.
It could be quantities. It could be
| | 02:41 | dollars. It's totally up to you what
that is and of course, we can make sure
| | 02:46 | that people understand what they are
looking at by using labels and we could
| | 02:51 | use text-boxes, for example, to
explain that this is hundreds of thousands of
| | 02:55 | dollars, or thousands of dollars,
whatever we need it to be. So we'll do a
| | 02:59 | little bit of that too as we
begin working with our chart.
| | 03:02 | Of course, in the Chart Inspector, you
can see we have got, in this case, a 3D
| | 03:07 | Scene button because we have got a 3D
graph. I'm going to click on it. We have
| | 03:12 | got an Axis section to work on the X
and Y axis. Here's a bunch of things we
| | 03:16 | can do with Labels, Ticks, and Grids
and so on. Then over here is the Series
| | 03:22 | where we can work with the various
data series that I just talked about in
| | 03:25 | a bar graph.
| | 03:26 | We have got a number of other of
options to make this display exactly what
| | 03:30 | we needed to display so it's clear
and concise and it's a good graphical
| | 03:34 | representation of the data that we are
trying to get across in our presentation.
| | 03:39 | So in the next lesson, we'll dive a
little bit deeper into the various graph or
| | 03:43 | chart types that you have in Keynote.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Chart types| 00:00 | I mentioned earlier that there are a
number of different kinds of charts that you
| | 00:03 | can insert into a slide in your
keynote presentation. And choosing the right
| | 00:08 | chart type is important, and it all
depends on the type of data that you are
| | 00:12 | presenting and the point you want
to get across with that data.
| | 00:16 | Are you comparing numbers, are you
showing relationships, variances?
| | 00:21 | Anyway, we are going to look at the
different kinds of charts you have at your
| | 00:24 | disposal here in Keynote. And if you
are jumping to this lesson and you have
| | 00:28 | got the exercise files you can open up
UC6 from that folder, and you'll be all
| | 00:33 | caught up when you jump to slide number 5.
| | 00:35 | You will notice that I have got my bar
graph here selected. This is the default
| | 00:40 | graph or chart that was inserted for me,
when I went up to my Chart dropdown
| | 00:44 | here and choose a 3D bar graph.
| | 00:46 | Now you can see that my Chart
Inspector is also open. So if you don't have
| | 00:51 | that open, go to your Inspector and
select the Chart icon here to make sure
| | 00:54 | that is opened, and we don't need the
Chart Data Editor right now. So if that
| | 00:59 | is opened for you, you can close it up.
And we are going to focus in on the
| | 01:02 | different types of charts now.
| | 01:04 | So with our chart selected here, you
can actually go into our Chart Inspector,
| | 01:08 | and here you want to make sure that
series is selected. You'll notice that we
| | 01:12 | can change the chart type right from
here. There is the dropdown. And the chart
| | 01:17 | that's selected will be changed to
whatever we select here. This is what we
| | 01:21 | choose a couple of lessons ago, this
three-dimensional bar graph, and you can
| | 01:25 | see that down the right-hand side
these are all three-dimensional, except for
| | 01:28 | the last one.
| | 01:29 | On the left-hand side, we have got
those flat versions or two-dimensional
| | 01:33 | version of the exact same chart. So
we'll go through all of these, including
| | 01:36 | this last one that sits by itself.
| | 01:38 | So I'm going to switch over to this
bar graph, which is actually called a
| | 01:43 | column chart. When you go to the bars
that are horizontal, we call that a bar graph,
| | 01:47 | but I'm going to go up to this
first one and switch from 3D here over
| | 01:51 | to two-dimensional, and you
can see what happens here.
| | 01:53 | So my chart is not quite as fancy, but
the data is there. It's exact same data.
| | 01:59 | I have got the two regions. You can see
my legend down below. I'm just going to
| | 02:03 | move that down below my actual
bar graph and move this up using
| | 02:09 | the two-dimensional columns. And
I've still got my X and Y axis here.
| | 02:14 | I have got my data series, my legend
and so on. But the data is being displayed
| | 02:20 | just in a little bit different way.
So here I'm able to see the differences
| | 02:23 | between Region 1 and Region 2 over
the various years. So right away
| | 02:28 | this visual representation shows me
visually the difference between these two
| | 02:32 | regions and how they performed.
| | 02:34 | So the column or bar graphs are very
good for this. I'm going to click on that again
| | 02:39 | and go up and switch back to my
three-dimensional version of that.
| | 02:43 | Exact same data, just a different way to
look at it, kind of spice it up a little bit.
| | 02:47 | I am going to go back now to change
the chart type and show you the stacked.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to go to the two-dimensional
stacked version. So here we've got the
| | 02:56 | columns that are stacked one on top
of the other, and what that does is it
| | 03:00 | shows us the cumulative effect of the
two different data series. So we still
| | 03:05 | have Region 1 and Region 2. We get an
idea of the difference between the two.
| | 03:09 | You can see in this case Region 1 is a
smaller section than Region 2, but together
| | 03:16 | they give me this new value up here.
Same thing goes for the other years.
| | 03:21 | So I do get to see varying degree of
difference here between them, but I also
| | 03:25 | get the cumulative effect of both of
those regions stacked together in this
| | 03:30 | particular version. I'm going to
change my chart type now down to this one here.
| | 03:35 | Our bar graph is really just
the same as the vertical bars we saw a
| | 03:38 | moment ago. Some people prefer to
view this in a horizontal fashion.
| | 03:43 | And we call this our two-dimensional bar graph.
| | 03:46 | Now our Y-axis, if you look at it,
actually contains the years and our X-axis
| | 03:50 | across the bottom here is displaying the values.
| | 03:55 | Next, we'll go down to our stacking.
Horizontal bars, same idea. We get a
| | 04:03 | visual representation of the difference
between the two as well as the cumulative effect.
| | 04:08 | I am going to go over here now and
switch to the three-dimensional version of that.
| | 04:11 | You can see this looks quite a bit
different. Again I'm using this wood theme
| | 04:17 | and you can see again that I got
the stacking of the two values to give me
| | 04:21 | the total. All right, what's kind
of neat with a three-dimensional version
| | 04:25 | is that I can go to this 3D Scene
option here and use my rotation ball to
| | 04:30 | rotate this.
| | 04:32 | So if I need to tilt it, for example,
I can do that to get maybe just a better
| | 04:39 | representation of those values. That
might be good like that. You'll see this
| | 04:43 | is important when parts of the data are
missing behind other parts. So I'll go
| | 04:48 | back up to our chart type and now
we've covered our columns, our bars.
| | 04:53 | Now it's time to come down here to
the line chart or line graph. We've got
| | 04:57 | two-dimensional and three-dimensional as well.
| | 05:00 | In this case we want to see trends;
this is perfect for showing me trends.
| | 05:04 | You can see that Region 2 here was kind
of staggering, while Region 1 was on
| | 05:09 | a steady increase. So I didn't
necessarily see that from the other options.
| | 05:13 | It's the same data, but displayed differently.
And of course, we've got a 3D version
| | 05:18 | for that as well.
| | 05:19 | Let's switch now to another chart type
and we are going to come down to our
| | 05:24 | area chart. In this case a two-
dimensional one. We've got the same data
| | 05:29 | showing up here. Notice how Region 2
kind of disappears in behind Region 1.
| | 05:33 | So I can't really see that data. This
might be a good opportunity to switch to a
| | 05:37 | 3D view and rotate things around. So
I'm going to do that. I'm going to choose
| | 05:42 | my three-dimensional view. Already, I
can see the value of Region 2 in behind here.
| | 05:49 | And with the graph selected, I can go
to my 3D Scene button and rotate that
| | 05:54 | even further to get a good visual
representation of where Region 2 is finishing off.
| | 06:01 | Notice that I can also adjust the
chart depth. There is a slider here, so
| | 06:05 | I can make those thicker or thinner.
I'm getting a really good idea of the ratio
| | 06:10 | between the two. But it will always
have one piece in front of the other, so
| | 06:13 | long as one of the values increases
over one of the other regions. So in this case,
| | 06:19 | 3D is a good option.
| | 06:21 | Now we have got another option here,
where we've got the cumulative effect of
| | 06:24 | our area chart. So here we get the
ratio between the two, but we also stack them
| | 06:30 | one on top of each other to get
the cumulation effect. Same thing for
| | 06:36 | three-dimensional. Now the only one
that's kind of different in my opinion is
| | 06:42 | the pie chart, and I'm going to go
down to the two-dimensional one first.
| | 06:45 | Here you can see I've got a different
data series across the bottom. I've got
| | 06:51 | years from 2007 to 2012, so the
percentages for the different years are
| | 06:57 | displayed with different colors in
the pie. If I switch this over to
| | 07:01 | a three-dimensional view, slightly different.
Here I've got pieces of wood again showing up.
| | 07:06 | Now that's the default and
of course we can change that. But we've
| | 07:10 | also got the ability here with our 3D
Scene to rotate that around, up and down,
| | 07:16 | left and right, and if we wanted to,
we can adjust the lighting style.
| | 07:22 | We are going to do more of this.
I kind of like the glossy one, brightens
| | 07:26 | it up a little bit, and we can
adjust the chart depth as well.
| | 07:29 | Now, in this case because it's a wheel,
we are only going to use one data series.
| | 07:34 | There are no comparison between series,
just between data in the same series.
| | 07:38 | All right, the last one to look at
is the scattered chart down here.
| | 07:43 | Kind of like the line graph, but there
is no line. It's just dots, showing us
| | 07:48 | the different values over time. And you
can see the same thing here. Now this is great,
| | 07:54 | if we want to focus in on the
various values at different stages,
| | 07:58 | in this case at different times, and
compare them to the others. And as you can see,
| | 08:02 | we get a bit of a trend here,
but the line is not drawn between these
| | 08:06 | points so we can focus in
on the points themselves.
| | 08:08 | All right, I'm going to change this
back to my three-dimensional bar graph,
| | 08:12 | also known as the column. I'm going to
go to my 3D Scene here. I'm just going
| | 08:17 | to bump those up and make them a little
bit bigger, here we go. All right,
| | 08:23 | I'll deselect that. And now it's time
to start working with our own data.
| | 08:27 | Now that you got the principles and
the basics down, the different types of
| | 08:31 | charts, the different components like
a legend, and a data series, and the
| | 08:35 | different axis, it's time to enter
our own data and we are going to use
| | 08:39 | the Chart Data Editor to do that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with chart data| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to start
building our own chart now with our very
| | 00:04 | own data. As you can see from the
previous lessons, charts are built for us
| | 00:08 | based on some default data. Well, we
can go in and remove some of that data,
| | 00:12 | add to that data, of course change
that data, so it suits our needs.
| | 00:17 | So the first thing I'm going to do is
show you that I'm using UC6 from the
| | 00:20 | previous lesson, short for User
Conference 6. You can go ahead and open that
| | 00:24 | if you have got the exercise files.
We're actually going to delete what's here on
| | 00:28 | slide number 5. So clicking on the
chart itself and hitting Delete on
| | 00:32 | the keyboard removes it as well as the
legend. I'm going to close up my Chart
| | 00:37 | Inspector as well.
| | 00:38 | So here is where we want to put our
chart. I'm going to go back one slide and
| | 00:42 | we do have some data here that we
want to add. So we want to look at the
| | 00:46 | Training and the Main part of
the conference and do a comparison.
| | 00:51 | Now, this is data for 2007. Maybe we
want to compare this to data from 2006 to
| | 00:57 | see how things are going. So maybe in
this case we'll take the actual values here.
| | 01:02 | You will notice that for
Training the total was based on the number of
| | 01:06 | participants times unit cost. We don't
need to show that in the actual chart,
| | 01:10 | but we do want to show the 35,550,
and we want to show the 260,100 for
| | 01:17 | our actual Main conference.
| | 01:19 | So we'll go back to slide number 5.
Now we are going to insert a chart.
[00:01:243.82]
We'll just start with a simple chart.
Let's go to our simple column here, which is
| | 01:28 | two-dimensional. Again, we see our
Chart Data Editor show up by default.
| | 01:32 | I'm going to move that up here. The Chart
Inspector opens up already for us to
| | 01:38 | start working with our chart. Here is
our sample chart down below using the
| | 01:42 | data that we see up here in our Chart
Data Editor. As well as up here we have
| | 01:47 | got our legend. So I'm going to move
that over here, and I'm going to take the
| | 01:51 | chart and I'm going to move it down and
size it so it's a little bit easier to
| | 01:55 | look at. Size it across and
down a little bit. There we go.
| | 02:01 | So in this case you can see we have got
2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010. We have got
| | 02:07 | two series: Region 1 and Region 2. The
series are going to actually become our
| | 02:13 | Training and Main conference numbers.
| | 02:15 | So instead of Region 1 showing up here,
I might want it to say Training or
| | 02:20 | Main. So I'm going to come up here and
double-click, that highlights Region 1,
| | 02:25 | and I'm going to type in Main actually
here, and down below, double-click on
| | 02:30 | Region 2 and type in Training. Okay.
| | 02:35 | When I press Enter, that locks it in.
You can see my legend has changed but the
| | 02:38 | data hasn't changed. I really don't
need to cover data from 2007, all the way
| | 02:43 | through 2010. In fact, I don't even
need 2009 and 2010, but I'll be changing
| | 02:51 | 2007 and 2008.
| | 02:53 | So I'm going to just double-click
here and hit Delete on my keyboard. That
| | 02:57 | highlights the next one, which is 2010,
and hit Delete for that one as well.
| | 03:01 | You can see that really
simplifies my chart down below.
| | 03:04 | I am going to come over here and I'm
going to double-click on 2007, change that
| | 03:09 | to 2006. This is going to be 2007 here,
so I double-click, hit Enter, locks it in.
| | 03:18 | All right. So now I'm getting kind of
on the right track, but I do need to
| | 03:21 | change those numbers. So I'm going to
start with the 2007 numbers because I
| | 03:25 | know what they are. So for our Main,
it was 260100. That's a big number, so
| | 03:34 | when I move to the first next number,
you can see what's happening here, I have
| | 03:37 | got this huge bar, and I can't even
see the other ones, the numbers are so small.
| | 03:42 | But for Training, we actually have a
number, its 35550, and now we'll need to
| | 03:48 | make up some numbers for 2006. So
let's say in 2006, we did 188221, and for
| | 03:58 | Training we'll put in 32850,
and Enter, locks that in.
| | 04:05 | So there, we can see that we have
got a steady arise for both the Main
| | 04:09 | conference attendance as well as the
numbers for our Training that we deliver
| | 04:13 | pre and post conference. We are done
with the Chart Data Editor at this point,
| | 04:18 | so we are ready to close that up.
| | 04:20 | Now, we can go back to the Chart Data
Editor at any time by clicking the Edit
| | 04:25 | Data button here in our Chart Inspector.
So notice here that I have got Axis
| | 04:31 | and Series available to me, but it
really doesn't matter which one I choose.
| | 04:35 | I have got the Edit Data button right here,
so I can always go back to the Chart
| | 04:38 | Data Editor if I need to.
| | 04:40 | I can add new rows and columns. I can
also change the way I plot this data. So
| | 04:45 | notice that we have got the years
across the bottom and then we have got a
| | 04:49 | legend showing the color for Main
versus Training. If I change this to from row
| | 04:54 | to column, you can see what happens.
Now I have got my years up here, and I can
| | 04:58 | see Main versus Training. So I could
see the values for our Main conference
| | 05:03 | side-by-side and the values for our
Training over the two years side-by-side,
| | 05:07 | pretty close.
| | 05:09 | Switching that back, shows me now I
have got Main and Training in my legend,
| | 05:13 | now I'm seeing the exact same year
with the value side-by-side. So you always
| | 05:18 | have that option to switch it
up. I'm going to close this up.
| | 05:22 | The only other thing now would be
to spice up this chart a little bit,
| | 05:26 | formatting it, maybe even change the
chart data type. So I'm going to come to
| | 05:31 | my data types here, and I'm going to
just try some of these different ones.
| | 05:35 | Let's go to 3D, see what that
looks like. Same data, different look.
| | 05:40 | What happens if we go down to Stacking
Bar? So that gives me the accumulated
| | 05:46 | total down here.
| | 05:47 | Well, let's try a pie chart. Now
that's different. We know that's different
| | 05:51 | because there is only going to be one
Series used here, in this case you can
| | 05:55 | see the difference between 2006 and 2007.
We have got actually a bigger number
| | 06:01 | here for 2007.
| | 06:03 | But again, if I go back to Edit Data,
I can change the way it's plotted and
| | 06:08 | show Training versus Main. You can see
how small Training is compared to the
| | 06:13 | Main conference. Kind of neat.
| | 06:14 | I am going to close that up. I'm going
to go back to my 3D bar graph up here.
| | 06:23 | All right. So that covers the
different types with our very own data. Now we
| | 06:28 | have got a good idea what that's
going to look like. The next step in the
| | 06:31 | process would be to take this graph and
spice it up with some formatting. Maybe
| | 06:35 | there is some information that needs
to be displayed. To talk about these
| | 06:38 | numbers, for example, what does that
represent? Attendees or is that a dollar
| | 06:42 | amount? There's all kinds of little
formatting enhancements we can make to this
| | 06:47 | particular graph or chart, and that's
what we are going to do in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting charts| 00:00 | In this lesson, as we continue to
work with a chart that we have created in
| | 00:04 | Keynote, we are going to look at ways
to change the appearance, to format
| | 00:08 | our chart on our slide.
| | 00:10 | So you can see here, I'm
continuing to work with our User Conference
| | 00:13 | presentation. If you are jumping to
this lesson and you have got the exercise files,
| | 00:17 | you can go in there and open up
UC7 and jump to slide number 5 to get
| | 00:21 | all caught up with me.
| | 00:23 | Here we have created our column or bar
graph, it's three dimensional, and
| | 00:27 | you can see that by default I'm
getting this wood theme in here.
| | 00:30 | We are going to look at different ways
to format and change the appearance of
| | 00:35 | your bar graph, starting with our
Chart Inspector. So you want to make sure
| | 00:38 | that that is open as well. Click your
Inspector button and click on the Chart Inspector.
| | 00:43 | Now, we already know that we can go
into the Edit Data button here to get
| | 00:47 | access to the Chart Data Editor, to
make changes to the numbers. Clicking that
| | 00:51 | button hides it as well. But we also
have the Chart Colors button now, where we
| | 00:55 | can come in here and change some of
the Texture Fills, and you can see I have
| | 01:00 | got an option down here for a Fill Set
as well. Right now Classic Silk is selected.
| | 01:05 | Let's start at the top with the
Series Fill types. You can see 3D Texture
| | 01:09 | Fills, 2D Image Fills. If I
click on that, you can see these are
| | 01:13 | two-dimensional (2D) Image Fills.
These aren't actually colors; they are
| | 01:16 | pictures of colors. If I click on
Apply All, it gets applied to my three
| | 01:21 | dimensional (3D) Chart. So I can use
2D Images to combine with my 3D Chart to
| | 01:29 | give me a different effect.
| | 01:30 | I can also go to Color Fills, choose
from a different color set, and choose
| | 01:36 | Apply All to change that up. That
doesn't look too good. How about Spectrum?
| | 01:40 | That's a little bit better. You can
see I get the different color showing up.
| | 01:44 | Now, I can make changes to individual
bars as well. When I click on a bar,
| | 01:48 | you can see that it becomes selected
so I can make changes to it as well.
| | 01:53 | We'll talk about that in a minute.
| | 01:54 | Right now though, I want the entire
chart selected. I'm going to go back up
| | 01:58 | here to 3D, and I'm going to change
this from Bright Color to maybe Etched
| | 02:04 | Metal, you can see what that looks
like. You can see that they show up in -
| | 02:08 | now, this is six different series.
I'm only using two of them. When I click
| | 02:11 | Apply All, I see the change here, and
you can see that that's kind of a neat effect.
| | 02:16 | I am going to come back up, just try a
couple of others, like Marble, and Apply All.
| | 02:22 | Kind of neat too. How about
Stained Wood? That's different than the wood
| | 02:31 | we have been using. You can see it
has got an actual stain applied to it.
| | 02:35 | So I'm going to change this back now to,
let's see, what Fun looks like, and
| | 02:40 | click Apply All. It's very colorful and
fun, it stands out. I'm going to leave
| | 02:44 | it at that one as we continue
on. So that's my Chart Colors.
| | 02:48 | I can close that up, and I have still
got the Chart Inspector open. I also have
| | 02:51 | options to show the legend or not.
The legend is still there, even when
| | 02:58 | I'm hiding it. I can bring it
back with a click of a checkbox.
| | 03:01 | I can show a title. Now, if I click
the Show Title checkbox here, you can see
| | 03:06 | the word Title appears, and I'll have
to change that title obviously. But it's
| | 03:10 | its own little object and you can see
right in there, the word Title appears.
| | 03:13 | Double clicking it allows me to come
inside and actually make changes to it.
| | 03:19 | But if I don't want the Title, I just
turn it off here. I don't really need it.
| | 03:22 | I have got the title for my
slide that kind of says it all.
| | 03:25 | Now, down below I have got Series
selected right now. So you can see down below
| | 03:30 | with my chart not selected, there is
not much I can do, but if I click on the
| | 03:33 | chart itself to select it. I'm going to
click off and click on again. There we go.
| | 03:39 | I can now change the Data Point
Settings, and you can see here, I can
| | 03:44 | choose to Show Value. That's all that's
available for this particular type of chart.
| | 03:48 | Series Name, Show Pie Values when I'm
using pie charts and that kind of stuff,
| | 03:52 | but Show Value is kind of neat, because
it puts the value right in the bar. So
| | 03:56 | I don't have to try and line it up
with a line to guess. If I need exact
| | 03:59 | numbers, I can display them here by
showing the Data Point Settings. I can even
| | 04:04 | adjust the Decimal places if I
wanted to. I don't need them in this case.
| | 04:08 | I can also adjust the space between the
bars, as well as, the space between the
| | 04:12 | sets. You can see I have got a Gap
between bars. It's set at 0%; they are
| | 04:16 | touching each other. But if I want
to separate them, you can see the bars
| | 04:19 | actually get smaller with
each click of the button.
| | 04:24 | I can also increase or decrease
the space between the sets.
| | 04:28 | I'm going to leave it at 40%.
| | 04:31 | I can also make changes to the Axis as
well. Clicking Axis here allows me to
| | 04:35 | select from the X and Y Axis. You can
see, for X-Axis what's selected right now
| | 04:40 | is Show Category Labels.
| | 04:42 | Well, I can also show Series Labels
if I wanted to. So I have got Main,
| | 04:46 | Training, Main, Training, as well as
2006 and 2007. It's not either/or in this
| | 04:51 | case. I have actually turned on both.
So I'm going to turn off the Series
| | 04:55 | Labels. Leave it at 2006, 2007.
| | 04:56 | If I have Categories, I can show them
as well, but I have also Gridlines, which
| | 05:02 | is kind of neat. You can see the
lines coming down now between these two
| | 05:05 | series. So that's for the X-Axis.
| | 05:09 | Now, if we go over to the Y-Axis, turn
that off and look at this. I have got
| | 05:14 | options for Y-Axis. Now, Auto is
selected. None is an option as well. I won't
| | 05:20 | have any Y-Axis. On the left, puts it
over here on the left instead of the
| | 05:26 | right. But it was automatically put on
the right because that's a good spot for
| | 05:30 | it, using this angle in my 3D graph.
| | 05:33 | So I'm going to go back to Auto,
which actually doesn't change anything.
| | 05:37 | Now, down below I can show Values for
the Axis Formats. You can see the Steps
| | 05:41 | are set at 4, 1, 2, 3, 4. That's all I
have got. So starting at 0, I have got 4
| | 05:46 | steps. If I want to bump that up, I can.
You can see how it breaks it apart.
| | 05:50 | I can set Minimum and Maximum values as
well by clicking in here and typing in
| | 05:55 | the Minimum and the Maximum. Here I'm
setting the Maximum value displayed on
| | 05:59 | the Value Axis, which is 300,000.
That's automatically selected for me based on
| | 06:04 | my highest number.
| | 06:05 | But if I wanted to set a higher Maximum,
let's say 350,000, and I'll hit Tab to
| | 06:11 | move to the next screen. You can see
the bar seemed to shrink, that's because I
| | 06:14 | have got a higher number in here.
| | 06:16 | If I come in here and put in 270,000,
and hit Tab, you can see my bar seems to
| | 06:24 | grow a little bit as it
gets closer to the top value.
| | 06:27 | All right, with my chart selected, I
have also got numbering formats. Notice I
| | 06:31 | have got Prefixes, Separators, and
Suffixes. So the numbers that we are seeing
| | 06:35 | here, either displayed here or down
the side, Prefix is set to None, but if
| | 06:41 | this was a dollar amount, that might
come in handy. Notice they show up here in
| | 06:45 | each bar, as well as, down the
right hand side on the Y-Axis.
| | 06:49 | Do I want separators in there?
Usually with dollar amounts we do, but I can
| | 06:52 | choose from None, but
I'll leave it at the comma.
| | 06:56 | The Suffix as well. So if I wanted it
shown as a percentage or K instead of
| | 07:00 | thousands. So you can see it's
actually growing into this nice looking chart
| | 07:04 | with a little bit of formatting.
| | 07:05 | Of course, we also have those 3D
options with a 3D graph. So with the graph
| | 07:11 | selected, I can come in here, choose a
Lighting Style. The Default is there,
| | 07:15 | but if I wanted a Soft Fill, for
example, you can see the effect I get from that.
| | 07:19 | Then I can move this around by just
dragging my mouse over the rotation ball
| | 07:23 | here until I get the angle that I like.
I kind of like that right there, where
| | 07:29 | I can see the sides a little bit.
| | 07:32 | Then I can change the Chart Depth. Of
course, this is the thickness of the bars.
| | 07:35 | That's too much, that's maybe too little.
That looks good right there. Perfect!
| | 07:44 | So just a little bit of formatting can
really change the look of your chart or
| | 07:49 | your graph in this case. Have fun
playing around with, and many, many options
| | 07:54 | after you have entered your data and
you have created your chart, go in and
| | 07:58 | format, customize, and have fun with this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing chart data| 00:00 | All right, there is one more thing I
would like to discuss, when it comes to
| | 00:03 | working with charts in Keynote. That's
a scenario where you have already got
| | 00:07 | the data somewhere else, like in Excel
spreadsheet or in a Numbers spreadsheet.
| | 00:11 | There is no point in reentering that data into
the Chart Data Editor, when you've already got it.
| | 00:16 | So there are a couple of scenarios
where you could copy the data into
| | 00:19 | the Chart Data Editor and then just modify
the labels. Or in the case where you are using Numbers,
| | 00:25 | it's just as easy to create
the chart over there and copy and paste it
| | 00:28 | into Keynote. That's the scenario
we are going to look at right now.
| | 00:31 | I am still using the same presentation
from the previous lesson but if you are
| | 00:35 | jumping here and you have got the
Exercise Files, go ahead and open up UC8,
| | 00:41 | click on slide number 5 and you
will be all caught up with me.
| | 00:45 | Next we are going to add a new slide.
So I'll click the New button up here.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to add a new title. I'm going
to double-click to type in "Attendance
| | 00:54 | over the Years". There we go. Down
below is where that chart is going to go. So
| | 00:58 | I'm going to click where the bulleted
list placeholder is and just hit Delete
| | 01:01 | to remove it.
| | 01:02 | Now I'm going to switch over to Numbers.
Now in the Exercise Files is a Numbers
| | 01:07 | spreadsheet called ConfData. I have
copied it here on to my Desktop. I'm going
| | 01:11 | to double-click it, which is going
to launch Numbers and display that
| | 01:14 | spreadsheet, very simple stuff.
| | 01:16 | I am going to highlight all of this,
including the labels that we see across
| | 01:20 | the top and down the left. What I don't
want is this blank cell here. I'm going
| | 01:25 | to hold down my Command key and click
on cell A1, which de-selects it. So now
| | 01:29 | it's kind of a non-contiguous set of
selected cells. That's what I want to copy
| | 01:34 | though. I could go up to Edit and then
Copy and the Paste this into my Chart
| | 01:40 | Data Editor.
| | 01:41 | The other option is to take this and
create a chart right here. Notice that
| | 01:44 | it's the same icon we saw in Keynote.
It's the same options. When we click it,
| | 01:49 | you can select from the different bars,
and columns, and areas, and lines and
| | 01:53 | pies, and everything. So I'm going to
go to a 3-D column right here. It's going
| | 01:58 | to create my chart for me.
| | 02:00 | You can see it's got the legend down
below. It's got the different data series.
| | 02:04 | It's even got a title up here, which
is my Chart 5. I have got all the same
| | 02:09 | options that I saw in Keynote in the
Chart Inspector. So here in the 3D Scene,
| | 02:15 | notice for the Axis as well. I don't
want to show the title. I'm going to turn
| | 02:19 | that off, I don't need it. I
could add it though, if I want to.
| | 02:23 | Once I have got what I'm looking for
and it's already selected, I can just go
| | 02:27 | up to Edit and Copy. I'm going to hide
Numbers. It takes me back to my slide
| | 02:35 | presentation here in Keynote, where I
can go up to Edit and Paste. Now before I
| | 02:41 | paste, I'm just going to notice
something here that the chart that was created
| | 02:45 | in Numbers has a lot of text, which is
black because the background is white
| | 02:49 | there. So I think I might make
some changes here before I paste it.
| | 02:52 | I am going to click on the title. I'm
going to go up to my Fonts palette here.
| | 02:56 | I'm going to change the text color. I'm
going to change it to something darker,
| | 03:02 | maybe a nice dark blue. That doesn't
look good with this background but that's
| | 03:07 | okay, I'm going to close that up. I
close up my Font palette. I'm going to go
| | 03:10 | up to the Inspector now, just click on
the slide here, go to my Slide Inspector
| | 03:15 | and change the background here to white.
There we go. I'll close up each of those.
| | 03:22 | Now I'm ready to paste that chart. I'm
going to go up to the Edit menu, choose
| | 03:27 | Paste. It's going to pop the chart
right in there. For a second, move it
| | 03:31 | around. I'm going to click on the
legend, move it right to the bottom here,
| | 03:38 | keep it centered though right down there.
I'm going to click on the chart, size
| | 03:42 | it up. Holding down Shift will keep
its proportions. It's pretty good. Let's
| | 03:51 | move it to the center and de-
select to see the finished product.
| | 03:55 | I might want to tweak the color of my
text again, just so it matches the actual
| | 04:00 | chart. But notice I can click on the
chart right here in Keynote. If I go up to
| | 04:05 | my Inspector and go to the Chart
Inspector, I'm actually working with the chart
| | 04:10 | that was pasted from another
application. So I can make changes to it right
| | 04:15 | here in Keynote.
| | 04:17 | So a nice little time saver. You don't
want to have to duplicate your work, if
| | 04:22 | you have already got the data somewhere.
In this case, it was Numbers where we
| | 04:26 | could the chart just as we could here.
Copy and paste it, make modifications
| | 04:31 | once we have got it here in Keynote.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Animating SlidesCreating transitions| 00:00 | In this chapter is where we really
start to have some fun with Keynote.
| | 00:04 | Up until now we have been building our
presentation. So getting familiar with the
| | 00:07 | different objects that can go on the
different slides in our presentation.
| | 00:11 | We worked with tables and charts and images,
movies, sounds, even themes to spice
| | 00:16 | up the appearance of our presentation.
But now we're going to take it a step
| | 00:19 | further with some animation.
| | 00:21 | So what happens when one slide shows up
after the previous slide? We are going
| | 00:25 | to look at transitions. What about
objects on the actual slides themselves?
| | 00:29 | We can build those objects to add some
interest and display information in an
| | 00:33 | organized fashion. We can even create
some motion on our slides. We are going
| | 00:37 | to look at all of that in this
chapter beginning with transitions.
| | 00:41 | So up until now we have been
building our presentation here based on our
| | 00:44 | Customer Conference. If you have been
following along, you have got all of
| | 00:48 | these slides. If you haven't been
following, you jumped to this lesson and
| | 00:51 | you have got the exercise files,
you can open up FinalPresA and click on
| | 00:56 | slide number 1 to be all caught up.
| | 00:58 | So let's take a look first of all at
the default transition from one slide to
| | 01:02 | the next in the presentation. We'll
do that by clicking the Play button.
| | 01:05 | Now there are different ways to move
from one slide to the next. You can press
| | 01:08 | Return on your keyboard, you can press
the spacebar, you can click your mouse,
| | 01:15 | you can hit the down arrow on your
keyboard. Lots of different ways to move
| | 01:19 | from one slide to the next. But you
can see nothing is really happening here.
| | 01:22 | Information just replaces information
that was on the previous slide.
| | 01:25 | So I'm going to press Escape here.
| | 01:27 | We are going to add some visual interest
now with transitions. Now you can go overboard.
| | 01:32 | If you are using all kinds of
wild transitions, different ones on
| | 01:35 | every slide, that could actually be
a distraction, but if you want to be
| | 01:39 | consistent and use something that adds
some visual interest to the particular
| | 01:43 | slide presentation, you have got
finding one that kind of compliments your
| | 01:47 | information can really add
a lot to the presentation.
| | 01:51 | So we do that by going up to the
Inspector and we'll make sure that the Slide
| | 01:55 | Inspector is selected. We spend a
lot of time adjusting appearance of our slides,
| | 01:59 | but now we are going to go to
the transition half here. Notice that the
| | 02:03 | default effect is None. So there is a
transition from one slide to the next,
| | 02:08 | but there is no effect.
| | 02:09 | Once we choose an effect, we may want
to choose a duration for that effect.
| | 02:13 | There will be a default value in there.
How long it takes for that transition
| | 02:17 | to take place. But we can adjust that.
We may also be able to choose the
| | 02:22 | direction for some effects, such as
left to right, top to bottom, clockwise and
| | 02:27 | so on. Others will not
have an option for direction.
| | 02:30 | If you are doing one of those slide
presentations that plays automatically like
| | 02:34 | a kiosk for example, you may want to
switch it from On Click, the way that we
| | 02:39 | start the transition, to Automatically
and then set a delay. That way you can
| | 02:44 | use slide timings to decide how long a
slide is going to be displayed before
| | 02:49 | the next one shows up using the effect
you have chosen up above. But by default
| | 02:54 | On click is selected meaning we
have to move from one slide to the next
| | 02:57 | manually by clicking the mouse, hitting
the spacebar, the Return key, etcetera.
| | 03:02 | So let's start with some effects.
You'll notice when we click the Effect button,
| | 03:06 | there is actually two sections here:
3D Effects and down below 2D Effects.
| | 03:11 | There are some new ones here
in Keynote '08. Let's just start with a
| | 03:16 | simple one up at the top, Blinds. When
I click on Blinds, I get a preview of it
| | 03:20 | up here in my thumbnail. Now it's
pretty hard for you to see that if you are
| | 03:24 | watching this movie using the
resolution, etcetera, that we have got.
| | 03:28 | So another way to preview that is just
to play your presentation. So clicking
| | 03:33 | Play and then moving to the next slide,
however you like, I'm going to hit spacebar,
| | 03:36 | will show you that effect.
I'll press Escape and move back to
| | 03:41 | slide number 1, which by the way now has
this little blue triangle in the bottom
| | 03:45 | right-hand corner of the thumbnail to remind me
there is a transition attached to this slide.
| | 03:50 | So let's try some other ones. I'm going
to go to a new one here that I really like,
| | 03:55 | called Confetti. When I click on
Confetti, you see the preview up here.
| | 04:01 | Next I'm going to click the Play button,
and press my mouse button to display
| | 04:07 | that in full screen. Pressing Escape
will take me back to my slide presentation
| | 04:12 | in navigation view.
| | 04:15 | Next we are going to try another one in
the 2D column. Down below under 2D,
| | 04:20 | you can see I have got some of the old
faithfuls here as well as some new ones.
| | 04:24 | Dissolve is a cool one, where information
on one slide kind of dissolves to display
| | 04:30 | information on the next slide.
| | 04:32 | Now notice that we have got automatic
durations here. These are the defaults
| | 04:35 | for each of these effects. If I go
back to Confetti for example, you can see
| | 04:40 | the duration for that one is 1.5
seconds, just as it was for Dissolve. Others
| | 04:45 | will have different timings, but we can
bump that up if we want. If you want it in
| | 04:49 | slow motion, we'll make it even
longer. You can see how the effect in
| | 04:54 | the preview here lasts even longer.
| | 04:56 | Now the Direction, you can see for this one
there is one. No Gravity, meaning,
| | 05:00 | it just kind of explodes towards us,
but if we want gravity, I like this.
| | 05:05 | It kind of explodes towards us and falls.
So I'm going to click Play, so you can
| | 05:09 | see that one. Try these on your own
computer to get the full effect.
| | 05:12 | But I really like that one. That's new.
| | 05:14 | So I'm going to press Escape and go
back to slide number 1. Now like I said,
| | 05:19 | if we want to start the transition a
different way, On Click is the default,
| | 05:23 | but Automatically allows us to put in
a delay here for how long before the
| | 05:28 | transition takes place. This is
ideal for those automatically playing
| | 05:31 | presentations.
| | 05:33 | Now what if we wanted to apply a
transition to multiple slides? Oh, we could
| | 05:37 | definitely do that by selecting
multiple slides. I like Confetti.
| | 05:41 | But it might be a little distracting,
so I'm going to try some different ones.
| | 05:44 | I like this one too. This one has been around
for a while. Fall. Kind of like a card falling.
| | 05:49 | But similar to that would be
Page Flip, and if we choose Flip--
| | 05:56 | That's not the one. Page flip is the one that
kind of curls the page open, like we are
| | 06:00 | reading a book.
| | 06:01 | So let's say I want to apply that one
to multiple slides. Well, I can obviously
| | 06:05 | just hold down my Shift key to select a
group of slides. So if the first one is
| | 06:10 | selected, holding down Shift and
clicking on the last slide will select them all.
| | 06:14 | If I want them all to have the
exact same transition, I come up here and
| | 06:19 | select it. You will see over in the
thumbnails, each of them has that little
| | 06:24 | blue triangle. So now when I play
my presentation, you can see it's
| | 06:29 | automatically going from one to the next,
to the next, automatically using that delay.
| | 06:35 | So I'm going to press Escape, go
back to slide number 1, hold down Shift,
| | 06:41 | select all of my slides, and turn
this off, set it back to On Click,
| | 06:47 | so there is no delay and the Direction
you can see is set to Left. Of course,
| | 06:51 | if I wanted it to flip right, up or down,
I could do that. I'm going to choose up
| | 06:55 | like a flip chart. I'm going to try
that out by clicking Play. With each click
| | 07:01 | of the mouse now you can see how it
kind of flips up to display what's underneath.
| | 07:09 | All right, Escape always gets us out,
and we'll go back to slide number 1.
| | 07:13 | So you can see how transitions can
really add some visual interest to your
| | 07:17 | presentation. Again though, you can go
overboard. If you are using a different
| | 07:22 | transition for each and every slide,
well, you may be distracting which is
| | 07:26 | the opposite effect of what you want.
You want to engage people in your
| | 07:29 | presentation, not distract them. So
keep that in mind as you use transitions in
| | 07:33 | your Keynote presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating object builds| 00:00 | In the previous lesson, we had some
fun with transitions, creating some
| | 00:03 | animation between slides as they
transition from the one to the next in our
| | 00:07 | presentation. Now we are going to
take it right down to the slide level and
| | 00:11 | create what's called an object build.
| | 00:13 | Now as I discussed previously pretty
much anything on a slide is an object and
| | 00:19 | is treated that way, could be a title,
a bulleted list, an image, a table, a
| | 00:23 | chart and so on.
| | 00:25 | In this lesson, we are going to work
with a bulleted list to take a look at an
| | 00:29 | object build and then as we go through
the rest of this chapter we'll work with
| | 00:32 | some of those other objects.
| | 00:34 | So here we are working on our
presentation from the previous lesson, but if you
| | 00:37 | are jumping to this lesson and you
have got the exercise files, go ahead and
| | 00:40 | open up FinalPresB and
you will be all caught up.
| | 00:44 | Next, we are going to go to slide
number 3, and in this case, you can see we
| | 00:48 | have got some objects on this slide,
we have got a title, we have got a
| | 00:51 | bulleted list, we have also got this
little icon down in the bottom right
| | 00:55 | corner, so we can work with all of
these objects creating what we call an
| | 00:59 | object build which is basically an
animation for the objects on our slide.
| | 01:04 | So let's start with the bulleted list,
we'll click on the bulleted list to
| | 01:07 | select it, and right now if I click
Play, you will see what happens when I
| | 01:12 | display this slide, it just appears,
the title, the bulleted list, even the
| | 01:17 | button in the bottom right-hand corner
they all appear at once. So I'm going to
| | 01:20 | hit Escape and now we are
going to create some build objects.
| | 01:24 | So with our bulleted list selected, we
are going to go up to the our Inspector,
| | 01:28 | make sure it's open and click on the
Build Inspector right next to the Slide
| | 01:32 | Inspector, and you will notice there
is three options here, we can build
| | 01:36 | objects as they come in, we can build
them out, or create actions right on the
| | 01:41 | slides, stationary almost.
| | 01:44 | So all that means is that if I want
some kind of action as the object appears
| | 01:48 | on my slide, I use Build In. If I
want something to happen when I exit the
| | 01:53 | slide, we'll have the Build Out action
and then Action over here is basically
| | 01:58 | just an effect that happens in place
right on the slide. So it's not coming in
| | 02:03 | or going out, it's just while it's on
the slide, you'll see what I mean in a moment.
| | 02:07 | We will start with Build In now. So
with our bulleted list selected we can
| | 02:11 | choose a Build In effect, the default
is None, we saw that when we played the
| | 02:15 | presentation, but look at the list
when I click the button there is quite a
| | 02:18 | long list, an alphabetical list here,
there are some new ones in here, I really
| | 02:22 | like this one here called Sparkle,
and when I click on it, you can see a
| | 02:26 | preview of what Sparkle looks like.
It's almost like it's on fire and exploding in.
| | 02:31 | That's because it's
under the Build In section.
| | 02:34 | Now, the direction was set by default
from Left to Right and I can change that
| | 02:38 | if I want it to like Top to Bottom,
Right to Left, or Bottom to Top. I'm going
| | 02:43 | to go with Top to Bottom
and I see a preview of that.
| | 02:46 | Notice next to Top to Bottom, we've
got an order here. Now when I click this
| | 02:50 | there is still just a 1. That's all
there is. There is only one object with a
| | 02:54 | build effect. So once I have got
multiple objects with effects then I can
| | 02:58 | reorder how they take place. So we'll
see that in a moment when we create some
| | 03:03 | animation with another object on our slide.
| | 03:06 | I can choose the color for this
particular effect. Right now White is selected,
| | 03:09 | but clicking the color well will open
up my Colors palette over here. I can
| | 03:14 | choose a different color, maybe bit of
a yellowish tinge to it, blueish tinge,
| | 03:19 | kind of like that. I'm going to close
up my Colors palette. And you can see the
| | 03:23 | Delivery. In this case because it's a
bulleted list, under Delivery I see all
| | 03:27 | at once. When I click on this I can
go By Bullet, By Bullet Group or By
| | 03:32 | Highlighted Bullet. So I want to
talk to you about those for a sec.
| | 03:36 | Here is a bullet group, Congress
Center with Ballroom A and B, they are
| | 03:39 | together as one group and then each of
the additional bullets here are separate
| | 03:43 | group on their own. Now, if you are
displaying this information, you want to
| | 03:47 | show one bullet or one bullet group at
a time, people will focus on what you
| | 03:51 | are talking about as a poster
reading ahead, so I kind of like that.
| | 03:54 | So I'm going to change it to By Bullet.
Now in this case, each bullet comes in
| | 04:00 | separately with each click, and you
can see by default it's from the first
| | 04:04 | bullet to the last. I can choose By
Bullet Group, which is a little bit
| | 04:09 | different. You can see in the preview
that whole first section comes in and
| | 04:13 | then each additional bullet after that.
Again the order by default is from
| | 04:17 | First to Last, but I can choose a
range if I want to. I can even set separate
| | 04:22 | timings for each of the
elements in my bulleted list.
| | 04:26 | So let's take a look first of all
though at the last one By Highlighted Bullet.
| | 04:30 | I like this because what it does is
it grays out of previous bullets as you
| | 04:35 | move to the next one. So you are
drawing the person's attention to the bullet
| | 04:39 | you are speaking on as opposed to
previous bullets once they've come by. So
| | 04:42 | let's see that that really
looks like by clicking Play so far.
| | 04:47 | So there is my title. It just appears
as does a little graphic in the bottom,
| | 04:50 | but when I click you can see in comes
bullet number 1. And when I click,
| | 04:55 | you can see the second item shows up and
the previous bullet kind of grays out.
| | 05:00 | That's the highlighting that we see now
for the current bullet, and each one of
| | 05:03 | them kind of sparkles in with that
effect and that new color. I'm going to
| | 05:07 | press Escape to return to my slide.
| | 05:11 | Now notice that I can choose a range
here. If for example I wanted this slide
| | 05:15 | to show up with the title and maybe the
first bullet already there, well, then
| | 05:20 | I can change the range, I don't want
to go from the first to the last, I want
| | 05:23 | the range to be from the Second to the
Last. So when I do that Congress Center
| | 05:28 | is already going to be there as is the
title and this little icon as we saw.
| | 05:32 | I'm going to change it back actually
to First and Last, you can see, I can
| | 05:37 | choose a range here from 1 through all
the way to the last bullet. And also set
| | 05:42 | separate timings for the elements, when
I click this little check box, a drawer
| | 05:46 | opens up and there is each of my bullets.
| | 05:49 | So notice that all of them are selected
right now and down below Start Build is
| | 05:53 | On Click. So if I wanted these to show
up automatically after a prior build I
| | 05:58 | can do that. So in this case for
example, if I want the first one to show up
| | 06:03 | right away, well, clicking On Click,
you can see I can do automatically after a
| | 06:07 | transition, in this case the previous
animation was the slide transitioning
| | 06:11 | here into the next slide. But I'm going
to set that back and we are going come
| | 06:16 | back to this in a minute, I'm going to
choose On Click, and I'm going to come
| | 06:21 | over here and choose not to do
separate timings for each of the elements, and
| | 06:26 | I'm going to click the
Close Drawer button down here.
| | 06:30 | What I want to do is add some visual
effect here with my title as well as this
| | 06:34 | little icon down at the bottom. So I'm
going to click on the title, this is a
| | 06:37 | separate object, so I can
add an effect here as well.
| | 06:42 | So let's just take a look at some of
these different effects here. It's Bouncy.
| | 06:44 | You can see how characters bounce in,
left to right. How about Confetti? Kind
| | 06:53 | of neat. You can see that effect up
here in the thumbnail. Convergence, and I
| | 07:02 | like that one. Let's try some other
ones like Orbital, very neat. I'm going to
| | 07:09 | leave it at Orbital. There is no
direction for that one. It's grayed out, but
| | 07:13 | notice now Order, it's showing up as
number 2. Probably my title should come in
| | 07:17 | first, I'm going to change it to 1,
which automatically changes my bulleted
| | 07:21 | list to number 2. Down below you can
see the Duration is set as by default to 3
| | 07:28 | seconds, I'm going to knock that down a
little bit to 2 - oh, let's go down to
| | 07:31 | 2 seconds. That's good.
| | 07:35 | Now, I'm going to go back to my
bulleted list and I'm going to keep all of the
| | 07:38 | settings I have previously, but I'm
going to go down here to More Options.
| | 07:42 | I'm going to set separate timings for the
elements, so they all show up here and
| | 07:48 | they are all highlighted, and I want
them all to show up after the previous
| | 07:52 | build, so automatically after the
prior build is what I'm going to select and
| | 07:56 | the title is what is the prior build
in this case and then each of these will
| | 08:00 | show up automatically and you can see
the delay is set to 0 seconds. Well,
| | 08:04 | I probably don't want them all to show up
like that, I want to go from one to the
| | 08:08 | next, to the next with a click. So in
this case, I can click on each of the
| | 08:11 | items separately to create that build effect.
| | 08:15 | So the first one, I'm going to
choose Automatically with build 1. That's
| | 08:21 | another option, so it appears with
that title. That's a cool effect, and you
| | 08:25 | can see now there is a link from the
title down to the first bullet. Now, each
| | 08:29 | of these bullets down below should
be on a click, so I don't want them to
| | 08:33 | appear until there is a click. So I'm
going to change this back to On Click,
| | 08:37 | I'm going to close the drawer and let's
see what that looks like. When I click
| | 08:42 | the Play button, notice nothing
appears on my slide, not even the title, just
| | 08:46 | that little icon in the bottom right-
hand corner, but when I click here comes
| | 08:51 | my title and that first bullet.
| | 08:53 | Now, each bullet appears with a click
of the mouse, a tap of the Space bar or
| | 08:58 | the Return key or your Arrow keys
however you like to advance through the
| | 09:02 | various objects and slides in your
presentation. Eventually you see we move to
| | 09:08 | the next slide, so I'm going to press
Escape. I'm going to come back to slide
| | 09:12 | number 3, and I'm going to click on my title.
| | 09:16 | So this particular effect, I'd like
you to show up automatically after
| | 09:19 | transition, I don't want to have to
click. So I'm going to go to More Options
| | 09:22 | here, my title is selected, notice
that Start Build is On Click, I'm going to
| | 09:26 | choose Automatically after transition
and I'm going to have it wait 0 seconds,
| | 09:31 | close this drawer, let's see what
that looks like now, very good! Now, with
| | 09:37 | each click, I get the next bullet
and the previous bullet is grayed out.
| | 09:41 | All right, I'm going to press Escape to
return to my slide, and now all we have
| | 09:48 | to do is work with this little graphic
down here we created, down in the bottom
| | 09:51 | right-hand corner, again we can do
builds as a Build In, we can do Build Out
| | 09:56 | and we also have Action. I'm going to
choose Action, and for the effect,
| | 10:02 | I'm going to do a Rotate since it's round.
Now it's hard to see because it's so
| | 10:07 | tiny here in the preview, so I'm
going to click Play, and I don't know if
| | 10:14 | you've caught that in a moment here
at the end of our list and I'm just
| | 10:24 | clicking to go from one to the next,
there is the Rotate, it's now upside down,
| | 10:28 | and when I click, I'll move on to my next slide.
| | 10:31 | So that's one effect, notice it didn't
come in, it didn't go out, it just kind
| | 10:35 | of stayed in place that's because
I decided to do an action with it.
| | 10:40 | Now, I'm going to click back on there
and I'm going to change the effect back
| | 10:44 | to None, and I'm going to do a Build
In and a Build Out for this one. So the
| | 10:49 | Build In effect, let's try Flame. Let's
see what that looks like. It's actually
| | 10:53 | going to burn, good! The order by
default is set to 8, and that's because I
| | 11:01 | have got all of these bulleted list
items as well as my title, set up to
| | 11:06 | animate, there is no Direction or
Delivery to choose from but a Duration, so
| | 11:10 | that's good.
| | 11:11 | Now, the Build Out, when we leave the
slide maybe it should burn up as well, so
| | 11:16 | I can choose the same thing Flame and
Order 9 of course, it's going to happen
| | 11:24 | at the end. But probably I want this to
show up somewhere between the title and
| | 11:29 | the bulleted list. So I'm going to
change the Build In, Order to number 2, all
| | 11:35 | right, there we go. More Options
allows me to choose how that's going to show up.
| | 11:43 | So there is my group, and of
course, it's going to be On Click.
| | 11:50 | So let's test this one out. We'll
click the Play button. Here comes the title
| | 11:56 | and next click, there is my first
bullet and notice that button down at the
| | 11:59 | bottom. So it's there for my slide as
I present the items on this slide. If I
| | 12:04 | was doing an automatic
presentation probably set these up to show up
| | 12:09 | automatically, but the user could
click that Home button and there it goes in flames
| | 12:14 | with the last click of the mouse
before we go to the next slide, very nice!
| | 12:18 | All right, so we'll go back to slide
number 3, and we are going to close up the
| | 12:26 | Build Inspector. Of course, you would
save your changes at this point. Other
| | 12:30 | objects can be built in using
different methods, for example, tables can come
| | 12:34 | in a row at a time and bar graphs for
example could come in a bar at a time.
| | 12:39 | We are going to get into object builds
with some of those specialized items, but
| | 12:43 | in the next lesson, we are
going to look at something special.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Smart Builds| 00:00 | At the end of the last lesson, I
promised to you something special in this
| | 00:03 | lesson and this is something I think is
really cool. It's brand new to Keynote '08.
| | 00:09 | It's called Smart Builds.
| | 00:10 | So in this scenario we are going to
work with some images and create something
| | 00:14 | called a Smart Build, very similar
to the Object build we just looked at in
| | 00:18 | the previous lesson with our bulleted
lists, but a little bit different and
| | 00:21 | actually very easy to work with.
| | 00:23 | All right the first thing I'm going
to do is go to slide number 8 in my
| | 00:29 | presentation. I'm using the same
presentation as the previous lesson.
| | 00:32 | If you are jumping to this lesson, you have
got the Exercise Files, you can open up
| | 00:36 | FinalPresC and then click on
slide number 8 to get all caught up.
| | 00:40 | So here is Venue #1. I'm going to go
to Slide 9, which is Venue #2, and
| | 00:46 | it looks like Slide 10 even has an image
for Excursions or something. So I'm going
| | 00:50 | to go back to slide number 8 and I'm
going to click on the image here and delete it.
| | 00:55 | I am going to remove that. And then
I'm going to go to Slide 9 and remove the
| | 00:59 | entire slide. So clicking it here in
the Navigation panel and hitting my Delete
| | 01:03 | key removes the entire slide, same
thing for Excursions. Here we go.
| | 01:09 | And I'm going to go back to slide number 8.
This is where I want to create the Smart
| | 01:13 | Build I was telling you about.
| | 01:14 | Now my Build Inspector is still open
from the previous lesson. I'm going to
| | 01:18 | close that up, because it will open up
automatically for me as I create a Smart
| | 01:21 | Build. The title here Venue #1 needs to
be adjusted as well. I'm going to drag
| | 01:26 | it up here a little bit higher, than
center in my slide, and I'm going to click
| | 01:31 | inside and take out the #1 and just
put an S at the end, Venues, to get the
| | 01:37 | idea where we are going here.
| | 01:38 | Instead of multiple slides, we are
going to have multiple images on the slide
| | 01:42 | and we are going to have a special
effect for viewing those images, and we do
| | 01:46 | that by creating a Smart Build. So up
here on the toolbar when I click Smart
| | 01:50 | Builds, you can see I have got Dissolve,
Flip, Grid, a whole bunch of options
| | 01:54 | for displaying the objects I'm going to
be putting into my Smart Build, in this
| | 01:58 | case, photographs.
| | 01:59 | So I'm going to go down to Turntable
at the bottom, I kind of like that one
| | 02:03 | it's neat, and right away, something
happens. The Build Inspector opens back up.
| | 02:07 | You can see a thumbnail. See that
my title is kind of overlapping where the
| | 02:11 | first image will appear. So I might
want to come in here and just move that
| | 02:16 | title when I'm done. But down below, I
have got the Turntable effect showing
| | 02:21 | here at the top of this little title
bar and then a placeholder for me to drop
| | 02:25 | images. That's what I'm going to do.
| | 02:27 | To get my images I'm going to go up to
my Media palette to make sure Photos is
| | 02:31 | selected. By the way, you have got all
of these photos in your Exercise Files
| | 02:36 | if you got them. So you can open that
up and drag photos from there as well. So
| | 02:41 | I'm going to drag Cuba right in
here where it says Drop image here.
| | 02:45 | Now watch what happens when I release.
It gets highlighted. When I release, a
| | 02:49 | new placeholder appears here. So I can
have multiple photos. That's the idea.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to drag the Beach photo in
here and release and I have got a new
| | 02:59 | placeholder. ConfCenter, very nice.
Let's have a couple of flowers just to
| | 03:07 | spice things up. I'll drop the image
in there. I'm up to four now and I have
| | 03:11 | got a fifth placeholder. I'm going to
take in this pink flower and drop it there.
| | 03:17 | All right, so you can't actually
see everything that's going on in the
| | 03:20 | background, but I'm going to close up
my Media Browser. I'm going to move the
| | 03:25 | Build Inspector over a little bit. You
can see there is a restricted area here
| | 03:29 | where this effect is going to take
place, but it has handles so I can size it
| | 03:33 | and move it as well. I'm going to size
it up a little bit. After I move it to
| | 03:37 | the top corner, I'm going to go to
the bottom corner. When I see the double
| | 03:41 | arrow now I can stretch it out,
and that might be good right there.
| | 03:47 | I can also adjust the images, so
right now my pink flower is selected down
| | 03:51 | below. You can see I can click on the
different images to bring them to the
| | 03:54 | front, and I have the opportunity down
here to adjust their sizes. So I can set
| | 03:59 | the size of the image at the back with
this button selected here and then I can
| | 04:04 | just grab the slider and make those
back images bigger or smaller if I want.
| | 04:09 | Once I get the size I like, I let go.
| | 04:12 | Now I'm going to come over here and
click on this one to set the size of the
| | 04:15 | image in the front. You can see it's
pretty high on the slider. That's because
| | 04:19 | all of the images are being scaled to
be the same size when they come to the
| | 04:23 | front even though they are of
different sizes when I bring them in. I'm going
| | 04:26 | to leave it right above there. That
way I can see my title here and I might
| | 04:31 | just move this box to the very center
like so, good. Time to see what this
| | 04:39 | looks like, isn't it?
| | 04:40 | I am going to go up to my Play button
here to play this slide. You can see it
| | 04:45 | appears with the title and each of the
images but something different is going
| | 04:49 | to happen when I start pressing my
spacebar or hitting the Return key or
| | 04:53 | clicking the mouse. Normally, you would
see some kind of action or build. Well
| | 04:57 | that's what's going to happen here,
but we didn't have to set all of that up,
| | 05:00 | those are set up for us. And then when
we get to the last image, it's going to
| | 05:03 | move to the next slide and
this is the Turntable effect.
| | 05:08 | Here is the last one and it moves to
the last slide in my presentation. All
| | 05:14 | right I'm going to press Escape and
move back to slide number 8. So that's the
| | 05:20 | brand-new Smart Build. When I click
on the Smart Build border here, it's
| | 05:24 | selected. I have some other things I
can do in the Build Inspector, which opens
| | 05:28 | up automatically with Action selected
here. You can see the effect is Turntable
| | 05:32 | but I can change it right from here
if I wanted to, like Swap, fro example.
| | 05:36 | You can see what's happening. It's
very similar, but I can't see the other
| | 05:39 | images in the background. If I want to
play that, each click swaps the photo
| | 05:47 | for the next. I see my title in between
just briefly, so I'm -- would probably
| | 05:53 | want to probably want to move the
title to the top of my slide presentation.
| | 05:56 | I am going to press Escape and try
some other effect. How about Shuffle? It's
| | 06:03 | kind of neat. It's kind of like a deck
of cards shuffling. To really see that,
| | 06:07 | we can play it, click the mouse, press
the spacebar or Return key, it's totally
| | 06:13 | up to you. That's a neat effect.
Pressing Escape takes us back to our slide.
| | 06:19 | So play around with some of the
different effects, here you have got Spinning,
| | 06:22 | Spinning Cube is kind of neat, where
the images are on a cube and you can see
| | 06:26 | it spinning round there. Again we
don't see our title with this one. So we
| | 06:31 | probably want to move the title to the
top of our slide and as it spins around
| | 06:36 | to show the different images, we get
that Spinning Cube effect. I'm going to
| | 06:39 | hit Escape to return to my slide again.
| | 06:42 | Now with each of these, we have some
Direction options, the Order, Duration,
| | 06:47 | all of that stuff we looked at in
the previous lesson with object build.
| | 06:50 | We also have the number of spins as
adjustable for this particular effect. When I
| | 06:55 | choose different effects, I
get different options down below.
| | 06:59 | So here you can see the prospective
setting for Turntable that we started with.
| | 07:03 | We can adjust that from above to below.
| | 07:07 | I kind of like it right there. As well,
you can see we have got the number here
| | 07:16 | is set to 8, there are eight objects,
the current one is selected 8. We can
| | 07:20 | bump that up, look at the space now
that we were creating, same is using the
| | 07:26 | slider, and down at the bottom, we
can also choose a range, so we can build
| | 07:32 | from the First to Last, the default.
So all the images will be build in the
| | 07:37 | Smart Build but we could choose just
maybe 2 and 3, and the first and the last
| | 07:41 | one would not be included in the
Smart Build. To make sense here though, to
| | 07:45 | will leave it set from First to Last.
| | 07:47 | We could even set separate timings
for each of them, but we are using the
| | 07:50 | click. Think about a kiosk
presentations that's automatically playing,
| | 07:54 | you would then have control over how long
each of these images appears in the Smart
| | 07:58 | Build by going to Set separate timings,
it opens up the drawer, and you can go
| | 08:03 | in here and click on individual items
and setup different timings for each one.
| | 08:08 | I am going to click Close to close up
the drawer and I'm going to close up my
| | 08:14 | Build Inspector, and I'm going to play
this to see what it looks like. I like
| | 08:22 | that effect. So instead of using five
slides, I have got one slide with the
| | 08:26 | five images on it and when it gets to
the last one, there is that transition
| | 08:30 | effect we set up earlier to move to my
next slide. Pressing Escape gets us back out.
| | 08:37 | So Smart Builds. Go in there,
experiment with the different effects and
| | 08:41 | the different options for the different
effects. Smart Builds, brand-new in Keynote'08,
| | 08:44 | a lot of fun.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building charts| 00:00 | Continuing on the theme now of building
objects in a presentation, we are going
| | 00:04 | to look at building charts. So let's
go to slide number 5 in the presentation
| | 00:09 | we have been using throughout this
chapter and if you are jumping to this
| | 00:12 | lesson and you have got the Exercise
Files, no problem. Go in there and open up
| | 00:16 | FinalPresD and click on slide number 5
over here in the Navigation Pane and
| | 00:20 | you will be all caught up.
| | 00:21 | So here is the chart and we can use
build effects with charts as well,
| | 00:25 | especially with a bar graph or column
graph like this. It's kind of neat,
| | 00:29 | some of the things you can do with build
effects. So I'm going to click on my chart
| | 00:33 | here and I'm going to go up to the
Inspector and make sure Build Inspector is
| | 00:38 | selected. Notice here, we still
have Build In, Build Out, and Action.
| | 00:45 | So building in, how do the bars appear
in our graph, how do they disappear at
| | 00:50 | the end of the slide, or do they just
move in place using the Action? We have
| | 00:54 | all those effects we looked at in
previous lessons. So I think building in is a
| | 00:59 | good one. We are going to go down to
the Effect, and we have got one here at
| | 01:02 | the very top called, 3D-Grow. Because
our graph is a three-dimensional graph,
| | 01:07 | clicking 3D-Grow is kind of neat. You
will see a quick preview of that up here
| | 01:11 | in the thumbnail, but clicking Play
will display that effect for us when we
| | 01:15 | click the mouse button or press the
spacebar. See how those bars actually grow
| | 01:20 | and then the numbers appear on top.
So that's a kind of a cool effect.
| | 01:23 | Of course, down below, we have got the
ability to change the Delivery from All
| | 01:29 | at Once to Background First if we
wanted to. We could do By Series. So in this
| | 01:36 | case all the pink ones, then all the
blue ones. By Set, see what happens. The
| | 01:43 | first set, then the second set. By
Elements in Series if we wanted to, so each
| | 01:50 | one in the series, then each one in the
next series, and By Elements in Set as well.
| | 02:00 | And each time, we get a preview up here
that gives us an idea what that's going
| | 02:03 | to look like. I'm going to change it
back to By Series and it's right now the
| | 02:11 | only build effect that's happening on
our slide. So you can see over here for
| | 02:14 | Order, it's number 1, but as we know,
we can set up build effects for any
| | 02:19 | object including our title at the top.
So I'm going to click on the title
| | 02:23 | itself and I'm going to do a
build effect for that one as well.
| | 02:26 | So where it says None right now, I'm
just going to choose Blast, it's going to
| | 02:31 | blast in and I'm going to change the
Order to 1, which means our graph is now
| | 02:36 | number 2. So when we click on the
graph, you can see what's happening over
| | 02:40 | there. We can also do separate timings
for each of the elements in our graph
| | 02:44 | just like we could for other objects.
You can see we have got the title and
| | 02:48 | then we have got the chart background
and then each of the series listed here,
| | 02:51 | so we could work with separate timings.
| | 02:53 | Now this is very handy if you are
doing one of those automatic presentation
| | 02:57 | that loops around at a Kiosk for
example, where you want it to automatically
| | 03:01 | play after a prior build and then set
timings and so on. But in this case,
| | 03:06 | there is no Delay to set. We are going
to be using the mouse or the keyboard to
| | 03:09 | move from object to object.
I'm going to close the Drawer.
| | 03:13 | I have already talked about those anyway,
and just show you that there are some
| | 03:16 | other options to choose ranges. Right
now First to Last is selected, but if I
| | 03:22 | didn't want any of those objects being
built, I can just choose a range. For
| | 03:26 | example, instead 2 to the Last, or if
I wanted the first to the second and
| | 03:32 | ignore the third, I could do that.
I'm going to leave it First to Last,
| | 03:36 | include everything.
| | 03:37 | I am going to go to Build Out now and
show you that we can setup some effects
| | 03:43 | for building out. So when we move on to
the next slide in this case, which will
| | 03:47 | be the transition, what happens? Oh,
we have got 3D-Grow. That doesn't make
| | 03:51 | sense but we might want it to kind of
explode perhaps. So as we move down,
| | 03:56 | you can see we have got some options and
I kind of like this Sparkle one here.
| | 04:00 | You can see the Sparkle comes across
and just wipes the slide clean.
| | 04:03 | It's my default white, but we can
change the color if we wanted to.
| | 04:08 | I am going to go to this purple-y color
here, kind of matches my slide and
| | 04:13 | I'm going to play this just to see what
it looks like on the main screen here.
| | 04:16 | There is my title and there is the
background of my chart. The next click shows
| | 04:23 | me the next series, the last click
shows me the next series and here we go,
| | 04:28 | here is that special effect to Build
Out before we go on to the next slide in
| | 04:33 | our presentation.
| | 04:34 | Pressing Escape takes us back out. I'm
going to close up my Colors palette here
| | 04:38 | and go back to Slide 5 and when it
comes to building in, I might have some
| | 04:44 | adjustments to make here. I know it's
the legend was sitting there and I'm not
| | 04:48 | sure that I want each series
requiring a click. So I'm going to change this
| | 04:52 | from By Series to All at Once, and I'm
going to click on my legend and notice
| | 04:58 | it has no effect but it is a
separate object. So I want it to appear in a
| | 05:02 | certain way.
| | 05:03 | I am going to choose Dissolve it's
going to Build In with a Dissolve, and I
| | 05:07 | think it should probably be second. So
we can see what that looks like clicking
| | 05:16 | Play, and with each click of the mouse
you can see the effect and off we go to
| | 05:25 | the next slide. All right, so
experiment with those. They are lot of fun.
| | 05:30 | Building In, Building Out, work
with some of the different options.
| | 05:34 | I'm thinking now the legend should be last.
I'm going to change the order to 4.
| | 05:37 | That would probably make more sense.
| | 05:39 | It will show up after every other
item on my slide and once you have got
| | 05:44 | exactly what you are looking for, and
don't forget to save your changes. Click
| | 05:47 | on the File menu and save up what you
do, just so you don't lose it for some
| | 05:51 | reason. I'm going to deselect, I'm
going to play the slide one last time to see
| | 05:55 | what that looks like. Pressing my
spacebar, and you can see it doesn't make sense.
| | 06:04 | It's really good to preview what you
are doing. The legend should have come in
| | 06:08 | before that last effect. So of course,
we'll go back, click on the legend,
| | 06:14 | change the order to 3 in this case.
All right, so that's building charts. In
| | 06:20 | the next lesson, we'll
move on to building tables.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building tables| 00:00 | You have heard of me say a few times
now that pretty much anything we put
| | 00:03 | on a slide in a Keynote presentation is
considered an object, could be a title,
| | 00:08 | it could be a chart like we see here,
could be an image and a table as well.
| | 00:13 | So when we use tables in a Keynote
presentation, we know we have got rows and
| | 00:17 | columns and because they are objects,
we can do some pretty neat build effects
| | 00:20 | with tables.
| | 00:21 | So what we are going to do is move to
our table slide, which is slide number 4
| | 00:26 | in the presentation we have been using
in this chapter. If you are jumping to
| | 00:29 | this last lesson, you can go to your
Exercise Files, if you have got them, and
| | 00:32 | open up FinalPresE to be all caught
up with us here on slide number 4.
| | 00:36 | So I'm going to click on the table
itself and I'm going to make some
| | 00:39 | adjustments to the table before we
start working with build effect. First thing
| | 00:43 | I'm going to do is go over to my
Table Inspector here, make sure Table is
| | 00:48 | selected down below. And I'm going to
take out that image in the background.
| | 00:52 | So where that says Tinted Image Fill,
I'm going to change to None. There we go.
| | 00:57 | And now we have got that shadow showing up.
So I'm going up to my Graphic Inspector
| | 01:01 | and turn the Shadow off. There,
that's a little bit easier to read. And now
| | 01:06 | with the table selected I'm
going to my Build Inspector.
| | 01:10 | Now building tables is little bit
different. You can see we still got Build In,
| | 01:13 | Build Out and Action. When I go to
Build In and look at the effects, we have
| | 01:19 | seen these before. Let's just try
something cool like Confetti for example. In
| | 01:25 | this case, you can see that Delivery
is All at Once by default that means the
| | 01:28 | entire table has that effect. When I
click on the dropdown, I have different
| | 01:32 | options for tables, By row, By Column,
Cell, Row Content, Column Content or
| | 01:39 | Cell Content.
| | 01:41 | Now each of these at the top is kind
of self explanatory, if I choose By Row,
| | 01:46 | you can see each row is going to come in.
And I see that preview up here in my
| | 01:51 | thumbnail. You can really see it if I
go up to my Play button and click my
| | 01:56 | mouse or hit the spacebar, hit Return,
there is row number 1, the next click
| | 02:02 | brings in the next row and you can see
the column header comes with that, it's
| | 02:06 | attached to the row, there is my next row.
| | 02:10 | And this is really good if you are
presenting and you want to show bits and
| | 02:13 | pieces of information one at a time
building up to a grand finale. I'm going to
| | 02:18 | press Escape.
| | 02:20 | So that's building By Row. Now we can
leave the table there and just show the
| | 02:24 | content, if I go down to By Row Content
and I go to Play thispresentation. Now
| | 02:31 | watch what happens with each click.
Here comes my table and now with each with
| | 02:35 | each click or each tap of the spacebar,
you can see information going into
| | 02:40 | those cells. So it's the content that
goes in the table cell. I kind of like
| | 02:43 | that too. I'm going to press Escape.
| | 02:47 | Of course we have some options when
working with table rows and columns. Here,
| | 02:52 | well, I'm going to change it back to By
Row and down below you can see Building
| | 02:56 | from First to Last. Well, if I want the
first one to be there when I show this
| | 03:01 | slide, I don't need to build in the
title. I can change the range to go from 2
| | 03:06 | to the Last.
| | 03:09 | And then of course, I have the ability
to set separate timings for each of the
| | 03:12 | elements. If I'm going to do a kiosk
type presentation that's going to play
| | 03:15 | automatically, I may want to display
rows for X number of seconds before the
| | 03:19 | next one shows up automatically and so on.
| | 03:22 | So we have already seen that more
options drawer and if we are working By Row,
| | 03:27 | you can see that I have got two
options here the Table: First Row and then
| | 03:30 | Other Rows show up down below. And you
can see by default, they are On Click.
| | 03:35 | Now the Table: First Row, I don't want
it to show up on a click. I would like
| | 03:38 | it to show up Automatically after the
transition. That's perfect. It's going to
| | 03:44 | be there then when the slide shows up.
So long as my title doesn't have a build
| | 03:49 | effect then it's going to be there too.
So let's close the drawer and try that out.
| | 03:53 | I am going to click the Play button,
so there is my title and the title of my
| | 03:59 | table. Now the next click is going to
bring in the rest of the table row by row
| | 04:05 | by row, very neat effect.
| | 04:10 | So again tables, treated like any
other object when you go into the Build
| | 04:15 | Inspector, you got all of those effects,
you have got those options for each of
| | 04:19 | the effect. But when it comes to
Delivery, you have got many different options
| | 04:22 | here By Row, Column, By Cell and then
of course By Content in the Rows, Columns
| | 04:27 | and Cells as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Moving objects on a path| 00:00 | Well, I think we have saved the best
for last in this chapter. It's a brand new
| | 00:03 | feature in Keynote '08 and it's the
ability to take an object on a slide and
| | 00:07 | move it across a path. So we know that
an object is pretty much anything we put
| | 00:12 | on a slide. The ability now to move
it along the path can add some real
| | 00:16 | excitement to a slide presentation.
| | 00:18 | So before you actually do it yourself,
what I'd like to do is just show you
| | 00:22 | something I have set up and then we'll
try to mimic it in a second. So I'm just
| | 00:25 | going to hit the spacebar on my
keyboard to start this presentation.
| | 00:29 | You can see the next slide shows up
automatically with the title and there is our
| | 00:33 | little logo. It's moving along the
various venues in time. That movement there
| | 00:38 | had a bit of curve in it, so did this
one. Some special effects and then off
| | 00:44 | it goes into the distance.
| | 00:47 | So now it's your turn. Before we
actually try to recreate that, I'm just
| | 00:51 | pressing Escape here on my presentation
and if you have got the Exercise Files,
| | 00:54 | you can open up VenuesA. You will have
this presentation. We are going to slide 4.
| | 01:00 | You can see it's set up for you to
mimic what I set up here on slide number 2.
| | 01:04 | So we are going to examine what's
happening here in slide number 2. You can see
| | 01:09 | there is definitely a transition by
that little triangle in the bottom
| | 01:12 | right-hand corner and then there
are some dots in the top right corner
| | 01:14 | indicating that there is some kind of
object building going on. And you can see
| | 01:19 | my Jellybricks logo here actually has a
little red square, a diamond shape with
| | 01:24 | a dot in it. And if I click on that
that's how I view the path that I have set up
| | 01:28 | for this particular object
and it's got stops along the way.
| | 01:33 | As I click on the line in between each
of those stops, you can see the start
| | 01:38 | and endpoints for each of them. So
let's open up our Inspector and we'll take a
| | 01:43 | look at what's going on here. With the
Jellybricks logo selected, we are going
| | 01:46 | to go over here to the Build Inspector
and look at the Action button here to
| | 01:53 | see that the effect chosen is Move. So
we have got Opacity, Rotate and we have
| | 01:58 | got Scale. But Move is selected and
that means it's going to move along the path.
| | 02:03 | We can see the acceleration
is set to Ease In & Ease Out.
| | 02:07 | So as it takes off and moves slowly,
picks up speed and slows down at the
| | 02:11 | destination and some of these paths
are set up to be curved. The other thing
| | 02:16 | that's happening is each of these
little images is automatically showing up.
| | 02:20 | If we look at the Build In effect, it's
scaling in. And the text has a special effect.
| | 02:27 | It's Sparkling, Top to Bottom.
All of this is happening automatically
| | 02:31 | after the previous build. So if I click
More Options, you can see each of these
| | 02:35 | is set up with its own setting and
then it's set up to Automatically build
| | 02:40 | after the previous build.
| | 02:42 | We also have some actions going on
and that's for our logo for example.
| | 02:47 | You can see they get highlighted, logo
throughout this. These are the various
| | 02:51 | stops along the way. So it's not really
as complicated as it might look once we
| | 02:55 | start building. All right, so I'm going
to close up the Build Inspector and
| | 02:59 | I'm going to move to slide number 4. So
this is a duplicate of slide number 2 but
| | 03:04 | we haven't set anything up here. So
the first thing you want to do is get
| | 03:08 | the actual objects on your slide.
| | 03:10 | So I have entered my title up here in
a title box and then I have entered my
| | 03:16 | actual photos here. I have actually
inserted them in the various locations on
| | 03:20 | my slide. I have put in some text,
separate object, using the text box. None of
| | 03:25 | that should be new to you, if you have
been following along. I have got some
| | 03:28 | text boxes here. This is the logo that
I brought in. So inserted another image
| | 03:34 | using my Media palette here.
| | 03:38 | And you have got all of these images
and you can enter this text yourself.
| | 03:41 | Once you have got the slide set up,
then you can start to play around with it.
| | 03:44 | So we want to move this along a path.
So the first thing I'm going to do is set up
| | 03:48 | that path. I'm going to go up to my
Inspector and then I'm going to come down
| | 03:53 | to the Action button. Make sure it's
selected, before I click on Effect and
| | 03:57 | choose Move.
| | 03:58 | So right away you can see what's
happening, a line is being drawn. I see in
| | 04:02 | the thumbnail a quick preview of what
that's going to look like, but I really want
| | 04:06 | this to move down to this photo here.
So I'm going to move this. When I see the
| | 04:11 | four-sided arrow hovering over that
endpoint, I'm going to move it and I can
| | 04:15 | see the outline of the logo and I want
it to appear just overlapping the top of
| | 04:19 | my image. There we go.
| | 04:22 | Now it's not really curved, is it?
But I can curve that if I want to by
| | 04:25 | clicking the Curve button here and then
I have got a mid-point that I can move
| | 04:30 | to adjust that curve. I have even got
a little bit of a Bezier here to adjust
| | 04:35 | the degree of the curve. There we go.
Now you will notice that there is a plus
| | 04:41 | sign next to the endpoint here.
Clicking that adds another path and again,
| | 04:46 | when I see the four-sided arrow from
the endpoint, I can move this to the end
| | 04:50 | destination, there it is right there.
And of course, I want to curve that as well.
| | 04:55 | You can see the default curve
is quite drastic, but I can move this
| | 05:00 | around and I can also click here right
on the curve handle and adjust that and
| | 05:05 | use the Bezier as well to
change it in varying degrees.
| | 05:12 | So I can move the whole thing but I can
also move a point by hovering over the point.
| | 05:15 | So I get it just right. Right,
I want to add another one here, so
| | 05:19 | I'm going to click the plus sign. I'm going
to move that endpoint down here to this image.
| | 05:23 | I might want to move my Build
Inspector out of the way just temporarily here.
| | 05:27 | That's good. If I wanted to curve
that, you know how to do that now.
| | 05:33 | With it selected-- and notice that the lines
that are not selected are dotted lines now.
| | 05:38 | So the path you are working with is a
solid line. I actually want to move this
| | 05:43 | curve point down this way. I'm going to
move this over here now. So we can add
| | 05:48 | one more. Actually two more. Now I
can see that's kind of going off the edge
| | 05:54 | of my slide. But notice that I can move
this around and I can move the actual line as well.
| | 06:00 | Of course it's going to move my points
but that's okay. So I'm going to click
| | 06:04 | here and just move this up and I'm
going to move this back with it selected,
| | 06:10 | where it belongs. I head back to
this endpoint and I move it up here.
| | 06:16 | I'm going to add one more tiny endpoint and
again, I have to move this to be able to see that.
| | 06:23 | Move the whole line, there it is.
I'm going to squeeze it in so it's very short.
| | 06:29 | This is for that last effect
where it kind of fades off into the distance.
| | 06:32 | I'll move this back here. I'm
going to move this just slightly above.
| | 06:38 | I'm thinking this needs a bit of a
curve too, if we are going to mimic exactly
| | 06:45 | what we did on slide number two.
| | 06:47 | Okay, that looks pretty close. I'm just
going to move this back up. This little
| | 06:56 | endpoint and a little further, there
we go. All right, so I can click on any
| | 07:01 | of these paths to make adjustments.
You can see they become solid when I do.
| | 07:05 | I can move the whole line by clicking on
the line and with the hand just grabbing it
| | 07:09 | and moving it. And of course, I can
move the endpoints as well. So there is
| | 07:14 | my end endpoint. I have got two of them.
I have got that small one at the end
| | 07:18 | because I want to add a special effect there.
| | 07:20 | So with that one selected, I'm actually
going to change it from a Move to a Scale.
| | 07:24 | And this is going to scale down
to nothing. So I'm going to slide this
| | 07:28 | all the way over to the left and with
my Build Inspector back over. Notice that
| | 07:36 | you can't see the path anymore. That's
because we have changed it to Scale,
| | 07:39 | but at anytime, you can go to the
starting point and click to see that path.
| | 07:44 | All right, so now it's just a matter of
getting those other things to show up as we want.
| | 07:47 | So I'm going to click on this image.
I know that the effect here is a Dissolve,
| | 07:52 | so I'm going to choose Dissolve.
| | 07:54 | I am going to get the effects first.
This one is a Sparkle. So I'm going to
| | 08:00 | come all the way down here. Sparkle
and this next image, same thing.
| | 08:07 | We'll Dissolve. Now we can choose Scale like
we did in slide number 2, if we wanted to.
| | 08:12 | But I'm going to try Dissolve
for this exercise. I'm going to choose
| | 08:17 | Sparkle for each of the text. That
last image, you notice Scale is an option.
| | 08:23 | But I like Dissolve as well. I click on
title below it and that one is going to Sparkle.
| | 08:31 | All right, so notice the Sparkle is
going left to right instead of top to bottom.
| | 08:35 | If you want to change those,
no problem you can do that. And in fact,
| | 08:40 | if you wanted to, you can just click on
the first one here. Hold down Shift and
| | 08:47 | click on each of them to change all of
their directions from top to bottom.
| | 08:50 | You don't have to do one at a time. Okay,
so we are getting there. Now all we need
| | 08:55 | to do is set up those timings. I do
believe that our very top title too, we don't
| | 09:00 | have an effect. We need that in there.
That's a Shimmer. And that's actually
| | 09:04 | the first thing that's going to show up.
So we'll keep that in mind;
| | 09:07 | we have got an order and then
timings to set up for each of these.
| | 09:11 | So we go to more options now. You
can see here they all are. We have got
| | 09:15 | Bullets, there is a Hawaii, those are
the pieces of text we have got in there.
| | 09:20 | There is our images. You can see them
moving and the scaling that's going on.
| | 09:23 | But the order is all wrong. So this is
actually called Bullets here. I'm going
| | 09:28 | to move it right up to the top.
It belongs at the top as number one.
| | 09:33 | And I want this to show up automatically right
after the transition of the slide, from the
| | 09:38 | previous slide to this one. There we go.
I'm going to click on my Jellybricks logo here.
[00:09:43.44.03]
And you can see it's represented
by many, many different occurrences
| | 09:50 | and there it is there in the Move.
| | 09:52 | But I can also add an effect if I
wanted to. It doesn't just have to Move,
| | 09:55 | it could also Build In, but I'm going to
leave it there. In this case, we want to
| | 10:00 | leave it moving and moving on that
path and now we are going to come down to
| | 10:05 | this photo and we want it to show up.
You can see that when I click on it,
| | 10:08 | it's highlighted here. It goes after that
first move. And we want it to come in
| | 10:15 | Automatically after build number 2,
that's going to show up and then we want
| | 10:21 | this text down here, San Juan, to build
in right after Cuba as well. So not on a click,
| | 10:28 | but automatically after the build.
| | 10:32 | Okay, next, it's going to move, logo is
going to move over here. So we want our
| | 10:36 | ConfCenter after the next move to
automatically appear. And anything that's
| | 10:45 | kind of outdented, you can see is
requiring a click. It's not built on the
| | 10:49 | previous build. So we may want to come
in here later and adjust these as well.
| | 10:54 | But we can do them all at once. Okay,
good. I'm going to click on the text,
| | 10:59 | which goes after the photo,
ConfCenter, and again that's going to be
| | 11:03 | automatically after the previous build.
| | 11:06 | Next is our Beach photo, coming up
after the move automatically. You can see
| | 11:12 | it's a little bit time consuming but
the end result is kind of nice. That text
| | 11:17 | comes right after the photo and
it's got that special effect happening
| | 11:23 | automatically. So each of these you
can see are requiring a click according to
| | 11:29 | the bottom. So holding down Shift is
actually going to select everything in
| | 11:34 | between, which is not exactly what I
want to do. So if you hold down the
| | 11:41 | Command key, you can select all of them
at once. And down below change it from
| | 11:46 | On Click to Automatically after the prior build.
| | 11:49 | So right now everything is happening
automatically. We just might want it to
| | 11:54 | stall for a second at each photo though.
So here is our first logo. It's going
| | 11:59 | to move and then automatically Cuba is
going to show up and the text and then
| | 12:05 | right away, zero seconds after that,
we are going to move. But we want to delay,
| | 12:10 | so we want it to move, but not
zero seconds after build four.
| | 12:14 | We're going to move it to a second.
| | 12:16 | Again, I could do that for these as well.
Holding down my Command key, I can
| | 12:21 | have them pause for a second and then
just going to come to this last one where
| | 12:25 | it just scales. I think we are ready
to play this and see what it looks like.
| | 12:28 | There may be some fine tuning but clicking
Play, brings up our title, there goes the logo.
| | 12:36 | A bit of a delay, moves on to the next
one. It automatically appears with some
| | 12:41 | special effects and away we go. And
after a short delay, off it goes into the
| | 12:50 | distance. Very good. All right,
obviously when you are working with motion,
| | 12:56 | there is lots you can do. We can go on
straight paths, curved paths. We can set
| | 13:00 | up many stops along the way like we
just did with this particular exercise.
| | 13:05 | What you are going to find is that,
the more you experiment with it and play around,
| | 13:09 | the more familiar you are
going to get with your options and
| | 13:12 | the more professional your
presentations will become here in Keynote.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Sharing PresentationsWorking with presenter notes| 00:00 | So you have built your presentation,
you have got all the content on all the
| | 00:04 | various slides that you need. You have
added some animation, transitions, build
| | 00:09 | effects and so on. Now you are ready
to actually present. That's the whole
| | 00:13 | purpose, isn't it, of creating a
presentation in Keynote? That's to share it
| | 00:17 | with the world. And that's we're
going to look at in this chapter,
| | 00:19 | the various ways that you can share your
information with the world once it's in a Keynote
| | 00:24 | presentation.
| | 00:25 | Obviously one of those methods is to
stand up live in front of an audience and
| | 00:29 | deliver a presentation. So the first
item we are going to look at in this chapter
| | 00:33 | is notes, presenter notes. When
you're presenting in front of people,
| | 00:38 | you may have the opportunity to have
dual monitors, in other words have a
| | 00:42 | screen that you can look at and have
a screen that your audience looks at,
| | 00:45 | whether it's another
monitor or the use of a projector.
| | 00:48 | Now, in that case you can create
notes to yourself that will see on your
| | 00:52 | monitor and your audience will see the
presentation itself. Now if you don't
| | 00:57 | have that luxury, there are other
ways to create notes and have them to
| | 01:01 | yourself so that the audience doesn't
see them. That's what we are going to
| | 01:04 | look at in this lesson right now.
| | 01:07 | So we are going to start with this
presentation here that you see on my screen
| | 01:10 | called PresentingA. And if you been
following along in previous lessons you
| | 01:15 | probably got this one, but if you have
jumped to this lesson and you got the
| | 01:18 | Exercise Files, open up PresentingA.
And I'm going to go to slide number two.
| | 01:23 | So let's say right here, I've got a
couple of quotes and there is a couple things
| | 01:26 | that I want remember to say when
I come to this slide. For example,
| | 01:30 | I want to tell people the number of
positive quotes that we got from past user
| | 01:35 | conferences, and I also want to make
sure that I mention exactly how many of
| | 01:40 | those were received through evaluation.
| | 01:43 | So I'm going to add some notes and all
I need to do is to go up to View button
| | 01:46 | and change to Show Presenter Notes. So
this will show me my slide and split the
| | 01:52 | screen down below where I can start
entering notes. You can see there is a
| | 01:55 | small area down here for notes,
but I can type in quite a bit here.
| | 01:59 | If I need more room I can come over
here to the slider and just kind of split
| | 02:04 | the screen giving me more room for my
notes. When I start to cut off the slides,
| | 02:08 | then I can zoom out. Right now 100%
is selected, but if I go down to 75,
| | 02:13 | you can see I can view the slide in its
entirety, yet still have more room for
| | 02:17 | typing notes down below.
| | 02:19 | All right! So, let's just enter a
quick note just so we have one. 'Remember to
| | 02:26 | mention 143 positives quotes' and let's
say '98 from post conference evaluations.'
| | 02:42 | There we go. So that's the information
I want to make sure I remember to share
| | 02:45 | when I come to this slide in my
presentation. When I play this presentation
| | 02:49 | with a single monitor, I won't see
those notes. So if I click Play right now,
| | 02:54 | you will see that it's only the slide
itself that shows up. When I click and
| | 02:58 | move onto the next slide, I never
see those notes. I'm going to I press
| | 03:03 | Escape and go back to slide number two.
| | 03:06 | So you got a couple of options, if you
are using a projector then that would
| | 03:09 | act as a second monitor. I'm going to
be showing you in an upcoming lesson how
| | 03:13 | to use dual monitors, so you can view
your notes on your screen and have your
| | 03:17 | audience view only the slide in the
presentation. But if you don't have that
| | 03:22 | luxury, there is another option
and that is to print out your notes.
| | 03:26 | So what we are going to do is go up to
the File menu and we are going to click
| | 03:29 | on Print, as so we were about to print
this presentation. Now by default what's
| | 03:34 | going to happen here is every slide in
your presentation will be printed out on
| | 03:37 | a single page. That's the default print
option. But we are going to go up here
| | 03:41 | where it says Copies & Pages and we
are going to move down to Keynote to see
| | 03:46 | the Keynote Options.
| | 03:47 | You can see Individual Slides is at top,
Slides With Notes, Outline, Handout
| | 03:52 | and so on. We are going to talk about
them later, but Slides With Notes we want
| | 03:56 | selected and once we have got
that selected, by default again,
| | 04:01 | you're going to get one slide at the top
of your page and any notes down below.
| | 04:06 | Odds are you are going to have a lot of
wasted space. So there are some layout
| | 04:09 | options you should know about as well.
| | 04:11 | So if I go to the Keynote button here
and scroll up to Layout and click on
| | 04:16 | Layout, you can see there is my one
page, so Pages per Sheet is set to 1 by default.
| | 04:20 | But I can come in here and change
that to 2. Now I have a slide at the
| | 04:25 | top and bottom and any notes under each
slide, if they exist. I also have other
| | 04:30 | option like 4, 6, 9 and so on. I'm
going to go to 4, because I find that that's
| | 04:35 | probably the best. I get to see four
previews of my slides so I know where
| | 04:39 | I'm going in my presentation and
I can read those notes down below.
| | 04:42 | They're not too small or too hard to read.
| | 04:45 | They want to split up these slides too.
By default you won't see their border
| | 04:48 | or anything. So we can set our borders
like a single hairline, a thin line, and
| | 04:55 | we can even do doubles as well. So
I'm going to use a single thin line.
| | 04:59 | Let's see how that look likes. I'm going to
click on Preview here. This will show me
| | 05:03 | the preview of my entire
presentation the way it's going to print.
| | 05:06 | So instead of printing on all kinds of
pages, you can see that I'm getting four
| | 05:10 | slides per page. There are those
lines around down, and you can see
| | 05:15 | on slide number 2, it's fairly easy
even in this view to read those notes.
| | 05:19 | Imagine printing it out in full size.
I'll definitely be able to read those and
| | 05:24 | then I know what's coming next in my
slide presentation, because I'll have
| | 05:28 | these thumbnails showing up
on my printed pieces of paper.
| | 05:32 | So here we have got, instead of 9
slides, we have got 3 sheets of paper.
| | 05:36 | In fact the third one is just a blank
slide, so we have really narrowed it down
| | 05:40 | from nine to two sheets of
paper that are going to print.
| | 05:43 | All right, I'm done with the preview.
I'm going to go up to Preview and click that.
| | 05:46 | It takes me back to Keynote and
that covers notes. Now like I said later on,
| | 05:52 | we are going to look at how you
can present and be able to visually see
| | 05:55 | your notes on your screen while your
audience sees only the slide and not your notes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Presenter tools| 00:00 | In the previous lesson we talked about
adding Presenter Notes, so you know what
| | 00:04 | you are going to say when you come to a
slide in your presentation. And I also
| | 00:07 | mentioned that if you have got dual
monitors, so dual displays, in other words
| | 00:11 | something you are going to see versus
what the audience sees whether that's a
| | 00:15 | projector or a second monitor, then you
have the ability to adjust what you see
| | 00:19 | versus what your audience sees.
| | 00:21 | That's what we are going to talk about
in this lesson. You can see I'm still on
| | 00:25 | slide number two from the previous
lesson where we entered some notes.
[00:00:29.00
Now if you're jumping to this lesson and
you've got the Exercise Files, you can open up
| | 00:32 | PresentingB and click on slide number
2 to be all caught up. From the View
| | 00:37 | dropdown, we have chosen to Show
Presenter Notes. Mine says Hide Presenter
| | 00:40 | Notes now, because my notes
are open down at the bottom.
| | 00:44 | All right, let's go back up to Slide 1
now and add an additional note here.
| | 00:48 | So we have got notes on our first
two slides. Here's our tidal slide.
| | 00:52 | I'm just going to be myself in note
here to mention names of guest speakers.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to say give a brief
overview of their credentials.
| | 01:11 | All right, so for our purposes that's
enough down here below in the notes and
| | 01:15 | now if we have got a Mac that supports
dual monitors, so you'll have to look at
| | 01:18 | the back of your Mac and see if you
have got two ports, that's your graphic
| | 01:22 | card, or if you are using a notebook
where you can hook up a projector, then
| | 01:25 | you are going to be able to adjust what
you see versus what your audience sees,
| | 01:29 | and we do that by going up
to the Keynote Preferences.
| | 01:33 | So clicking Keynote, then
Preferences, and now we are going to click on
| | 01:36 | Presenter Display. If you do have the
ability to have dual monitors or hook up a
| | 01:42 | projector, you want to make sure this
the top one is selected and it is by default,
| | 01:46 | Use alternate display to view
presenter information. So by default,
| | 01:51 | everyone is going to see the slide
presentation itself. With this checked off
| | 01:56 | and another monitor or a projector
attached, you can then choose what's going
| | 02:00 | to be shown on the presenter display.
That's the checkboxes you see down below.
| | 02:06 | So all of these apply to what the
presenter sees. For example the current slide
| | 02:10 | is selected. You want to be able to see
the slide that everyone else is seeing.
| | 02:13 | That's checked off by default. It's not
bad to be able to see the next slide so
| | 02:17 | you know exactly where you are going.
That way you can kind of introduce the
| | 02:21 | next slide before you display it and
then there is no empty space in there
| | 02:26 | where you are trying to remember
what's coming up next and then once you see it,
| | 02:29 | think about what you need to say and so on.
| | 02:31 | So I would like to leave that one
checked off. Now we have used Presenter Notes.
| | 02:35 | We have added presenter notes to
our presentation so we should turn that
| | 02:38 | one on by clicking the checkbox.
Then you have the ability to display the clock.
| | 02:43 | That's going to display you the
current time. I would like that one when
| | 02:46 | I'm presenting right before a lunch.
It's a good idea to stay on time with your
| | 02:49 | presentation when people are getting hungry.
| | 02:52 | Another option though is to use a timer.
So, for example, if I know I've got 30
| | 02:58 | minutes to present, I have the
opportunity down here to show the time remaining
| | 03:03 | or the elapsed time. So it can count up to
30 minutes or it can count down from 30 minutes.
| | 03:07 | Whatever I enter in here
though is what's going to be counted.
| | 03:12 | So I'm going to type in 30 here. I would
rather show the time remaining, let it count
| | 03:16 | down, so I'm going to come in here
and put in 30 for that. There we go.
| | 03:21 | So zero hours, thirty minutes.
| | 03:24 | The other thing I can display on my
Presenter Screen is the Ready to advance
| | 03:28 | indicator. It's a bar that goes
across the top of the screen. Now on your
| | 03:32 | presenter display, you are not going
to see all of those animations
| | 03:35 | we talked about in the previous chapter.
So you won't see slide transitions,
| | 03:39 | you are not going to see
the object builds and so on.
| | 03:42 | So while those items are building,
you're not ready to move on to the next slide
| | 03:46 | and if you can't see what your audience
is seeing, for example, if you have to
| | 03:49 | turn around to look at the
projector screen or you can't even see their
| | 03:53 | monitor, you will want to turn that
one on because it will turn red while
| | 03:57 | things are happening on screen, so you know
you shouldn't be advancing to the next screen,
| | 04:02 | and when it turns
green then all systems are go.
| | 04:06 | So let's see what that looks like now.
We can do that by going to the Edit
| | 04:11 | Presenter Layout button down below. So
we have got everything checked off here.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to click on Edit Presenter
Layout, and you can see the Presenter
| | 04:19 | Display options appear here on the top
left-hand corner of my screen and then
| | 04:24 | I'm getting a preview down below up of
what I'm going to see as a presenter.
| | 04:28 | So for example slide number one is the
current slide, and it's kind of hard to
| | 04:32 | see behind here, but current slide
one of nine. I can see that right at the top.
| | 04:36 | That's what my audience is seeing,
just this slide. So, on my screen
| | 04:41 | I'm seeing the slide. I'm seeing the
next slide. There is my clock so I can see
| | 04:47 | the actual time. Over here on the
right is my timer and that's going to be
| | 04:52 | counting down from 30 when I start
my presentation, and there is my notes
| | 04:57 | down below for this particular slide.
Notice it reminds me these are the notes
| | 05:01 | for Slide 1.
| | 05:03 | Now when both slides are at the same
size like they are here, the current and
| | 05:07 | the next slide, you may get confused
about what you should be looking at.
| | 05:10 | So I don't mind actually moving things
around and sizing them which you can do from
| | 05:16 | here in the Presenter Display Properties.
| | 05:18 | So for example, here at the current
slide, I'm going to move that actually
| | 05:22 | right to about there and just stretch
it out, going down to the corner.
| | 05:26 | I'm going to stretch it out a little bit.
I'm going to move these notes up to the top.
| | 05:30 | I prefer to see them at the top of
my screen. That allows me to move my clock down.
| | 05:35 | It doesn't need to be quite
that big. The timer I do want that size,
| | 05:40 | and this particular slide here,
the next slide, it can be smaller so
| | 05:45 | I know that it's the next slide, not
the current slide. I can make this even
| | 05:48 | bigger so it's easy to look at. There we go.
| | 05:51 | So you can see depending on what's
checked off here, I have got all those
| | 05:54 | items on my screen. I can move them
around. I can size them to my liking.
| | 05:58 | If I want to go back to the defaults,
it's as easy as clicking Use Defaults.
| | 06:02 | Now when I think about it, I really
don't even need the clock, so I can turn it
| | 06:05 | off right from here. It gives me even
more room to increase the size of this slide.
| | 06:09 | I can move it down here perhaps
and once I have got everything just
| | 06:13 | the way I want, I click the Done button.
So I'm done setting up the layout using
| | 06:18 | these preferences. So I can close up
the Preferences and I'm ready to save my
| | 06:23 | changes and start presenting.
| | 06:26 | So those are some of the presentation
tools that you have at your disposal.
| | 06:29 | Keep in mind you will need the ability
to have dual monitors, whether that's a
| | 06:34 | projector on your notebook or on your
Mac tower having two actual monitors
| | 06:40 | plugged into the back.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording voice narration| 00:00 | Something that's brand new to Keynote
2008 is the ability to record narration
| | 00:05 | in a presentation. So if you
wanted to set up a presentation to play
| | 00:09 | automatically and have people hear you
presenting the information, you don't
| | 00:13 | even have to be there anymore. You
just record narration over the slides and
| | 00:17 | the timings are saved with that
narration. It's really easy to do.
| | 00:21 | Of course, you are going to need some
kind of recording device attached to your Mac.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to go up to my System
Preferences here and just show you that
| | 00:30 | we can setup our external mic, for
example, if we set one up by going to
| | 00:35 | the Input button here from the Sound
Preferences. You can see I have got a line-in,
| | 00:40 | it's an audio line-in port that I'm using.
Down below you can see my Input level
| | 00:45 | as I'm speaking to you right now.
You can see the level is coming up, fairly high,
| | 00:49 | fairly close to the top and
that's adjustable. I can move the sliders
| | 00:52 | left or right to adjust my Input volume,
bring it down to the left and up to the right.
| | 00:57 | Down below I also have the ability to
setup my Output volume. So how loud is
| | 01:01 | this going to be when we play it back.
So you have a slider for that as well.
| | 01:06 | So I just wanted to show you that
those are there. You will want that setup
| | 01:08 | before you can start to
think about recording narration.
| | 01:12 | Now in Keynote, we are ready to
record our narration as we play through
| | 01:15 | the slide presentation. Now, if you have
got exercise files, you will need to open
| | 01:19 | up PresentingC. This is a presentation
where we have taken out all the builds
| | 01:24 | and transitions and so on.
| | 01:25 | We could keep the transitions and
the builds, but as far as timings go,
| | 01:29 | automatically Keynote is going to store
timings as you move from slide to slide
| | 01:34 | with a click of the mouse, and as you
speak into your external microphone as
| | 01:38 | you record narration.
| | 01:39 | Let me show you what I'm talking about.
So I'm on slide number 1 here.
| | 01:42 | There are two different ways to start
recording. I can go to the File menu and
| | 01:46 | you will see Record Slideshow appears here.
Because we have got the external mic setup,
| | 01:51 | it's going to be able
to record my narration as well.
| | 01:53 | Another option is to go to the
Inspector here. We are going to go to our
| | 01:57 | Document Inspector and click on Audio,
and from here down below you can see
| | 02:02 | Slideshow Recording, and clicking the
Record button here would be the same
| | 02:06 | thing as going up to the File menu.
| | 02:07 | We will also have some options later on
for adjusting the volume here, as well
| | 02:11 | as clearing the recording if we don't
like what we have got and we want to start over.
| | 02:15 | So I'm going to start with slide
number 1 here. I'm going to close this up
| | 02:19 | actually. I like to go to the File menu
and Record Slideshow. It's going to go
| | 02:24 | right into Presentation mode, so you
got to be ready to speak when you click
| | 02:28 | Record Slideshow.
| | 02:30 | "Hi and welcome to the Customer
Conference for March 2008, featuring
| | 02:34 | world-renowned speakers from across
the globe." So now I'm going to hit my spacebar,
| | 02:39 | and of course I'm recording
everything that I'm saying to you right now
| | 02:42 | as well. Notice in the top left corner
that I have got that little flashing
| | 02:45 | red light, indicating that
I'm in recording mode right now.
| | 02:49 | "Here's what our customers have said in
the past." So I give some time for people
| | 02:53 | to read this before moving on to the next slide.
| | 02:56 | "Possible venues for our next user
conference include the Congress Center, where
| | 03:01 | we'll have two ballrooms to choose
from. The Hilton Sheraton and
| | 03:04 | Chateau deLaurier are other
options in the city of Ottawa."
| | 03:08 | Moving on to the next slide, "Here
are some attendance figures for 2007."
| | 03:15 | "This year's entertainment will
be provided by The Jellybricks."
| | 03:18 | (Rock music plays.)
| | 03:27 | "Here is venue number 1, venue number 2.
Possible excursions include trips to
| | 03:35 | the city, and here are the websites."
| | 03:38 | When I'm done recording my narration,
I just press Escape like I would to end a
| | 03:43 | presentation. It takes me out and
everything has been recorded. Now, I need to
| | 03:47 | save my changes from the File menu here.
I definitely want to save what I've done so far.
| | 03:52 | I'm going to go back to slide
number 1. No, I'm not going to speak.
| | 03:56 | I'm just going to hit the Play
button here and you can sit back and
| | 03:59 | watch this presentation.
| | 04:01 | Recording: Hi and welcome to the
Customer Conference for March 2008,
| | 04:04 | Recording: ...featuring world-renowned
speakers from across the globe.
| | 04:08 | Recording: So now I'm going to hit my spacebar,
| | 04:10 | Recording: ...and of course I'm recording
everything that I'm saying to you right now as well.
| | 04:13 | Recording: Notice in the top left corner
that I have got that little flashing red light,
| | 04:16 | Recording: indicating that I'm in
recording mode right now. Here's what our customer--
| | 04:22 | All right, of course, your audience
will never see that flashing red light.
| | 04:25 | That's only while you are recording.
I just pressed Escape to leave the
| | 04:28 | presentation. But you can see that because
I was controlling the timing of each slide
| | 04:33 | as I'm recording, moving from
slide to slide, now I have got this slideshow
| | 04:38 | that's ready to
play automatically if I want to.
| | 04:40 | I could go back to the Inspector,
for example, here and go up to my Slide
| | 04:46 | Inspector, and you can see I can add
some effects and so on now if I wanted to,
| | 04:51 | but the timings are set for me
according to the actual narration.
| | 04:55 | Here in the Document Inspector too,
if I wanted to I could click on Document
| | 04:59 | and make this an automatically playing
slideshow, so when it opens, it starts
| | 05:03 | playing and it's just going to loop.
| | 05:05 | Now, notice that when I click on an
option here, I'm going to be editing my
| | 05:09 | slide presentation. Are you sure you
want to edit your slideshow because
| | 05:12 | editing slides might make the
recording out of sync with the slideshow?
| | 05:16 | You really have to be careful about
what kind of editing you do after the
| | 05:19 | narration. It's always a good
idea to do the narration last.
| | 05:23 | So I'm going to click Cancel. This
takes me back to my Document Inspector.
| | 05:28 | In this case, choosing automatically
play upon open and looping the slideshow
| | 05:32 | would not affect the narration
synchronization. So I'll see that message
| | 05:37 | pop-up every time I try to make a
change to the slide presentation now,
| | 05:40 | but in some cases it won't be affected.
| | 05:42 | I am going to close this up. That covers
a brand new feature in Keynote 2008: narration.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing handouts| 00:00 | All right, we are going to go back to
the scenario where you are presenting live,
| | 00:03 | in front of an audience, you have
got your presentation up on a big screen,
| | 00:06 | they are going to see the contents
of your slide while you speak to
| | 00:09 | them about those slides.
| | 00:12 | Now, as I think back to the times when
I presented, not once has nobody come up
| | 00:17 | to me after a presentation and said, do
you have any handouts? Can I get a copy
| | 00:21 | of your presentation, for example?
| | 00:23 | So in this lesson we are going to
talk about printing out handouts for an
| | 00:26 | audience that you are presenting to.
| | 00:28 | The other thing that I have never
done is giving out my presentation in a
| | 00:32 | handout format before I present.
Always after, because I want people paying
| | 00:36 | attention to what I'm saying and what
they are seeing up on the big screen.
| | 00:39 | I don't need them flipping ahead
through the handouts. But it is nice to have them
| | 00:43 | at the end of a presentation so
they can walk away with some information.
| | 00:48 | That's totally up to you how you
handle that, but we are going to look at
| | 00:52 | printing handouts for
your audience in this lesson.
| | 00:54 | You will notice that I have got
PresentingD open here. If you have been
| | 00:58 | following along, no problem. If you
are jumping to this lesson, open up
| | 01:03 | PresentingD from the
exercises files, if you have got them.
| | 01:06 | In the previous lesson we talked about
recording narration. The first thing
| | 01:09 | I'm going to do with my presentation is
clear that recording. So I'm going to go up
| | 01:13 | to File and choose Clear Recording,
and I'm going to click on Clear to remove
| | 01:17 | that recording, because I'll be
presenting live, so I don't need that in there.
| | 01:21 | I don't need people to hear that if
there happens to be a speaker on my
| | 01:25 | computer or whatever.
| | 01:26 | So I'm going to take out that recording
and now I'm going to go up to the File
| | 01:30 | menu again, but this time down to
Print to look at handouts. Handouts fall
| | 01:36 | under the Keynote Print options, so
I'm going to change Copies & Pages to
| | 01:39 | Keynote here.
| | 01:41 | Next, I want to make sure Handout is
selected, and down below you are going to
| | 01:45 | see options for printing handouts.
| | 01:48 | Now, I have already worked with this
presentation, change things up a little
| | 01:51 | bit to 2 slides per page, but you can
choose a number of slides that appear on
| | 01:55 | a page to save paper. Obviously, the
more slides, the better. Of course, the
| | 02:00 | more slides, the harder it is to read
the contents of those slides. So I often
| | 02:04 | like to go to about 3 slides per page.
That way the slides are big enough to
| | 02:08 | read their contents and then there is
space on the page as well should anyone
| | 02:12 | want to take notes.
| | 02:14 | Adding divider lines is something I
like to check off. So I want to make sure
| | 02:17 | that that's there so they know where
it goes from one slide to the next.
| | 02:21 | Another option is to choose Draft-
quality printout, which will save you some
| | 02:25 | printing cost. As I look at my
presentation, which has that black background
| | 02:29 | according to my theme, I'm going to
turn that off because probably people won't
| | 02:34 | even see anything printed on the slide
if I leave it selected as Draft-quality.
| | 02:39 | I have some notes on various slides,
some presenter notes that we talked about
| | 02:43 | in a previous lesson. If I want my
audience to be able to see my notes, I'll
| | 02:46 | check that off. I don't want them
reading my notes. They can add their own
| | 02:50 | notes if they want, so clicking this
checkbox down here, Add rule lines, will
| | 02:55 | create a space on the page
where they can take notes.
| | 02:57 | Now, if you are going to add rule
lines and you are going to provide a space
| | 03:01 | for them to take notes, you might have
to give your handouts to your audience
| | 03:06 | at the beginning of your presentation.
Of course, you risk that chance that
| | 03:10 | they will be flipping through and
going ahead of you, but if you want them to
| | 03:12 | be able to take notes, adding
rule lines is a great option.
| | 03:17 | So I have made some selections here,
3 slides per page. I'm going to have
| | 03:20 | divider lines and rule lines, but high
quality printout, no notes. They won't
| | 03:25 | see my speaker notes. I'm going to
click Preview to see what that's going to
| | 03:28 | look like when I send it off to the printer.
| | 03:31 | So here you can see the thumbnails on
the right, instead of, looks like 11
| | 03:36 | different slides or 11 different pages,
I brought it down to 4 pages that will be printed.
| | 03:42 | The bottom line of each slide here is
that separator we turned on. Then you can
| | 03:48 | see the rule lines as well have been
added, where people can write notes based
| | 03:53 | on what I'm saying about each
slide here. That they have a thumbnail
| | 03:56 | representation on the left side of the
printed page. So each one of the slides
| | 04:01 | will print out the way they see it on
my screen, in a fairly high quality, and
| | 04:05 | they will be able to take notes.
| | 04:07 | If I'm happy with what I have got,
I simply click the Print button. I'm going
| | 04:12 | to come down to Cancel though. I'm
going to cancel this preview and in fact,
| | 04:17 | I'm going to close up the preview
altogether. Clicking Preview, Quit Preview,
| | 04:21 | returns me to my presentation.
| | 04:23 | So it's good to know that if you are
presenting to a live audience, odds are
| | 04:27 | pretty good someone, at least one
person, will ask you for a copy of your
| | 04:31 | presentation, but creating handouts,
printing them out, and giving them to your
| | 04:35 | audience, either during the
presentation or after, is totally up to you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to QuickTime| 00:00 | In the upcoming movies we are going
to look at the various formats you can
| | 00:03 | export your Keynote presentation to,
because when you save a presentation in
| | 00:07 | Keynote, by default, it's saved to
the Keynote format. So if you don't have
| | 00:12 | Keynote or if you don't have a Mac,
you are not going to be able to view this
| | 00:16 | presentation.
| | 00:17 | So if you are going to be sharing your
presentation with others or if you're
| | 00:20 | going to be taking your presentation
on the road and maybe using machines you
| | 00:23 | are not familiar with, you might want
to save it or export it to another format
| | 00:28 | and in this lesson we are going
to look at the QuickTime format.
| | 00:31 | QuickTime is a downloadable application
that's free. Most PCs have it and every
| | 00:38 | Mac has QuickTime installed. So you
can rest-assure that if you export your
| | 00:42 | presentation to QuickTime, no matter
what computer you are playing it on,
| | 00:45 | you are going to be able to view it. Even
if the machine doesn't have QuickTime,
| | 00:49 | it's a free download. So there you go.
| | 00:52 | In this lesson we'll export our
current presentation here to a QuickTime
| | 00:56 | format, which is a .mov file. I'm using
PresentingE, which has some transitions
| | 01:02 | and some build effects and so on, so if
you have got Exercise Files, open this
| | 01:06 | one up to follow along.
| | 01:07 | Now we are going to go up to the File
menu and we are going to go to Export and
| | 01:12 | here you will see the different
formats we can export to. We have got
| | 01:15 | QuickTime, PowerPoint, so the
Microsoft application, PDF or Portal Document
| | 01:21 | files, Images, Flash format, we can
go to HTML and even to the iPod. We are
| | 01:27 | going to look at all of these in this
chapter, starting with QuickTime, which
| | 01:31 | is selected here at the beginning of the list.
| | 01:34 | So creating a QuickTime movie that can
be viewed on Macs and Windows, Playback
| | 01:39 | Uses Manual Advance, if we so choose,
that's a default but I can choose
| | 01:43 | Hyperlinks if I wanted to. Of course,
I would have to have hyperlinks on each
| | 01:48 | of my slides to take me to the
various slides or other locations.
| | 01:53 | Also, Fixed Timing is an option. So
if you are using slide timings in here,
| | 01:57 | they will be used but you can also set
up slide durations and build durations
| | 02:01 | here as well. Then Repeat options, if
you wanted to when it gets to the end, to
| | 02:06 | loop back and start over, or to go
backwards from the end of the slide
| | 02:10 | presentation to the beginning and then
from the beginning to the end and back
| | 02:14 | and forth. That's also an option. I'm
going to choose no looping for this case.
| | 02:18 | In fact, I'm going to go up and use the
Manual Advance. So just like playing a
| | 02:23 | presentation in Keynote, I'll be
clicking my mouse to move from slide to slide,
| | 02:28 | or hitting a key on the keyboard.
| | 02:30 | We also have formats to choose from and
you can see that Full Quality, Large is
| | 02:34 | selected here, by default, for me and
Full Quality, Large means we are going to
| | 02:38 | get the best quality possible, but
our presentation depending on what it
| | 02:43 | contains like movies, an audio, and
special effects, could be quite large in file size.
| | 02:50 | So if that's an issue and you want
to store it on a CD or email it out to
| | 02:54 | people, you can choose from some
different formats like CD-ROM Movie, or the
| | 02:59 | smallest here is Web Movie. You can
even set up your own options by going to
| | 03:03 | Custom here. I'm going to leave Full
Quality, Large and if you can choose
| | 03:08 | Full Quality, Large, do it. If you can't,
then you have those other formats to choose from.
| | 03:15 | I want to include any audio, sound
files and movie audio. I know that my
| | 03:19 | presentation does have some sounds
and it does have a movie in it of the
| | 03:23 | entertainment for our User Conference,
so I want to leave that checked off.
| | 03:27 | I also know that there is logo in
here where we have worked with some
| | 03:31 | transparency. Remember Instant Alpha
from a previous lesson? So I want to
| | 03:35 | include those transparent images. I
want to be able to see through them just
| | 03:39 | like I do in my Keynote presentation.
| | 03:41 | So you can see what's happening down
here for Video Compressor, the Video Size
| | 03:46 | and the Frames per second, all
depended on what we choose up here. See when I
| | 03:50 | choose, Small, how that changes. So
I'm going to go back to Full Quality,
| | 03:54 | Large, move on to the next screen.
| | 03:57 | Here is where we get to name it and
choose a location to store this. I'm going
| | 04:01 | to store this on my Desktop. I'm going
to keep the same name, PresentingE, but
| | 04:05 | this is going to be in different format.
It's going to be a .mov file when it's
| | 04:09 | done and I'm going to click on Export.
| | 04:11 | What's kind of neat is the Export
allows me to see the various slides as they
| | 04:17 | are being exported and each of the
transitions and the build effects that you
| | 04:21 | see here going on. So I get to preview
the presentation as it is exporting to
| | 04:26 | the chosen format. Now depending on
the contents of your presentation, this
| | 04:31 | could take a while. So if you have
got some very heavy special effects,
| | 04:35 | you have got movies in there, if you have
got sound files, all of those kind of
| | 04:40 | increase the length of time it's
going to take to export your movie.
| | 04:44 | Here you can see we have got little bit
of movie within a movie and that's kind
| | 04:47 | of neat that we can even do that.
There is our Smart Builds with our photos,
| | 04:51 | you can see that's going to work in
our QuickTime movie as well and then it
| | 04:54 | finally reaches the last slide and
it's done. That's it. We are still in
| | 04:58 | Keynote working on our PresentingE
presentation in Keynote, but if I move this
| | 05:02 | out of the way, you can see on the
Desktop now, I have got PresentingE the
| | 05:06 | QuickTime movie.
| | 05:08 | So to play that, I just double-
click it and one of the options was to
| | 05:12 | automatically play in Full Screen, I
don't know if you saw that checkbox, we'll
| | 05:16 | take a look at it in a second. But
that's an option that I like to leave on
| | 05:20 | because then the presentation will
fill the screen just like it would in
| | 05:23 | Keynote when we are playing a presentation.
| | 05:27 | So we chose Manual. That means
clicking the mouse is going to move us from
| | 05:30 | slide to slide. You can see how it's
flipping the pages for me. There is my
| | 05:34 | build effects for the title, you can
see another cool effect down here at the
| | 05:39 | bottom and then each of my bullets
come in automatically using some build
| | 05:44 | timings that we set up in this presentation.
| | 05:47 | All the special effects look pretty
much like they did in Keynote, so that's
| | 05:51 | kind of neat. We go to the next slide.
There is some more effects. Every click
| | 05:58 | takes me to the next slide. Some of
these builds are automatic; some of them
| | 06:02 | are not and require a click. Here is
our chart. Here is a Build Out effect.
| | 06:12 | There is the end. It's going to be
entertaining at this year's User Conference.
| | 06:20 | With a click, we are hearing the actual
sound as well as viewing that movie we
| | 06:23 | shortened it up for this particular scenario.
| | 06:26 | Now we go to our Venues with our Smart
Build, very interesting and then that
| | 06:36 | takes us to our very last slide.
Now just like when we are playing a
| | 06:40 | presentation in Keynote, pressing
Escape doesn't necessarily stop the
| | 06:44 | presentation but it kind of not
minimizes but restores the window to a size
| | 06:49 | where I can come in here and close up
the movie. I can even quit QuickTime up
| | 06:54 | here and return back to my Keynote
presentation. I'm just going to move that
| | 06:59 | over where we can see it.
| | 07:00 | That covers exporting to QuickTime, a
very popular format. Odds are good that
| | 07:05 | if you export your presentation to
QuickTime, you will be able to play it anywhere.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to PowerPoint| 00:00 | In the previous lesson we exported
our presentation to a QuickTime movie
| | 00:04 | format, which is ideal for showing our
presentation on any computer. Whether
| | 00:08 | it's a Mac or a Windows PC, QuickTime
is going to work and it's going to look
| | 00:12 | exactly like our Keynote presentation.
| | 00:15 | Now we are going to look at exporting
to the most popular presentation format,
| | 00:20 | which is Microsoft PowerPoint. Now I
didn't say the best format, I just said,
| | 00:25 | the most popular format, and that's
because we have a lot of cool things we can
| | 00:29 | do with Keynote that won't translate
over to PowerPoint and vice-versa for that matter.
| | 00:35 | So again we are going to go up to
File and Export and I'm still using
| | 00:39 | PresentingE from the previous lesson.
If you have got the Exercise Files and
| | 00:43 | you are jumping to this lesson, you
can open up PresentingE, go up to File,
| | 00:46 | choose Export and second
on the list is PowerPoint.
| | 00:50 | Now there is not much to exporting to
PowerPoint. You just select it here and
| | 00:54 | you click Next, choose a name and
location for it, and off it goes. The problem
| | 00:59 | is depending on your presentation
and how fancy you have got with that
| | 01:02 | presentation as far as adding audio and
video, transitions and builds, a lot of
| | 01:08 | that may not translate over, in fact,
you may not even be able to export your
| | 01:12 | presentation.
| | 01:12 | So let's see what happens with this
one. We know it's full of transitions,
| | 01:17 | build effects, we have got some audio
and video in there as well, so when we
| | 01:21 | hit Next and -- I'm going to keep the
same name, PresentingE. It's going to be
| | 01:25 | a new format though and I'm going to
put it on the Desktop. It's going to be a
| | 01:29 | PowerPoint format, PPT, and when I
hit Export, let's see what happens.
| | 01:33 | You can see it's exporting to PowerPoint.
So far so good, and as it gets to the
| | 01:38 | end, look at this. Some warnings
occurred. Would you like to review them now?
| | 01:43 | If I choose Don't Review, I'll just
end up with my PowerPoint presentation on
| | 01:47 | the Desktop, and I won't really know
what's going on but I'm going to click
| | 01:50 | Review to see the document warnings.
| | 01:53 | So conditional formatting isn't
supported in PowerPoint. So where in our table
| | 01:59 | we set if the number was over a
certain value to appear in a color and if it
| | 02:02 | was below a certain value to show up
in a different color on Slide 4, we see
| | 02:06 | that right here. So the last value was
retained. All right, something happened
| | 02:10 | automatically for me. Movie start and
end times aren't supported in PowerPoint.
| | 02:14 | The movie was trimmed to
the start and end times, okay.
| | 02:17 | Instant Alpha isn't supported in the
chosen file format. Remember in the
| | 02:21 | previous lesson when we exported the
QuickTime, we had the ability to choose
| | 02:25 | transparencies and just show those,
while we can't going over to PowerPoint, so
| | 02:30 | our JellyBricks logo for our
entertainment isn't going to appear with that
| | 02:35 | transparent background. So Instant
Alpha not supported going to PowerPoint.
| | 02:40 | Smart Builds aren't supported. That's
brand new in Keynote '08 and that's where
| | 02:45 | we have multiple images, kind of on a
Turntable kind of effect, not supported
| | 02:49 | in PowerPoint. So you can see what's
happening here. The chosen file format was
| | 02:53 | converted to grouped images
and the build effect was removed.
| | 02:58 | Now I'm only seeing four. Notice that I
have got a slider over here. That means
| | 03:02 | I probably got some more down below and
in fact, I have got quite a few export
| | 03:06 | warnings. I do get information and
information about not just what happened but
| | 03:12 | how it got fixed which is great. I
can close this up and try to play my
| | 03:17 | presentation in PowerPoint but
there is a lesson to be learned here.
| | 03:20 | When you are exporting your
presentations to a PowerPoint format-- it may be
| | 03:24 | you are collaborating with someone who
doesn't have Keynote and doesn't have a Mac.
| | 03:27 | That's great because you can
still work in PowerPoint format, but try to
| | 03:32 | keep it simple here in Keynote.
| | 03:34 | If the end presentation is going to be
a PowerPoint presentation, skip all the
| | 03:38 | transitions and builds and special
effects in your Keynote presentation, just
| | 03:42 | keep it simple, get the content in there,
export it over to PowerPoint, and do
| | 03:47 | all of that customizing in PowerPoint.
| | 03:49 | So if I move this out of the way, you
can see I have got another presentation
| | 03:53 | in the background here, PresentingF,
just three simple slides with some text.
| | 03:58 | Let's see what happens when we export
this one. I'm going to go up to File and
| | 04:02 | Export. It didn't really do anything
with builds and transitions. The only
| | 04:07 | thing that's kind of funky is I have
got two columns here on the second slide.
| | 04:11 | PowerPoint is selected. I'll click Next.
| | 04:14 | I am going to keep the same name, put
it on the Desktop, and click Export. This
| | 04:19 | is much faster. Still there were some
warnings. I can click Review. It looks
| | 04:23 | like two of them. Text with font
shadows will look different, okay, and
| | 04:27 | Multicolumn text was exported as a
single column. So I can clear these once I
| | 04:31 | have read them and close this up.
| | 04:33 | So I'm going to move this one out of
the way now too and you can see I have got
| | 04:36 | some presentations over here. So
there is PresentingE. I'm going to
| | 04:41 | double-click it and that's going to
launch PowerPoint for me on the Mac and
| | 04:46 | I'll be able to view my
presentation here in PowerPoint.
| | 04:54 | So there it is. I'm going to move this
over. There is all the different slides
| | 04:58 | in my presentation in Outline View, and
I can come down to the bottom here and
| | 05:02 | click the Slideshow button to see what
this is going to look like. All right it
| | 05:07 | looks different. It looks like I have
got a speaker up here. I have got some
| | 05:10 | sound. That's a different effect, a
different transition similar to the page
| | 05:16 | curl that we used but a little bit different.
| | 05:20 | Here we are missing some of those
build effects where we had some sparkling
| | 05:25 | action and some flames going. Again a
different effect but at least we are
| | 05:31 | getting the content over, and we are
able to view the content. Build effects
| | 05:36 | and transitions and so on are very
similar in PowerPoint but named differently
| | 05:42 | and react differently so the Export
feature does a really good job in trying to
| | 05:46 | figure out what's closest to, what we
had in our Keynote presentation and what
| | 05:50 | it should look like in PowerPoint.
| | 05:51 | I am just clicking through the various
slides in my presentation, you see that
| | 06:00 | didn't really work very well with the
video, it got cut off, it took too long
| | 06:05 | to show up. This was my Smart Build and
you can see it just showed the one and
| | 06:10 | let me get on to the last page. I'm
going to hit Escape here and I'm going to
| | 06:13 | close up PowerPoint.
| | 06:14 | We will just return here to our Keynote
presentation. All right, so PresentingF
| | 06:24 | has only a couple of warnings. If we
move this out of the way and try to play
| | 06:29 | it at PowerPoint presentation, let's
give it a double-click, it's a little
| | 06:33 | faster to open up because it's smaller,
just move this over, come down to our
| | 06:39 | Slideshow button, so no special effects there.
| | 06:45 | The only thing that happened was on
slide number 2 here where we had two
| | 06:50 | columns. You can see it's one single
column but it looks okay still, the way it is.
| | 06:55 | So we have to do some fixing up here
in PowerPoint to get it looking exactly
| | 06:58 | the way we want, but the lesson is
if you are going to be finishing up in
| | 07:02 | PowerPoint, then you probably want to
do some very basic editing in Keynote,
| | 07:10 | Export to PowerPoint and then get fancy
with PowerPoint transitions and builds
| | 07:15 | and special effects and so on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to PDF| 00:00 | Yet another format you can export your
Keynote presentation to is PDF. So,
| | 00:05 | if we go up to File and select Export,
you'll notice that item number three on
| | 00:11 | the list is PDF. I'm still working with
PresentingE. So if you have got the
| | 00:16 | Exercise Files and you are jumping to
this lesson you can open up PresentingE
| | 00:20 | and click on PDF here from the Export window.
| | 00:23 | Now, PDF stands for Portable Document
Format. It's an Adobe format and if
| | 00:30 | you have got Adobe Reader, for example,
you can read any PDF. It's a free download.
| | 00:34 | If you have got Acrobat, you
can even make edits or changes to the
| | 00:39 | presentation after we have formatted it
and exported it to PDF. So keep that in mind.
| | 00:45 | Neat thing is that on a Mac, if
you have got Reader, no problem.
| | 00:50 | You can view the PDF and you can also
view PDFs here on a Mac using Preview and
| | 00:55 | we're going to look at that in a moment,
but first we need to export this presentation to PDF.
| | 01:00 | Now, keep in mind again in Keynote
we have got a lot of fancy buttons and
| | 01:04 | options for creating transitions and
build effects and so on. Obviously, not
| | 01:09 | everything is going to carry over to
another format like PDF, but let's see
| | 01:13 | what happens. You can see we have the
option down below to export our slides or
| | 01:17 | slides with our presenter notes attached,
if you don't want people seeing your
| | 01:21 | notes then don't select this one just
leave it at Slides and then some options
| | 01:25 | down below. Notice this one is
checked off by default: Print each stage of
| | 01:30 | builds. So I want you to think about a
build like a bulleted list, for example,
| | 01:34 | where our each bullet comes in
separately. That's a build effect and if we
| | 01:39 | export keeping those builds, what's
going to happen is a separate page is going
| | 01:43 | to be created for each version.
| | 01:45 | So as the first bullet comes in that's
my first page. The next page will have
| | 01:49 | two bullets and next one three, so it
looks like it's building on the same
| | 01:53 | slide but it's actually set the pages
you will see that in a moment as well.
| | 01:56 | If you selected slides to be skipped,
you can choose to include them in the
| | 02:00 | export, but leaving this check box
unselected means the skipped slides will not
| | 02:06 | be included in the export.
| | 02:07 | You can have borders around your slide,
which I kind of like. It makes it look
| | 02:10 | more like a slide as opposed to a page
and Include slide numbers if you want
| | 02:15 | your slides to be numbered I like that,
you can even include the date, so the
| | 02:19 | date will stamped on your slide
presentation once it's exported to PDF. I'm not
| | 02:24 | going to select that one. I'm going to
click Next. At this point I get to give
| | 02:28 | it a name. I'm going to keep the same
name again PresentingE, but the format's
| | 02:31 | going to be different. It's going to
be a PDF format going to my Desktop and
| | 02:36 | I'll click on Export.
| | 02:38 | Now, it doesn't take very long and
this is a presentation that has a quite a
| | 02:41 | few builds and transitions and so on.
So it will be interesting to see what
| | 02:46 | this looks like. Now, you can see on my
Desktop here as I move my presentation
| | 02:51 | out of the way, PresentingE.pdf does
appear here. I'm going to right-click on
| | 02:55 | it and I'm going to go up to Open With
and you can see that I can open it with
| | 02:59 | Preview and if I had Reader installed
I could open it with that as well.
| | 03:03 | I'm going to use Preview, which is the
default. So here it comes you can see down
| | 03:07 | the right hand side I have thumbnail
representations of each of the former slides.
| | 03:11 | Now, if I scroll down there is a lot
more pages than I have slides in my
| | 03:16 | presentation and that's because those
builds are talking up a separate page for
| | 03:21 | each build effect.
| | 03:23 | So here is my first slide and I can
move to the next one here and the next one
| | 03:28 | is blank, but there is a build here
where the title shows up and then the
| | 03:32 | bullets show up all together. So that
actually takes up three pages instead of
| | 03:36 | one slide, then we have got our
attendance figures with the table that's two
| | 03:41 | pages instead of one slide and then we
have got our graph which takes up a few
| | 03:46 | pages as well, same thing for
Entertainment and you can see just clicking the
| | 03:52 | Next or Previous buttons take
me through the various pages.
| | 03:55 | Now, our video did not come over
obviously sound and video are not going to
| | 03:59 | come over to a PDF format however,
if you do have Adobe Acrobat, the full
| | 04:04 | version, you can open this up in
Acrobat and add-in those audio clips and video
| | 04:10 | clips if you wanted to.
| | 04:11 | So I'm going to move through my
presentation eventually I come to the very last
| | 04:16 | page. Notice that as I come down to
this one which is a Hyperlink to an actual
| | 04:22 | web page that we setup in Keynote that
the Hyperlinks are maintained when we
| | 04:26 | export to PDFs so I could actually click,
for example, on this it will open up
| | 04:30 | my default browser Safari is open up
and it is taking me right to that website,
| | 04:35 | so I'm going to close that up and quit Safari.
| | 04:39 | So, this is just in our Preview mode
notice that in Preview here we have also
| | 04:43 | got View menu and here we have got PDF
Display, Single Pages, Facing Pages if
| | 04:49 | we wanted to. Lots of options in
Preview that we won't get into, but we also
| | 04:53 | have Slideshow down at the bottom,
which is interesting because this is kind of
| | 04:57 | like viewing a slide show. And I'm on
the last slide in my presentation so
| | 05:01 | pressing Escape will take me out and
I'm going to go back to slide number 1
| | 05:07 | here where I'm and change my view to
Slideshow. And you can see there is slide
| | 05:14 | 1. I have got my Play buttons down at
the bottom, Moving Back, Forward, Next,
| | 05:22 | Fit to Screen if I wanted to it's going
to increase it. I'm going to hit Play.
| | 05:27 | Now, if had some slide timings in
there, you can see what's happening it's
| | 05:30 | going on to the next one perfect. Now,
there are no transitions like I'm used
| | 05:36 | to seeing in Keynote, but there are
some build effects going on here because I
| | 05:41 | chose to create separate pages from
those build effects that I setup in Keynote.
| | 05:46 | I am going to press Escape, which does
take me out of that presentation mode,
| | 05:51 | and I'm going to come up to Preview
and Quit Preview. Keep in mind that you
| | 05:55 | have got varying options for playing
yours presentation once it's exported to
| | 05:59 | PDF odd are pretty good on a Windows PC
that it's going to have Reader, in fact
| | 06:04 | more likely then it's going to have
QuickTime, so this is not a bad option when
| | 06:09 | exporting your
presentation to share with others.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting as images| 00:00 | Yet another way to share your Keynote
presentation is to export it to images.
| | 00:06 | In this case, each of the slides in
your presentation becomes a separate image
| | 00:10 | that people can open up on their
computers using any kind of graphic software
| | 00:14 | that allows them to open up the images,
and if you have build effects going on
| | 00:18 | in you presentation, you can choose
to make each of those effects, each of
| | 00:21 | those builds a separate image as well.
And this is great if you wanted to share
| | 00:26 | individual slides with someone who
doesn't have Keynote or any other
| | 00:29 | presentation software, they can
open them up and view the content.
| | 00:33 | So, here we are with PresentingE open
still from previous lessons. If you have
| | 00:37 | got exercise files, you can go ahead
and open that one up, and then we'll go up
| | 00:40 | to File and Export just like we did in
previous lessons, but this time we'll
| | 00:44 | click on Images here. Now take a look
at some of the image options we have to
| | 00:50 | choose from when exporting our Keynote
presentation, do we want to export all
| | 00:53 | slides in our presentation? Notice I
have got nine slides over here, choosing
| | 00:58 | all is going to export each of those
as a separate image. However, if I come
| | 01:03 | down here and choose to create an
image for each stage of any builds in my
| | 01:06 | presentation, the number of images
will actually be larger than the number of
| | 01:11 | slides I have in my presentation.
| | 01:13 | I can also choose to select a range to
export, in this case let's say I wanted
| | 01:18 | to export slides 3 through 6. I would
type in a 3 here and a 6 over here, and
| | 01:24 | only those slides would be exported to
images, but I'm going to keep it at All,
| | 01:28 | so you can get the full effect.
| | 01:30 | Next we get to choose the format that
we are going to export to. Now JPEG you
| | 01:35 | can see is a variable quality. It uses
compression, so JPEG format is really
| | 01:41 | good for getting some pretty good-
looking images with very low file sizes. If I
| | 01:47 | click this button, now you can see I
have got PNG or ping format, which is a
| | 01:51 | higher quality, still uses some
compression, so you might see some loss of
| | 01:55 | quality in your images, but
it's a higher quality than JPEG.
| | 01:59 | And then the highest quality is TIFF,
there is no compression used here. When
| | 02:03 | we go through the various options,
you can see it depends on what you have
| | 02:08 | selected in format for what appears
down below, so for PNG there is no option
| | 02:12 | here for quality slider. When I go
back to JPEG, I can adjust the quality or
| | 02:17 | reduce the compression. In other words,
if I go all the way up to 100%. But
| | 02:21 | even with 100% selected for JPEG, it's
still not as good as PNG, and of course
| | 02:25 | TIFF is the highest quality, there is
no slider for that either, and it will
| | 02:30 | take up the most room on your hard drive.
| | 02:32 | So I'm going to go back to JPEG for
this particular exercise, and I'm going to
| | 02:37 | move this down to about half. All right,
all I need to do now is hit the Next
| | 02:42 | button, and choose a name and a
location. I'm going to keep PresentingE in
| | 02:47 | here, I'm going to move it to my desktop,
and I'm going to create a new folder,
| | 02:50 | because there is going to be multiple
images created from each slide and each
| | 02:54 | build in my slide.
| | 02:56 | So I'm going to choose New Folder here.
I'm going to type in Images and click
| | 03:01 | Create. It creates the new folder and
now when I hit Export, what's going to
| | 03:06 | happen is each of the slides and each
of the builds will be called Presenting
| | 03:09 | and then there will be some kind of
number format after that. So I'll click
| | 03:14 | Export, so you can see what happens,
the images are being exported now,
| | 03:18 | so I'm going to move this out of the way,
so you can see I have got this images folder now,
| | 03:22 | and I double click
that to view the contents.
| | 03:25 | So notice that I have got PresentingE.
That will appear at the beginning of
| | 03:28 | every one of my images. Then I have got
001-001, then I have got 002, and again
| | 03:37 | there is a dash because if there is
builds, I'll get numbering automatically
| | 03:40 | done for me in the second after that
number. So I do have some builds on slide three.
| | 03:45 | You can see PresentingE is 003-001,
003-002, 003-003. So I can use any
| | 03:53 | graphics application to open these up
and view the. I can copy them and paste
| | 03:58 | them into other applications, other
slide presenting software. If I wanted to
| | 04:03 | do it that way. The options are
limitless. I'm going to close this up and move
| | 04:07 | my Keynote presentation back into position.
| | 04:11 | So that covers exporting you slide
presentations from Keynote into Images.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to Flash| 00:01 | Yet another format we can export our
Keynote presentations to, specifically if
| | 00:06 | we are going to be viewing them on the
web, is a Flash format. Flash is ideal
| | 00:10 | for viewing over the web because of
the low file sizes, but you can still get
| | 00:14 | some pretty good effects.
| | 00:14 | Now, just before we export to Flash,
I want you to keep in mind a couple of things.
| | 00:18 | Just like when we are exporting
to PowerPoint, for example, there are a
| | 00:23 | lot of things in this presentation
called PresentingE that we are using, and
| | 00:26 | if you have got the exercise files, you
can open it up. We have got transitions,
| | 00:30 | we have got some fancy builds, we have
got audio, we have even got a movie in
| | 00:34 | this one. A lot of those things are
not going to translate when we export to Flash,
| | 00:38 | but the nice thing is the export
feature does tell us where things went wrong
| | 00:43 | and how they were resolved,
if they were at all.
| | 00:46 | So what we are going to do is go up
to the File menu and choose Export.
| | 00:51 | Flash is over here next to Images. You can
see in this case, for this presentation,
| | 00:55 | I have only got one option and that's
whether or not I'm going to include the
| | 00:58 | audio files in this presentation. If
I don't want them, I just deselect the checkbox.
| | 01:02 | If I do want them, I'll give it a click.
| | 01:05 | Now, new in Keynote '08 is the ability
to include slideshow, sound tracks. So
| | 01:09 | if you have got an audio track
that's playing throughout the entire
| | 01:13 | presentation, you can choose to
include that. Now, this presentation doesn't,
| | 01:17 | so it's not selectable.
| | 01:19 | Also, if you have done narrations,
like we talked about in a previous movie,
| | 01:23 | you can include the slideshow recording,
if you have got it. Now, I don't in
| | 01:27 | this presentation, so
it's not selectable either.
| | 01:30 | All I need to do now is hit Next to
choose where it's going to go and what it's
| | 01:34 | going to be called. So PresentingE is
the name of my Keynote presentation.
| | 01:38 | I'm going to keep that name.
| | 01:39 | I am not going to put it right on my
Desktop, because more than one file gets
| | 01:43 | created when we export to Flash. In fact,
a couple get created. So I'm going to
| | 01:47 | create a new folder called
FlashExport. I'll click Create to create that
| | 01:54 | folder. When I click the Export button,
off goes my Keynote presentation into a
| | 01:58 | Flash format.
| | 02:00 | So it's probably best, you will see in
a moment when we see the warnings, to
| | 02:04 | keep your presentation simple in
Keynote before exporting it to Flash and then
| | 02:09 | you can take some other applications.
If you are going to be using this
| | 02:12 | presentation on a web page, for example,
there are lots of tools you have at
| | 02:16 | your disposal for making
modifications to the Flash version.
| | 02:20 | So here you can see there are some
warnings that occurred, and you will be
| | 02:23 | surprised how many. We can choose not
to review those and just accept what was
| | 02:27 | done for us, or we can review them by
clicking the Review button. Look at the
| | 02:31 | document warnings here. There is a
scrollbar here indicating there is more than
| | 02:35 | I can see, so I'm going to just size
this window so you can see them all.
| | 02:39 | Look at that.
| | 02:40 | So transitions, they don't get exported
and nothing is done to resolve that. A
| | 02:45 | lot of the builds are not exported,
but they are replaced with the Dissolve
| | 02:50 | effect. 3D charts are exported as
bitmaps. There is another build that was
| | 02:56 | replaced with the Dissolve effect.
| | 02:58 | Couldn't export builds on 3D charts.
That didn't work at all. You can see most
| | 03:02 | of these have to do with builds.
| | 03:04 | Couldn't export an audio file because
of an unknown error. There is nothing
| | 03:08 | more than just the fact
that it's an unknown error.
| | 03:11 | Couldn't export as a media file on
slide 7. So lots of stuff didn't come over
| | 03:16 | in the translation. But if we clear all
of these and close this up and go view
| | 03:21 | that Flash presentation,
we'll see how it turned out.
| | 03:25 | So there on my Desktop you can see my
FlashExport folder. When I double click
| | 03:29 | that to open it up, you can see that
there is my flash file, .swf, my SWF file.
| | 03:34 | That's the actual presentation. But a
web page is also created in HTML file
| | 03:39 | containing the movie. This is great
if I want to view it on a web browser.
| | 03:43 | So I'm going to double click on
PresentingE.html here. Opens up my default
| | 03:48 | browser. You can see slide
number 1 here in my home page.
| | 03:52 | Now, I have got a little finger
pointing, meaning that I can click on this
| | 03:57 | slide to move to the next one. There
is no transition there. It just goes to
| | 04:00 | the next one.
| | 04:02 | Then here you can see I have got that
Dissolve effect replacing one of the
| | 04:05 | build effects I was using in my Keynote
presentation. With every click, you can
| | 04:10 | see down below another presentation
effect down here that was replaced, build
| | 04:15 | effect is a Dissolve effect in Flash.
It's going through each of those using
| | 04:20 | the timings I had in my Keynote
presentation. That's good. At least it kept those.
| | 04:25 | It's not a bad presentation. It doesn't
have the same effects that I'm used to
| | 04:28 | seeing in my Keynote presentation, but
you can see it's not all lost, is it?
| | 04:34 | No effects there.
| | 04:38 | The Dissolve effect replacing some
other build effect I had. That was my movie.
| | 04:43 | It's not going to play in Flash format,
but I do see that picture frame that
| | 04:48 | was used. It dissolves out. You can see
that was kept there, so I got my smart
| | 04:56 | build, its working nicely in a Flash format.
| | 05:01 | When I get to my last page where I have
got hyperlinks to the various web pages,
| | 05:04 | they do work actually. So I can
click on those to go to those web pages
| | 05:09 | at the end of my presentation.
| | 05:10 | I am going to close up Safari, return
to Keynote, and that covers exporting to Flash.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to HTML| 00:00 | Let's talk about another format that
you can export your Keynote presentation to
| | 00:05 | and a typical scenario where
perhaps you are going to be sharing
| | 00:08 | your presentation with someone and you have
no idea what kind of a computer they are using,
| | 00:12 | or what software is installed.
Well, the odds are pretty good they've got
| | 00:16 | a web browser so exporting
to HTML is a good option.
| | 00:20 | Perhaps, you travel with your
presentation and you use different computers
| | 00:24 | wherever you go, in that case you
don't really know what's installed or
| | 00:27 | what kind of computer you are going to be
using, so you might want to export to HTML
| | 00:31 | knowing that most computers have
at least a web browser installed.
| | 00:35 | Now when you export to HTML,
you are going to lose some things
| | 00:39 | like build effects, special effects and
transitions, and movies won't come over, and so on,
| | 00:43 | but we have seen that in the previous
lessons. It's a good option though if
| | 00:46 | you want to still be able to
present your information in a fun format.
| | 00:51 | So what we are going to do with
PresentingE still opened here, if you have got
| | 00:54 | Exercise Files, you can open that up
and click on File and then Export. We are
| | 00:59 | going to choose HTML up here at the top,
second last option, and you can see we
| | 01:04 | have the option that we have seen in
some of the other choices like exporting
| | 01:08 | all of our slides or just a range of
slides. I'm going to put in a range here.
| | 01:12 | I'm going to go from 2-6. There we go.
| | 01:16 | I also have the option to create
separate images for each stage of a build on a
| | 01:21 | slide. So for example, my title that
comes in one row at a time, a separate
| | 01:25 | image will be created for each row as
it comes in, and that's because I'm going
| | 01:29 | to click this checkbox right here.
| | 01:31 | The other option I would like to
always turn-on is to Include navigation
| | 01:34 | controls. That way you don't have to
use the browser buttons to move through
| | 01:38 | the pages in your presentation, you
can actually just click the Previous and
| | 01:42 | Next buttons that appear of the bottom
of the webpage, and if you want to go
| | 01:45 | back to the very first page or slide
in your presentation, you can click the
| | 01:49 | Home button. So I always
like to include those as well.
| | 01:52 | Now we got to choose the format that
our slides are going to be exported to and
| | 01:56 | you can see we have only got JPEG and
PNG formats to choose from here, and
| | 02:01 | that's because higher formats like
TIFF formats are really not web-friendly.
| | 02:04 | So we have got these two options. With
PNG selected, you get a high quality, a
| | 02:10 | fairly low file size, and you don't get
the slider. But with JPEG, you do get a
| | 02:15 | variable quality, it's not quite as
high as PNG, and it takes up less room and
| | 02:20 | it can take up even less space on your
drive if you bring it down to a very low
| | 02:24 | quality, the higher the
quality, the higher the file size.
| | 02:27 | I am going to go to 75 % just like that,
and I can type that in, I can use the
| | 02:31 | arrow buttons, or the slider to get
that in. Clicking Next takes me to the
| | 02:36 | screen where I get to choose a name for
my files. PresentingE is the name of my
| | 02:41 | Keynote presentation. I'm going to
keep that, but multiple files will be
| | 02:44 | created, even a folder, so I'm going to
create a new folder on my Desktop here
| | 02:49 | by clicking the New Folder button. I'm
going to call it HTMLexport and click Create.
| | 02:55 | That doesn't take very long when we
click the Export button to export our
| | 02:59 | Keynote presentation to HTML. You can
see that was pretty quick. So I'm going
| | 03:03 | to move my slide presentation out of
the way. There is my HTMLexport folder.
| | 03:08 | I'll double-click it to see that
there is an HTML file created here.
| | 03:12 | Double-clicking that will launch my
default browser and I'll start giving my
| | 03:16 | presentation, and it's going to be
using these supporting files in the
| | 03:19 | PresentingE files folder that got
created and here you can see I have got a
| | 03:23 | home and a next image down below.
| | 03:26 | I have also got a previous button
that's going to be used in my presentation
| | 03:31 | because I chose to show the navigation
controls. And then I have got all of the
| | 03:35 | different slides in my presentation.
Now take a look at Slide 3 here,
| | 03:38 | PresentingE003. It has a version 1, 2,
and 3, and that's one of those slides
| | 03:44 | that had a build effect in it. So
there is a separate image for each of the
| | 03:48 | builds as they come in.
| | 03:50 | All right, I'm going to go back and
if I want to view this presentation,
| | 03:53 | double-clicking PresentingE right
here will launch my web browser and I'll
| | 03:57 | start viewing it but I'm going to close
this up. We have gone through viewing a
| | 04:01 | presentation multiple times in this chapter.
| | 04:04 | I think you have got the idea but
exporting to HTML is a viable option if you
| | 04:09 | really don't know what kind of a
computer you are going to be using or what
| | 04:12 | kind of software is installed and
specifically if you are going to be sharing
| | 04:16 | your presentation with others and
you have no idea what they are using.
| | 04:21 | Try HTML, it's not a bad option, not
everything does move over, but you do end
| | 04:25 | up with the content of your
presentation and that is the most important part.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to an iPod| 00:00 | We are going to look at one last
format you can export your Keynote
| | 00:05 | presentation to. It's a brand new one
to Keynote '08 and it replaces one that
| | 00:10 | you may have noticed has gone missing
from the choice of Export formats and
| | 00:14 | that's iDVD.
| | 00:16 | So there is no more iDVD, although
you can go into iDVD and bring in your
| | 00:20 | presentation in some format or
another. However, we can now export our
| | 00:24 | presentation to a format called iPod,
which really is a QuickTime format but
| | 00:29 | it's going to store the movie in our
iTunes library ready to be viewed on our iPod.
| | 00:33 | So with PresentingE still opened here,
you can open that up from your Exercise
| | 00:37 | Files if you've got it. We are going
to click File, and Export and the last
| | 00:42 | option over here is iPod. Now when we
export to iPod, you can see that a movie
| | 00:47 | is added to our iTunes library that can
be viewed on our iPod and we have some
| | 00:52 | Playback Uses. Fixed Timing is
selected here for me by default.
| | 00:55 | The other option is Recorded Timing
and it's grayed out right now.
| | 01:00 | So if you have done voice narration and
you have created a recorded slideshow,
| | 01:05 | then that one is available to you. So
I'd like to use the timings built in to
| | 01:08 | the slide presentation with the narration.
| | 01:11 | In this case, we are going to choose
our timings by selecting Fixed Timings
| | 01:14 | here and choosing slide and build
durations and for our purposes, I'm going to
| | 01:19 | make this very, very fast. So we
can at least see it in action but it's
| | 01:24 | unrealistic to expect anyone to be
able to view all of the content of our
| | 01:27 | slides using these timings,
it's just for our own purposes.
| | 01:31 | If you have got a soundtrack playing
throughout your presentation, you can
| | 01:34 | choose to include that as well, but
we don't in PresentingE, so you can see
| | 01:39 | this is grayed out. However, just
like exporting to QuickTime, other audio
| | 01:43 | files and movie files and
everything do transfer over nicely.
| | 01:49 | So when we hit Next, we get to choose
what it's going to be called and where we
| | 01:53 | are going to put it. I'm going to
put it right on the Desktop, call it
| | 01:56 | PresentingE, but keep in mind we chose
iPod format, so when I click Export, a
| | 02:01 | couple of things are going happen automatically.
| | 02:03 | Right away you can see iTunes has
opened up for me and you can see that the
| | 02:07 | Export is in progress here. So I'm
getting a preview of all of those build
| | 02:12 | effects as it moves from slide to
slide, the transitions are there as well.
| | 02:18 | There is some builds as well for my
table. So it's maintained all of those
| | 02:22 | things, which is kind of nice.
| | 02:25 | Here we go through the various slides.
When we arrive at the one with the
| | 02:29 | video, the video does play. We set it
to play for a very short time, so when
| | 02:33 | it's done, it's move on to the next
slide. All those special effects including
| | 02:38 | our Smart Build, very nice, and
eventually we arrive at the very last slide in
| | 02:43 | the presentation and the Export is done.
| | 02:46 | So you can actually see it here
showing up. We've got PresentingE3.
| | 02:48 | So I'm going to use this one, I'm going to
double-click it, and you can see that it
| | 02:56 | launches right here in iTunes. So all
of those effects came over nicely and you
| | 03:01 | can see some of those build effects.
| | 03:04 | I mean, in iTunes, I have all of it,
iTunes tools at my disposal, adjust the
| | 03:09 | volume when we get to that video, if
I need to, I'm going to bring it down
| | 03:12 | right away. I can fast forward, I can
go back and forth, pause my presentation
| | 03:17 | if I wanted to. Eventually, we are
going to come up to that slide with our
| | 03:22 | movie. I just want you to see that one
because it is a movie within a movie,
| | 03:26 | isn't it? Which is kind of cool,
just like when we exported to QuickTime.
| | 03:29 | Here it comes, and I can adjust the
volume. Here we go on to the next slide,
| | 03:41 | there is that Smart Build, it looks
pretty good here in iTunes. And as I
| | 03:46 | mentioned, this is a QuickTime file,
so we can view this in QuickTime as well
| | 03:50 | if we have got it. When it's done, I'm
going to go up to iTunes here and just
| | 03:54 | quit iTunes.
| | 03:56 | I am back to Keynote. You can see
there is my file, it is a QuickTime movie
| | 04:02 | sitting here on my Desktop, but
because I chose iPod, some things happened
| | 04:06 | automatically, it was put into iTunes
for me. There was another file there with
| | 04:11 | the same name so it renumbered it,
which is kind of nice and that's the last
| | 04:15 | option for exporting your Keynote
presentations, it's a brand new one called iPod.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reviewer comments| 00:01 | Let's discuss one last scenario
where you might be sharing your Keynote
| | 00:05 | presentation with others and that
could be to collaborate or build a
| | 00:09 | presentation together. In that case,
you want to be able to communicate
| | 00:13 | questions, comments, suggestions,
and so on while collaborating on the
| | 00:18 | presentation.
| | 00:19 | So let's just say somebody sent us this
presentation for our feedback. One way
| | 00:23 | to give feedback is to use comments.
You can see up here on the toolbar there
| | 00:28 | is a Comment button for inserting
comments. We can also go up to the Insert
| | 00:32 | menu and choose Comment from here.
| | 00:35 | Just before we do put a comment on a
slide, I'm going to up to the View menu
| | 00:39 | here and I'm going to come all the way
down here where it says Hide Comments.
| | 00:45 | Now that means by default, we'll be
showing comments. So when we create our
| | 00:50 | comments, we'll be able to see them
right on the slides. Here is where you go
| | 00:53 | to hide them, but we want to make
sure that we are showing comments when we
| | 00:56 | insert them. So I'm going to click on
Comment right here and it shows that
| | 01:00 | yellow sticky note.
| | 01:01 | In the old days, when we were working
with paper, that's what we have used.
| | 01:04 | We put these little sticky notes on the
various pages and write down our questions
| | 01:09 | or comments or feedback. You can see
the cursor is flashing in here, waiting
| | 01:13 | for me to actually type-in a comment.
So let's say I'm not too keen on this theme.
| | 01:19 | Can we explore a different theme?
This one is not very interesting.
| | 01:36 | So I can keep typing away. This note
shows up in this default size, but look at
| | 01:40 | the bottom-right corner, there is a little
icon there that shows I can squish this up.
| | 01:44 | Now if I do, you can see that it
kind of cuts off my text and there is no
| | 01:49 | scroll bar. So you have got to be
careful, make sure that you can see all of
| | 01:51 | your text. I can go wider, longer. Once
I have got the size I want, I can also
| | 01:57 | move it around. I'm just going to make
sure that I'm on the note itself.
| | 02:01 | I'm going to put it up here in the top-
left corner. There is my comment.
| | 02:05 | Now there is a Close button in the top
-right corner, which would close this note.
| | 02:08 | If I go up to the View menu, of
course, if I choose Hide Comments,
| | 02:13 | I'm not going to see any of the comments.
So that's great if I'm working on but if
| | 02:17 | I'm going to send this off to somebody
with my feedback, I want to make sure
| | 02:20 | that they are visible. With it not
visible, I can't even add comments. So back
| | 02:25 | I go up to View and I'm going
to Show Comments. Here we go.
| | 02:30 | So we have got our comment in here.
Another neat thing is that if we export
| | 02:34 | this to PDF, we can choose to add those
comments in there. So long as they are
| | 02:38 | being viewed, they will be part of the
slide presentation that we export. Same
| | 02:42 | thing goes for printing. If I go up to
File and choose Print, and now I'm going
| | 02:48 | to switch to Keynote here, notice
that over here on my left-hand side if I
| | 02:54 | choose Individual Slides, my
individual slides will print with each of the
| | 02:59 | notes showing up if they are visible on
my slide. So there is no real option to
| | 03:04 | say include the comments or anything,
but they will be included by default if
| | 03:08 | they are showing up on your slide.
So if you don't want them printing,
| | 03:11 | obviously, that's a good scenario for
going up to the View menu and choosing to
| | 03:16 | hide those comments.
| | 03:18 | So keep in mind, if you are
collaborating with others and you are building
| | 03:21 | presentations together and you need a
means for feedback, this is one option,
| | 03:26 | adding comments to the
various slides in your presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Creating Custom ThemesEditing master slides| 00:02 | This entire chapter is going to be
dedicated to those of you out there who find
| | 00:06 | yourselves creating presentations in
Keynote using a certain theme that's close
| | 00:11 | to what you want, but then you have
to go into that theme and start making
| | 00:14 | regular changes over and over and over
again. We can save a lot of time and
| | 00:18 | a lot of effort by modifying the actual
theme itself, creating your own custom theme
| | 00:23 | and then using that theme whenever
you need to create a presentation with
| | 00:27 | those settings.
| | 00:28 | That's what we are going to do in
this chapter. We are going to break it up
| | 00:30 | into sections. In this lesson, we are
going to start by modifying the master slides
| | 00:34 | in a theme that's close to what
you want and then by the end of the chapter,
| | 00:38 | we'll saving up your custom theme,
giving it a name so you can use it
| | 00:43 | over and over again.
| | 00:44 | Let's see what we can customize when
we are creating our own themes. Well,
| | 00:48 | we can customize Title and Body Boxes,
so those titles and the body looks.
| | 00:52 | It could be a bulleted list, it could be a
subtitle. We can make changes and customize
| | 00:58 | those settings for any theme and
then save those settings in our masters.
| | 01:02 | Bulleted List, Font Styles, Paragraph
Alignments. We can change the styles for
| | 01:07 | any images, tables or charts that
are used in a presentation using this
| | 01:12 | customize theme. We can set up the
transition styles to be a certain default
| | 01:16 | for our theme. We can even adjust
Fill and Stroke settings for the various
| | 01:20 | objects that appear on the slides in
the presentation we create with our new
| | 01:24 | customized theme. So
let's get started with that.
| | 01:27 | I am going to close up this
presentation and I'm going to go up to File, and
| | 01:32 | choose New. So the very first thing
you would want to do is find the theme
| | 01:36 | that's close to what you want, so
there is not too much customizing to do and
| | 01:40 | then make changes to that particular
theme saving it as your own in the end.
| | 01:43 | I am going to click on Black 800*600
selected for me and I'll click Choose and
| | 01:50 | it's just like I'm starting a brand
new presentation using this theme. Now to
| | 01:53 | start making changes or customizing the
theme itself, I can modify the masters
| | 01:58 | that are used to create this
particular theme. And if you don't remember to
| | 02:02 | view the masters, we just come up
over here in Navigation View here and we
| | 02:06 | click and drag this little
slider down to view the master slides.
| | 02:10 | So currently slide 1 is using the
title and subtitle master and probably what
| | 02:15 | you'd want to do is you go through
the list of masters and figure out which
| | 02:19 | ones that you would like to use on a
regular basis in your presentation and
| | 02:22 | make changes to those masters only.
| | 02:24 | If you are not going to be using, for
example, the blank slide or the blank
| | 02:27 | slide's fine the way it is, then you
don't have to touch it. But the ones that
| | 02:31 | you do want to customize, you make
sure that it's selected over here by
| | 02:34 | clicking on them. You will know it's
selected by that yellow border that
| | 02:38 | appears. And then what you will see on
your screen is the actual master itself.
| | 02:42 | So any changes we make to the
master slide, for in this case title and
| | 02:47 | subtitle, we'll see those changes
on our actual slides when we use this
| | 02:51 | particular master. So let's make a
couple of changes. First thing I'm going to
| | 02:55 | do is change the background here.
| | 02:56 | So if I don't like the background for
this slide, I'd go up to the Inspector
| | 03:00 | and we are going to go to our Slide
Inspector, in this case, it's the Master
| | 03:04 | Slide Inspector because that's what
we've selected and we are going to change
| | 03:08 | the appearance.
| | 03:09 | So right now, you can see the layout,
it's title and there is body, the body
| | 03:13 | down below, you can see it has two
levels. And one of them is the subtitle and
| | 03:17 | then, of course, there is the
second level in that subtitle.
| | 03:19 | If we never used a subtitle in our
title slide, we can deselect the body so all
| | 03:24 | we have is Title Text now, perfect.
Here is our background down below, Color
| | 03:29 | Fill right now and Black is selected.
We can change it to a Gradient Fill,
| | 03:33 | Image, Tinted Image.
| | 03:34 | I am going to go to Gradient Fill and
then I'm going to change the colors that
| | 03:38 | are used in the Gradient. Black is fine
at the top but the gray at the bottom,
| | 03:42 | I'm going to click down here and my
Colors palette opens up, and I'm going to
| | 03:46 | choose a color that I'd like to, I like
this red color here. It looks good,
| | 03:50 | I'm going to close up my Colors palette
and I'm going to adjust the angle of that
| | 03:55 | gradient, kind of like it to go on a
diagonal like so. And once I've got my
| | 04:01 | changes, all I have to do is close
up my Master Slide Inspector and those
| | 04:06 | changes will be saved.
| | 04:07 | Of course, there is some other things
that I can do, like object placeholders,
| | 04:10 | slide numbering if I want it, allow
objects on the slide to layer with the
| | 04:14 | master, all of those options we talked
about in previous lessons are available
| | 04:18 | here in the master as well.
| | 04:19 | We can also adjust the transition so
that if we use this theme, there are
| | 04:24 | certain transitions that will be used,
and we'll never have to set them up on
| | 04:28 | these particular slides when we used
them in our theme but we'll leave that for
| | 04:31 | later and I'm going to close this up.
| | 04:33 | The other change I can make is to the
actual text itself. So I'm going to click
| | 04:37 | here on the text-box and I'm going to
go up to my Fonts palette. So right away
| | 04:43 | down below, you can see what's
happening here. If I highlight my text, I'm
| | 04:46 | going to double-click to select it all.
I can go to any of the fonts. I'm going
| | 04:51 | to select All Fonts here.
| | 04:53 | I can find out what's being used. It's
this one here, Gill Sans with Regular
| | 04:58 | typeface. But if I don't like that one,
I can choose from any of the other font
| | 05:01 | families. I'm going to go up to -- I
like this Copperplate, and if I wanted
| | 05:09 | that to be Bold, maybe a different size,
you can size it down or up, I'm going
| | 05:15 | to go down to 60, just like so, I
could change the text color and the
| | 05:19 | background if I wanted to.
| | 05:21 | But everything looks good just like
that so I'm going to close this up and
| | 05:25 | I'm going to go to my actual first title
slide and you can see already here, there
| | 05:30 | is no body down below. My new title
text uses that font, that size, and that
| | 05:35 | appearance, so by double-clicking here,
I'll start typing. I'm using those new settings.
| | 05:47 | So, of course, I'd go down through
the various masters making those same
| | 05:50 | adjustments to any of the masters,
I think that I would be using in a
| | 05:54 | presentation. Again, if there are
slides in here that I never used, for
| | 05:58 | example, come down here, I've never
used the Photo-Horizontal Reflection in.
| | 06:03 | I wouldn't waste any time making changes
to that particular master but the ones
| | 06:07 | that I do want to use in my presentation,
I'd spend a little bit of time now to
| | 06:11 | save a lot of time later.
| | 06:13 | All right, let's continue on into the
next lesson where we'll start making some
| | 06:17 | additional modifications to our slide theme.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing standard objects| 00:00 | All right, we're just continuing now
from the previous lesson building our
| | 00:04 | brand-new theme, and in this case
we're going to look at the various objects
| | 00:08 | that you can place on the slides in
your presentation and how we can customize
| | 00:12 | those to appear certain way every single time.
| | 00:15 | Think about this scenario for a second.
On some slides you would like to add
| | 00:19 | your own free text. So every time
you go up to the textbox, it inserts a
| | 00:23 | brand-new textbox, but it's always the
wrong font. It's always the wrong color,
| | 00:28 | maybe the wrong appearance, and you
have to make those changes every single time.
| | 00:31 | So make the change once in your brand-
new theme and it will appear that way
| | 00:35 | every time you add it to the various
slides in your presentation. That's what
| | 00:38 | we're going to do in this lesson. We're
also going to look at shapes and tables
| | 00:41 | and charts and how you can do that too.
| | 00:43 | So here I'm with a brand-new
presentation again. I don't have an actual file
| | 00:47 | that I've opened up. I'm just creating
one on the fly here and again it's based
| | 00:52 | on something that's close to the
eventual theme I'm going to save at the end of
| | 00:56 | this chapter.
| | 00:57 | So we've already made a change to our
Title & Subtitle master here. Masters are
| | 01:02 | showing over here in the Navigation
pane and that's where we're going to make
| | 01:05 | our changes.
| | 01:06 | To set up customize objects and to
save those, all you really have to do is
| | 01:11 | bring the object into a slide, make the
changes, save it as a default and then
| | 01:16 | get rid of the object later on. Then
every time you add it, you'll be using
| | 01:19 | those new defaults.
| | 01:21 | So I'm going to go to the blank slide
here and I'm going to start with our
| | 01:24 | textbox. So remember that scenario, we
click textbox we get this square in the
| | 01:28 | middle of our screen with the word
Text using a certain font, a certain color
| | 01:32 | and so on. That's based
on the theme we're using.
| | 01:35 | Also, keep in mind here that all these
changes we're making, we're not making
| | 01:39 | them to an existing theme, we're making
them in a presentation and we're going
| | 01:43 | to be saving all of these changes as
our own theme later on. So we're not
| | 01:47 | altering any of the existing themes in Keynote.
| | 01:50 | So we've got our text object here on
the screen and we want to make a few
| | 01:53 | adjustments to it. So the first thing
I'm going to do is go up to my Inspector
| | 01:57 | here and I'm going to go to my Text
Inspector and let's just say I like to have
| | 02:01 | a little more space around the outside
border here. So I'm going to change my
| | 02:05 | Inset Margin from 2 points, I'm going
to go all the way up to 10 points. That's
| | 02:09 | good. So that's something I'll never
have to do again once I save this change.
| | 02:14 | I'm going to close up my inspector
and I'm going to go to the Fonts palette now.
| | 02:17 | Here from my Fonts palette maybe
this is the font I would like to use,
| | 02:23 | Futura. Medium is fine but the size,
maybe I would like to just bring that up a
| | 02:29 | little bit up to about 40. So
I never have to do that again.
| | 02:33 | If I wanted to choose from any of the
other font families, I could, of course,
| | 02:37 | the different typefaces, the colors
as well. I can use Underlining and
| | 02:42 | Strikethrough and so on. All of the
changes I make now like the Text Color,
| | 02:46 | for example, I'm going to go to kind of a Pale
Yellow here and close up my Colors palette.
| | 02:53 | All of these changes that I'm making
to my text, I now need to save as the
| | 02:57 | default, so that every time I add this
textbox, this is what I'm going to get.
| | 03:02 | So to do that we go up to Format and
all the way down to Advanced down here.
| | 03:06 | Notice the options I have. Define Text
for Current Master, so every time I open
| | 03:12 | up a blank slide and add text, this is
the way it's going to appear, but every
| | 03:16 | time I open up a different kind of
slide in my presentation and add text,
| | 03:20 | it's going to be the old way.
| | 03:21 | So these are my two choices, Define
Text for the Current Master or All Masters.
| | 03:25 | Well, no matter what kind of slide
I'm using in Keynote when I add text I
| | 03:29 | wanted to be the way I just set up.
So I'm going to use Define Text for All
| | 03:33 | Masters. Remember, this is going to
be All Masters in your brand-new theme.
| | 03:38 | You're not affecting any of the
existing themes right now in Keynote.
| | 03:41 | So same can be applied to shapes. So
it's the same procedure. We'll go up to
| | 03:45 | Shapes, just going to add a circle. You
can see how it appears, by default, in
| | 03:50 | this particular theme, it's got that
Image Fill, certain size, we're going to
| | 03:54 | go up to our Inspector here and use
the Graphics Inspector to make a few changes.
| | 03:59 | I'm going to change it from Image Fill
to Gradient Fill. I find I keep doing
| | 04:03 | this every time I bring in a shape, so
I'm going to do it here in my new theme.
| | 04:08 | I'm going to change the colors, and the
Gradient is going to go from that color
| | 04:16 | to white color. I'll change the angle.
And if I want a Stroke around the
| | 04:21 | outside, I'm going to use Outlined.
That line color is going to be white and I
| | 04:29 | can make that a little bit thicker as well.
| | 04:33 | So all the changes I'm making to this
particular circle will be applied to any
| | 04:37 | shape that has a fill from the Shapes
dropdown here. So when I add new shapes
| | 04:41 | like a square or rectangles, some of
those other ones that require a fill.
| | 04:46 | They'll all have these particular
characteristics if I save this as a default.
| | 04:52 | So that's what I'm going to do right
now. I'm going to close up both of my
| | 04:55 | palettes here and I'm going to do the
same thing, going to go up to Format,
| | 04:59 | down to Advanced and I'm going to
define the shape for All Masters in my
| | 05:03 | brand-new theme.
| | 05:04 | So I can get rid of these now. I don't
need them. That's the last thing to do.
| | 05:11 | If I come down to my actual
presentation here, where I'm on my Title slide and
| | 05:15 | I go to add a shape such a triangle,
you can see how it appears. It's got that
| | 05:20 | new fill, it's got that border, all of
those characteristics I just set up with
| | 05:25 | any old shape on a master.
| | 05:27 | So we'll just delete that from our slide.
Let's go back to the Blank and let's
| | 05:32 | do something now with our lines. Our
lines are separate from our shapes that
| | 05:36 | use fill. So I'm going to just use the
regular line. That's how it appears, a
| | 05:39 | straight line, and I'm
going to go up to my Inspector.
| | 05:44 | With the Graphics Inspector selected,
maybe every time I bring in a line,
| | 05:48 | I want it to be a Picture Frame, or
maybe it should be just a regular old line,
| | 05:55 | but it needs to be dotted or dashed.
I'm going to leave it at Solid but
| | 06:00 | I'm going to change the thickness.
| | 06:02 | I find that every time I bring in a
line I have to change the thickness up to 6
| | 06:06 | pixels, so I'm going to do that now and
I'm going to leave the Endpoints as is.
| | 06:11 | If I wanted a Shadow applied to that,
I could but if I don't usually create a
| | 06:15 | Shadow then I won't make that selection,
just going to make that simple change.
| | 06:19 | Close out my Graphics Inspector and
of course I need to go up to Format >
| | 06:24 | Advanced and apply that to all lines
that are created in any master in my new
| | 06:29 | theme and I'll delete it. Let's try it
out on an actual slide. So we'll leave
| | 06:34 | the masters and go down to our slide
and let's just draw about one of these
| | 06:39 | ones with arrows at each end. Any line
affected by those changes you can see is
| | 06:43 | much thicker. There we go. I don't
need those on my presentation, but the
| | 06:51 | change has been made.
| | 06:53 | So same thing can be done working
with tables, working with charts. Again,
| | 06:58 | you're going to use your Inspector,
you can use your Graphics Inspector if
| | 07:01 | you're making adjustments to your
tables or charts up here. You've also got
| | 07:04 | your Table Inspector and your Chart
Inspector, you make changes to some of the
| | 07:08 | formatting, the opacity
settings, that kind of stuff.
| | 07:12 | Same thing for images, whenever
you bring in image into your slide
| | 07:15 | presentation. All you need to do is go
to the master, bring in an image. Once
| | 07:20 | you've got the image in there I'm going
to go up to Media just to show you this
| | 07:23 | quickly. It doesn't matter which image
you choose, but if every time you bring
| | 07:27 | in an image, you want it to appear a
certain way. I'm going to size this down,
| | 07:32 | so it's easier to work with.
| | 07:35 | Let's say there should always be a
border around the outside. Well, of course,
| | 07:38 | we can go up to our Inspector,
Graphics Inspector, put a Stroke around the
| | 07:43 | outside of it. Change the color, the
style, I'm going to keep it Solid but
| | 07:49 | I'm going to change it to white. Make it
a little bit thicker, and adjust the
| | 07:56 | opacity. Maybe Reflection is
something I use over and over and over.
| | 08:02 | So I'm going to close up my palettes and
I'm going to go up to Format, with it still
| | 08:07 | selected down to Advanced >
Define Image for All Masters.
| | 08:12 | Now I'll delete it from this master. I
would go to my actual slide and I bring
| | 08:16 | in any image. It will have those
characteristics. So there is that border,
| | 08:23 | you can see it. I'm going to size this one
down so it's easier to look at. It's got
| | 08:28 | the reflection down below, the new
border settings. That will save me a lot of
| | 08:33 | time down the road as
I'm working with my images.
| | 08:37 | So it applies to shapes, to textboxes,
tables, charts, have some fun setting
| | 08:41 | that up. You'll spend quite a bit of
time customizing exactly how each of the
| | 08:46 | objects should appear on your slides.
But once you've done it once, it's set up forever,
| | 08:55 | and of course that will save you a lot
of time and a lot of effort down the road.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving themes| 00:00 | So you decided to invest some time
in designing your own theme. You went
| | 00:05 | through to the various masters in your
presentation, made some changes to the
| | 00:10 | theme you started out with, made some
changes to the background, maybe to some
| | 00:14 | of the placeholders on the various
masters in this presentation. Then you went
| | 00:18 | in and modified some of the objects
like textboxes, and shapes and images,
| | 00:23 | maybe charts and tables as well. You
invested all of that time and all of that
| | 00:27 | effort and now you want to be able to
use this theme on a regular basis.
| | 00:31 | You need to save the theme. If you don't,
you'll lose all of that work.
| | 00:35 | So very important, yet very easy to do.
| | 00:38 | Once you have made all your changes you
just go up to the File menu and choose
| | 00:41 | Save Theme. Now, you can see what
happens here automatically, I'm taken to the
| | 00:46 | Themes folder and I can type in the
name of my new theme up here in the Save As
| | 00:51 | window. So I'm going to type in
DavidsTheme, so it's easily recognizable. It's
| | 00:56 | going to go into that Themes
folder I was telling you about.
| | 00:59 | I am going to click on the Themes
dropdown here because it's important to know
| | 01:03 | exactly where to find your custom themes.
They get saved in this Theme folders
| | 01:08 | not with the Keynote themes, they are
kept separate, but you might want to come
| | 01:12 | back to the Themes folder and remove
theme so that you no longer use and you
| | 01:16 | created maybe a long time ago.
| | 01:18 | So you get there by going through your
home folder Library Application Support,
| | 01:22 | iWork, Keynote and then into Themes.
That's where they are going to be. If you
| | 01:26 | had any audio or movies in any of the
masters in your current theme and you are
| | 01:31 | going to want to save those into
your brand-new theme, make sure this is
| | 01:34 | checked off. Otherwise they won't be.
I don't have any mine, so it really
| | 01:39 | doesn't matter. When I click Save,
I'll be saving my brand-new theme, which
| | 01:43 | means I'm going to be able to access
that theme now from the Theme Chooser.
| | 01:47 | So if I go up to File and choose New
from Theme Chooser, it's going to open
| | 01:52 | that up, and I'm going to scroll
down to the bottom and after all of the
| | 01:56 | Keynote themes including the nine new
once we get Keynote '08, there is my
| | 02:00 | brand-new and down at the bottom, I can
give it a click. Notice that I created
| | 02:04 | an 800x600 but I've also got
1024x768 as an option, when I choose it
| | 02:10 | I'm creating my brand-new presentation
using my brand-new theme. Very nice.
| | 02:15 | Now, like I said, over time you may
wish to go into that Themes folder and
| | 02:19 | remove some old themes that you
created sometime ago and never use. And to do
| | 02:24 | that, no problem. I'm just going to
move this over here and go to my Mac hard
| | 02:29 | drive and I'm going to go to my home
folder right here labeled dave and then
| | 02:34 | all I have to do is remember that
path. It was Library/Application
| | 02:36 | Support/iWork. There is Keynote,
there is my Themes folder and there is my
| | 02:45 | brand-new theme. You can see it's called
DavidsTheme and it's got an extension kth.
| | 02:49 | Keynote theme is the extension.
That's how I recognize it. And of course,
| | 02:53 | if I didn't want that any longer I
just drag it down into my Trash, but I do
| | 02:58 | want to keep that for future use. So
I'm going to close up this window, and
| | 03:03 | just move my presentation back over here.
| | 03:05 | All right, so putting a little time
and effort into creating your own themes
| | 03:09 | will save you tons a time and effort
down the road, if you find that it's still
| | 03:13 | a little bit too challenging or too
time consuming, and you've got the money,
| | 03:17 | you can go out and buy themes, there
is lots out there, many websites have
| | 03:21 | Keynote themes for sale. And I have
just happen to have Safari open down here.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to go into Safari and just
show you here I'm at a site jumsoft.
| | 03:31 | Jumsoft has many Keynote themes. You
can see some themes down here, some
| | 03:36 | listed, lots of themes to choose from
all occasions. Layouts to match your
| | 03:42 | every need, all kinds of options in
here from this particular site called Jumsoft.
| | 03:47 | There is another site here called
KeynoteThemePark and you can see I can come
| | 03:52 | down here and buy some cool themes as well.
| | 03:55 | Here is another one. KeynotePro, iWork
Themes for professionals. All you really
| | 04:06 | need to do is Google Keynote Themes and
you'll find all of these sites, and if
| | 04:11 | you prefer to go out and buy the themes,
you find that a lot faster and easier.
| | 04:16 | Feel free to do that but of course if
you want to create your own themes, you know how.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | Well, I hope you enjoyed learning all
about Keynote '08. You should now be
| | 00:04 | feeling comfortable with the many
features and functions of this powerful
| | 00:07 | presentation software application.
| | 00:10 | You have learned all about using the
tool for creating stunning presentations,
| | 00:14 | but if you'd like to master the actual
art of presenting and how to use this
| | 00:19 | tool effectively, I highly
recommend checking out another title in the
| | 00:22 | lynda.com library titled
Effective Presentations by Jeff Van West.
| | 00:26 | I'm David Rivers. Until
next time, thanks for watching.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
